JP6713437B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine, and more particularly to a gaming machine that notifies a player.

Among players who enjoy playing games on a pachinko gaming machine or a pachislot gaming machine, there is a player who selects a gaming machine in the hope that it will be in an advantageous state for the player. However, it is generally difficult to find a gaming machine that is in an advantageous state for a player without playing a game. Generally, on the hall side, we would like to keep the number of gaming machines in a favorable condition for players, if possible.On the other hand, during times when the number of players is low, gaming machines are used for the purpose of attracting customers. There is also a hall that wants to be in an advantageous state for the player, and a gaming machine that can set the gaming machine in an advantageous state for the player is desired.

For example, Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming machine in which the gaming state when the power of the gaming machine is turned off is stored as a backup, and when the power is turned on again, the gaming state can be started in that gaming state. Has been done. In such a gaming machine, when the hall is closed in a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, the gaming machine is turned off in the gaming state that is advantageous to the player. If the power of this gaming machine is turned on immediately before the opening of the store on the next day, the gaming machine will be in the advantageous game state for the player, which is the state when the store was closed on the previous day. When such a gaming machine is installed, a player whose closing time is in an advantageous gaming state and enjoys the game in an advantageous gaming state by playing on the gaming machine from the opening of the next day be able to. In this way, the player may be able to find a gaming machine that is in an advantageous state.

JP, 2013-22248, A

However, in this gaming machine, unless the power is turned off in a gaming state advantageous to the player, the gaming state will not be advantageous to the player at the next power-on. The gaming machine is not always in an advantageous gaming state for the player after the power of the gaming machine is turned off, that is, after the store is closed. Therefore, with this gaming machine, it is difficult to realize a gaming state that is advantageous to the player at the desired timing on the side of the hall.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of executing a state advantageous to a player at a desired timing.

The gaming machine of the present invention is an operation means capable of determining a final game result according to an operation mode of a player, and a lottery means capable of determining a preliminary game result related to the final game result based on a lottery. With regard to the operation of the operation means, an informing means for informing an operation mode that can be a first result advantageous to the player among the final game results, and an informing right is granted when a predetermined informing condition is satisfied. A right granting means capable of performing, an initial setting means for setting an initial setting by performing a predetermined initialization process, and a game that is won in a predetermined lottery after the predetermined initialization process is performed. When the player has not won the predetermined lottery after the predetermined initialization process has been performed and the special game state in which the notification can be executed by the notification means , which is a game state advantageous for the player to shift to is a gaming state to stay, and a normal gaming state in which notification is not performed by the notification unit, the entitlement unit, when the in a state where the initial setting is set a predetermined notification condition is satisfied Increases the probability of granting the notification right as compared with the case where the predetermined notification condition is satisfied in a state where the initial setting is not set, and the notification means sets the right in the special game state. When the notification right is granted by the granting means and the preliminary game result that can be the advantageous first result is determined by the lottery means, the advantageous first result can be obtained for the player. It is characterized in that the operation mode can be notified. Further, in this gaming machine, a notification right number updating means for updating the number of the notification rights is further provided, and the notification right number updating means can provide a first result advantageous to the player in the state where the notification right number is present. When the notification of the operation mode is performed and the advantageous first result is obtained as the final game result, the notification right number is subtracted, and according to the notification of the notification means with the notification right number. Without the above, when the advantageous first result is obtained as the final game result, the notification right number is not subtracted.
The gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like described later) is operated by a player to launch a game ball (for example, a launching device 15 described later). Based on the starting opening (for example, a second starting opening 45 described later) into which the fired game ball can enter, and the fact that the game ball enters the starting opening, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the inside. It is possible to change from a closed state to an open state in which a game ball can easily enter, and a special winning device (for example, a second special winning device described later) having a specific area (for example, a V winning opening 57 described later) inside. 53) and a special game state (for example, a big hit game state described later) that shifts when a game ball enters the specific area, a first special game state advantageous for the player (for example, 16 described later). Multiple types of special game states including a round "big hit game" and the like and a second special game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first special game state (for example, two rounds "big hit game" described later). A gaming state lottery means (for example, a main CPU 71 which will be described later) that determines any one of them by lottery when the game ball enters the starting opening, which triggers the operation of changing the big winning device to the open state. Etc.) and, regarding the lottery result by the game state lottery means, inform the advantageous information indicating that the game state to be shifted when the game ball enters the specific area becomes the first special game state. (For example, a liquid crystal display device 13 described later, for example, a display area 13a described later), and a right granting unit that can grant a notification right when a predetermined notification condition is satisfied ( (For example, a sub CPU 201 described later)), the notification means is given the notification right by the right granting means, and the first special game state is determined by a lottery result by the game state lottery means. When it is determined, it is possible to notify the advantageous information.

In this way, regarding the lottery result of the game state lottery means, since the advantageous information indicating that the game state is the first special game state advantageous to the player is notified, the player responds to the notification content. There is a possibility that the game state can be advantageously advanced by shifting to the first special game state by performing a game ball firing operation. That is, there is a possibility that the player can advantageously proceed with the game by his/her own operation. Therefore, unlike the case where the player's advantage or disadvantage is not greatly influenced by the player's operation and is determined by the control of the game machine, the player concentrates on the firing operation so as to be in an advantageous state. You will be able to enjoy the game without getting tired. Thereby, the interest of the game can be improved.

Here, the notification of the advantageous information is, for example, a notification indicating that a game with a large number of rounds is determined by lottery when the types of special game states are two types with different round numbers. At this time, for example, the second special game state may be a 2R hit state, and the first special game state may be a 16R hit state that is more advantageous to the player than the 2R hit state. Further, for example, the second special game state may be a hit state that does not shift to the time saving game state after the end, and the first special game state may be a hit state that shifts to the time saving game state after the end.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the first aspect of the present invention described above, the game machine is provided with a passage area through which the launched game ball can pass, and the starting opening is based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage area. It is possible to change the state where the ball is difficult to enter to the state where the game ball is easy to enter, and the game state is changed to the state where the game ball is easy to enter A game state transition means (for example, to be described later) for transitioning to a game state of the special game state (for example, a time saving game state described later), the special game state or the normal game state where the special winning device is likely to be in the open state. Main game 71 and the like), the game state transition means, after transitioning from the normal game state to the special game state, then the specific game state and the special game state are alternately transitioned a predetermined number of times It is possible to shift to the normal gaming state after executing the set game, and the right granting means shifts to the second special gaming state when a game ball enters the specific area. It is possible to grant the notification right based on the number of times the game is played, and the rights granting means is configured such that all of the predetermined number of special game states executed during the set game are in the second special game state. The notification right may be granted on the condition that it is present.

In this way, the notification right is granted based on the number of times the game has transitioned to the second special game state, which is disadvantageous to the player. In other words, the advantageous privilege that the notification right is given according to the disadvantageous state is given, and if the disadvantageous state occurs during the game, the player may eventually change to the advantageous state. It is expected that the game will be continued, and there is a high possibility that the game will be continued even in a disadvantageous state. Further, the player can continue to be motivated to switch to an advantageous state by his/her own shooting operation after the disadvantageous state.

It should be noted that the notification right may be granted when the number of times the game ball has entered the specific area has shifted to the second special game state once, or twice. It may be possible if the above is the case. In addition, when the number of times the game ball has entered the specific area has shifted to the second special game state has reached a predetermined number, a lottery is conducted, and the notification is given according to the result of the lottery. It may be possible to grant the right.

In addition, even if all of the predetermined number of special game states executed during the set game are in the second special game state, which is a disadvantageous state, the player expects to eventually change to an advantageous state. While continuing the game, there is a high possibility of continuing the game even in a disadvantageous state. Further, the player can continue to be motivated to be able to switch to an advantageous state by his/her operation after the disadvantageous state. With these, the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the gaming machine according to the first aspect of the present invention is different from the starting opening, and has a special starting opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first starting opening 44 described later) and the special starting. When a game ball enters the mouth, a special lottery means (for example, a main CPU 71 described later) for performing a special lottery for deciding whether or not to shift to the special game state, and the special lottery means A counting unit (for example, a main CPU 71 described later) that counts the number of times determined not to shift to the special game state, and a notification right is granted by the right granting unit when a predetermined number or more is counted by the counting unit. It is also possible to have a ceiling state operating means for operating an easy ceiling state (for example, a third high-probability state described later) with a predetermined probability. The predetermined probability also includes 1/1 (100%).

In this way, when the number of times determined not to shift to the special game state by the lottery of the special lottery means exceeds the predetermined number, the ceiling state is likely to be given the notification right. That is, in the case of an unfavorable state in which the state of not transitioning to the special game state continues, a privilege advantageous to the player such as a ceiling state is given. As a result, the player is expected to continue playing while expecting to change to an advantageous state, and it is possible to easily continue the game even in a disadvantageous state. Further, it is possible to continue the player's willingness to switch to an advantageous state by his/her own shooting operation after the disadvantageous state. With these, the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the first aspect of the present invention, the special lottery means changes the start opening to a state in which a game ball can easily enter after the special game state, and thereby the big winning. The device performs a lottery as to whether or not to shift to a peculiar game state (for example, a time saving game state described later) that tends to be in the open state, and the right granting means, in the ceiling state, the special lottery means performs the special game. It may be possible to grant the notification right when it is decided to shift to the special game state after the state.

Thus, in the ceiling state, when the special lottery means decides to shift to the special game state after the special game state, it is possible to grant the notification right. In other words, it becomes possible for the player to be given a notification right that is advantageous for the player after the player is in a disadvantageous state and the ceiling state is reached. As a result, the player is expected to continue playing while expecting to change to an advantageous state, and it is possible to easily continue the game even in a disadvantageous state. Further, it is possible to continue the player's willingness to switch to an advantageous state by his/her own shooting operation after the disadvantageous state. With these, the interest of the game can be improved.
In the ceiling state, if the special lottery means does not decide to shift to the special game state after the special game state, the ceiling state may be maintained. As a result, if the player has not decided to shift to the special gaming state even though it has been decided to shift to the special gaming state, and the notification right is not granted, the ceiling state will not disappear. .. Therefore, the player can continue to play the game while expecting to change to an advantageous state, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Further, in the game machine according to the first aspect of the present invention, the game state is easily changed to a state in which the game ball is easily inserted into the game ball by the start opening changing operation. A special game state (for example, a time saving game state described later), a game state transition unit (for example, a main CPU 71 described later) for transitioning to one of the special game state and the normal game state, and the right granting unit. And a notification right number determination means (for example, a sub CPU 201 described later) for determining the number of notification rights granted by, and the game state transition means transitions from the normal game state to the special game state. After that, it is possible to execute a set game in which the special game state and the special game state are alternately shifted by a predetermined number of times, and after the set game is performed, it is possible to shift to the normal game state. The deciding means decides the number of notification rights given by the right granting means according to the type of the special game state transferred during the set game, and the notifying means is given by the right granting means. The advantageous information may be notified as many times as the number of notification rights.

Thus, the number of notification rights to be given is determined according to the type of the special game state during the set game, and the notification is performed only the number of times corresponding to the number of notification rights. Therefore, the game can be diversified and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the gaming machine according to the first aspect of the present invention is provided with a right number storage unit (for example, a work RAM 203 described later) that stores the number of the notification right granted, and the advantageous information is provided by the notification unit. Is notified, and the game ball is changed to the open state at the time of the game ball entering the starting opening that triggered the notification, while the game ball is changed to the open state. When entering the specific area of the device and shifting to the special game state, the number of the notification right stored in the right number storage means is decreased, and the game ball enters the starting opening. On the basis of that, when it is decided to shift to the special game state without passing the game ball into the specific area, the number of the notification right stored in the right number storage means is decreased. Instead, it may be held.

In this way, when it is decided to shift to the special game state without entering the game ball into the specific area based on the fact that the game ball enters the starting opening, the number of notification rights decreases. Retained without. That is, for the player, the number of the notification right is reduced without shifting to the first special game state by the player seeing the advantageous notification and performing the firing operation according to the content of the notification. It is possible to eliminate the disadvantage. Thereby, it is easy to continue the player's motivation for the game.

The gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like described later) is operated by a player to launch a game ball (for example, a launching device 15 described later). Based on the starting opening (for example, a second starting opening 45 described later) into which the fired game ball can enter, and the fact that the game ball enters the starting opening, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the inside. It is possible to change from a closed state to an open state in which a game ball can easily enter, and a special winning device (for example, a second special winning device described later) having a specific area (for example, a V winning opening 57 described later) inside. 53) and a special game state (for example, a big hit game state described later) that shifts when a game ball enters the specific area, a first special game state advantageous for the player (for example, 16 described later). Multiple types of special game states including a round "big hit game" and the like and a second special game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first special game state (for example, two rounds "big hit game" described later). A gaming state lottery means (for example, a main CPU 71 which will be described later) that determines any one of them by lottery when the game ball enters the starting opening, which triggers the operation of changing the big winning device to the open state. Etc.) and, regarding the lottery result by the game state lottery means, it is possible to perform notification of advantageous information indicating that the game state transitioned after the game ball enters the specific area becomes the first special game state. Possible informing means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 13 described later, for example, a display area 13a described later, etc.), and a right granting means capable of granting an informing right when a predetermined notification condition is satisfied (for example, , A later-described sub CPU 201, etc.) and an initial setting means (for example, a power-on flag described later, such as a RAM clear flag described below) by performing a predetermined initialization process (for example, a power-on flag described later). And a work RAM 203, which will be described later), the right granting means is configured to perform a predetermined operation in a state where the initial setting is not set when a predetermined notification condition is satisfied in a state where the initial setting is set. The probability of granting the notification right is increased as compared with the case where the notification condition is satisfied, and the notification means is given the notification right by the right granting means and is drawn by the gaming state lottery means. When the first special game state is determined as a result, it is possible to notify the advantageous information.

According to the gaming machine according to the second aspect of the present invention, with respect to the lottery result of the gaming state lottery means, the advantageous information indicating that the gaming state is the first special gaming state advantageous for the player is notified. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player can advance the game state by shifting to the first special game state by performing a game ball launching operation in accordance with the content of the notification. That is, there is a possibility that the player can advantageously proceed with the game by his/her own operation. Therefore, unlike the case where the player's advantage or disadvantage is not greatly influenced by the player's operation and is determined by the control of the game machine, the player concentrates on the firing operation so as to be in an advantageous state. You will be able to enjoy the game without getting tired. Thereby, the interest of the game can be improved.

Here, the notification of the advantageous information is, for example, a notification indicating that a game with a large number of rounds is determined by lottery when the types of special game states are two types with different round numbers. At this time, for example, the second special game state may be a 2R hit state, and the first special game state may be a 16R hit state that is more advantageous to the player than the 2R hit state. Further, for example, the second special game state may be a hit state that does not shift to the time saving game state after the end, and the first special game state may be a hit state that shifts to the time saving game state after the end.

Further, according to the gaming machine according to the second aspect of the present invention, when the initial setting is set, when the predetermined notification condition is satisfied, it is compared with the case where the initial setting is not set. To increase the probability of granting the notification right. Thereby, for example, the hall side can create an advantageous state for the player at a desired time such as when the store is opened. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of attracting customers at a predetermined time such as when the hall is opened. The predetermined initialization process is, for example, a RAM clear process of the gaming machine, a power on/off process, or the like.

The other gaming machine according to the second aspect of the present invention (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like described later) is operated by the player to emit a game ball (for example, a launching device 15 described later). Etc.), a starting opening into which the fired game ball can enter (for example, a second starting opening 45 described later), and the game ball entering the starting opening based on the fact that the game ball enters the inside. It is possible to perform a change operation from a closed state that is difficult to enter to an open state where a game ball can easily enter the inside, and a big winning device having a specific area (for example, a V winning opening 57 described later) inside, and a game ball in the specific area. As a special game state (for example, a big hit game state described later) to be transferred when a player enters a ball, a first special game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a 16 round "big hit game" described later) and the above One of a plurality of types of special game states including a second special game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than one special game state (for example, a two-round "big hit game" described later) is given to the special winning device. A game state lottery means (for example, a main CPU 71 described later) that is determined by lottery when the game ball enters the starting opening that triggers the change operation to the open state, and a lottery by the game state lottery means Regarding the result, a notifying means capable of notifying advantageous information indicating that the game state to be shifted after the game ball enters the specific area becomes the first special game state (for example, a liquid crystal display described later). A device 13 or the like, for example, a display area 13a or the like described later), and a right granting unit (for example, a sub CPU 201 or the like described later) capable of granting a notification right when a predetermined notification condition is satisfied, A time measuring unit (for example, a real-time clock 80 described later) capable of specifying the time, and the right granting unit is set when the time specified by the time measuring unit is a predetermined time. When a predetermined notification condition is satisfied in a state in which a predetermined time setting (for example, a set time flag described later) is set, the predetermined notification condition is satisfied in a state in which the predetermined time setting is not set. The probability that the notification right is granted is increased as compared to the case where the notification right is given, and the notification means is given the notification right by the right granting means, and the first result is obtained by the game state drawing means. When the special gaming state is determined, it is possible to notify the advantageous information.

According to another gaming machine according to the second aspect of the present invention, regarding the lottery result of the gaming state lottery means, notification of advantageous information indicating that the gaming state is the first special gaming state advantageous for the player Therefore, the player may advantageously advance the game state by shifting to the first special game state by performing a game ball firing operation according to the content of the notification. That is, there is a possibility that the player can advantageously proceed with the game by his/her own operation. Therefore, unlike the case where the player's advantage or disadvantage is not greatly influenced by the player's operation and is determined by the control of the game machine, the player concentrates on the firing operation so as to be in an advantageous state. You will be able to enjoy the game without getting tired. Thereby, the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to another gaming machine according to the second aspect of the present invention, when the predetermined notification condition is satisfied at the predetermined time, the notification right is granted as compared with the case where the predetermined time is not reached. There is a high probability that As a result, the hall side can create an advantageous state for the player at a desired timing. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of attracting customers, for example, in the evening or the like, after a lapse of a sufficient time after the opening of the store.

A game machine according to the third aspect of the present invention (for example, a pachinko game machine 1 or the like described later) is operated by a player to emit a game ball (for example, a launcher 15 described later). Based on the starting opening (for example, a second starting opening 45 described later) into which the fired game ball can enter, and the fact that the game ball enters the starting opening, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the inside. It is possible to change from a closed state to an open state in which a game ball can easily enter, and a special winning device (for example, a second special winning device described later) having a specific area (for example, a V winning opening 57 described later) inside. 53) and a special game state (for example, a big hit game state described later) that shifts when a game ball enters the specific area, a first special game state advantageous for the player (for example, 16 described later). Multiple types of special game states including a round "big hit game" and the like and a second special game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first special game state (for example, two rounds "big hit game" described later). A gaming state lottery means (for example, a main CPU 71 which will be described later) that determines any one of them by lottery when the game ball enters the starting opening, which triggers the operation of changing the big winning device to the open state. Etc.) and, regarding the lottery result by the game state lottery means, it is possible to perform notification of advantageous information indicating that the game state transitioned after the game ball enters the specific area becomes the first special game state. Possible informing means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 13 described later, for example, a display area 13a described later, etc.), and a right granting means capable of granting an informing right when a predetermined notification condition is satisfied (for example, , A later-described sub-CPU 201, etc.), a clocking means capable of specifying the current time (for example, a real-time clock 80, which will be described later), and effect display including variable display and stop display of identification symbols can be performed. Display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 13 or the like to be described later, for example, a display area 13a or the like to be described later), wherein the notification means has been given the notification right by the right granting means, and When the lottery result by the game state lottery means is a result corresponding to the first special game state, it is possible to notify the advantageous information, and the display means can perform a predetermined effect display. There are a plurality of types of the predetermined effect display, each of which corresponds to a predetermined time specified by the timekeeping means, and the display means performs a type of performance corresponding to the predetermined time at the predetermined time. When the display is displayed, it is more advantageous for the player than when a display of a type that does not correspond to the predetermined time is displayed. Note that the time includes not only a certain moment but also a certain time width. Further, the predetermined effect display may be displayed when the lottery result due to the entrance of the starting opening is lost.

According to the gaming machine according to the third aspect of the present invention, with respect to the lottery result of the gaming state lottery means, the advantageous information indicating that the gaming state is the first special gaming state advantageous for the player is notified. Therefore, the player may advance the gaming state by shifting to the first special gaming state by performing a game ball firing operation according to the content of the notification. That is, there is a possibility that the player can advantageously proceed with the game by his/her own operation. Therefore, unlike the case where the player's advantage or disadvantage is not greatly influenced by the player's operation and is determined by the control of the game machine, the player concentrates on the firing operation so as to be in an advantageous state. You will be able to enjoy the game without getting tired. Thereby, the interest of the game can be improved.

Here, the notification of the advantageous information is, for example, a notification indicating that a game with a large number of rounds is determined by lottery when the types of special game states are two types with different round numbers. At this time, for example, the second special game state may be a 2R hit state, and the first special game state may be a 16R hit state that is more advantageous to the player than the 2R hit state. Further, for example, the second special game state may be a hit state that does not shift to the time saving game state after the end, and the first special game state may be a hit state that shifts to the time saving game state after the end.

Further, according to the gaming machine according to the third aspect of the present invention, the predetermined effect display including the variable display and the stop display of the identification symbol respectively corresponds to the predetermined time specified by the timing means, and at the predetermined time. When the effect display of the type corresponding to the predetermined time is performed, it is more advantageous to the player than when the effect display of the type not corresponding to the predetermined time is performed. As a result, when the player is playing the game at a predetermined time, the player expects that the effect display corresponding to the predetermined time will be displayed, and the player can concentrate without getting tired. The game can be played as a result, and the interest of the game is improved.

Further, according to the gaming machine of the third aspect of the present invention, when the predetermined effect display is performed, the right granting unit may grant the notification right, and the display unit Therefore, when the effect display of the type corresponding to the predetermined time is performed at the predetermined time, the notification right is compared with the case where the effect display of the type not corresponding to the predetermined time is performed. The probability of being given may be high.

As described above, when the effect display of the type corresponding to the predetermined time is performed at the predetermined time, the notification right is given more than when the effect display of the type not corresponding to the predetermined time is performed. The probability is high. As a result, the player can play the game while expecting the effect display corresponding to the predetermined time to be displayed, so that the player can concentrate on the game without getting tired, and the interest of the game is increased. improves.

Further, according to the gaming machine according to the third aspect of the present invention, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the state in which the notification right is granted when the predetermined jackpot is won continues for a predetermined period ( For example, there is a possibility of transition to a fourth high-probability state, which will be described later, etc.), and the display means can perform a plurality of types of specific effect displays, and the plurality of types of the specific effect displays respectively. , Corresponding to a specific time specified by the timekeeping means, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the display means displays an effect display of a type corresponding to the specific time at the specific time. In the case of being hit, compared to the case where a type of effect display not corresponding to the specific time is performed, the probability that the state in which the notification right is granted when the predetermined jackpot is won is continued for a predetermined period has a higher probability. It may be high.

In this way, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the display means performs the effect display of the type corresponding to the specific time at the specific time, and the effect display of the type not corresponding to the specific time is performed. As compared with the case where the above-mentioned procedure is performed, the probability that the notification right is granted when the predetermined jackpot is won (for example, the fourth high-probability state shown in FIG. 49) is high for a predetermined period. As a result, the player can play the game while expecting that the effect display corresponding to the specific time is displayed, so that the player can concentrate on the game without getting tired and the interest of the game is increased. improves.

Further, according to the gaming machine according to the third aspect of the present invention, it is detected that a predetermined initialization process (for example, clearing of a work RAM 203 described later, for example, turning on a power source described below, etc.) is performed. Initialization detection means (for example, a sub CPU 201 described later) for performing the predetermined notification, the initialization detection means determines whether the notification right is given when the predetermined jackpot is won. When it is detected that the initialization process is performed, the continuation of the state in which the notification right is granted may be stopped when the predetermined big hit is won.

In this way, the state that is advantageous to the player that the state in which the notification right is given when the predetermined jackpot is won continues is ended by performing the predetermined initialization process. As a result, the game is changed, and the interest of the game is further improved.

A gaming machine according to a fourth mode of the present invention (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like described later) is operated by a player to fire a game ball (for example, a launching device 15 described later). , A passing area through which the fired game ball can pass (for example, a ball passing detector 43 described later), a state in which the fired game ball is easy to enter, and a state in which the fired game ball is difficult to enter It is possible to change to any of the above, and when the game ball has passed through the starting area (for example, a second starting opening 45 described below) from which the game ball is paid out when the ball enters, and the above-mentioned passing area, Based on a starting opening lottery means (for example, a main CPU 71 described later) for executing a lottery for changing the starting opening into a state in which a gaming ball can easily enter, and based on the fact that the gaming ball enters the starting opening. The game ball can be changed from a closed state where it is difficult to enter the inside to an open state where the game ball is easily entered inside, and a special winning device (for example, a V winning opening 57 or the like described later) inside (for example, A second special winning device 53, etc., which will be described later), and a first special game state that is advantageous to the player as a special game state to be transferred when a game ball enters the specific area (for example, 16 rounds of the later-described “ Of a plurality of special game states including a "big hit game" and the like) and a second special game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first special game state (for example, two rounds of "big hit game" described later). A gaming state lottery means (for example, a main CPU 71 or the like to be described later) that determines one of them by lottery when the game ball enters the starting opening, which is a trigger for the big winning device to change to an open state. Regarding the lottery result by the game state lottery means, it is possible to give notification of advantageous information that suggests that the game state to be shifted after the game ball enters the specific area becomes the first special game state. Means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 13 or the like described later, for example, a display area 13a described later) and a right granting means (for example, a display area 13a described later) that can grant a notification right when a predetermined notification condition is satisfied. Sub CPU201 etc.), and the notification means is the result that the notification right has been granted by the right granting means, and the lottery result by the game state lottery means corresponds to the first special game state. In some cases, it is possible to give notification of the advantageous information, and the special winning state in which the big winning device is likely to be in the open state by changing the start opening to a state in which the game balls are likely to enter. (For example, the time saving game described later In the technique state, etc.), if the game ball does not enter the specific area before the number of times the changing operation from the closed state to the open state reaches a specific number or more, the notification means Is suppressed.

According to the gaming machine according to the fourth aspect of the present invention, regarding the lottery result of the gaming state lottery means, the advantageous information indicating that the gaming state is the first special gaming state advantageous to the player is notified. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player can advance the game state by shifting to the first special game state by performing a game ball launching operation in accordance with the content of the notification. That is, there is a possibility that the player can advantageously proceed with the game by his/her own operation. Therefore, unlike the case where the player's advantage or disadvantage is not greatly influenced by the player's operation and is determined by the control of the game machine, the player concentrates on the firing operation so as to be in an advantageous state. You will be able to enjoy the game without getting tired. Thereby, the interest of the game can be improved.

Here, the notification of the advantageous information is, for example, a notification indicating that a game with a large number of rounds is determined by lottery when the types of special game states are two types with different round numbers. At this time, for example, the second special game state may be a 2R hit state, and the first special game state may be a 16R hit state that is more advantageous to the player than the 2R hit state. Further, for example, the second special game state may be a hit state that does not shift to the time saving game state after the end, and the first special game state may be a hit state that shifts to the time saving game state after the end.

Further, it is not preferable for the hall side to increase the payout number of the game balls, but it is preferable for the player to increase the payout number of the game balls. Therefore, the player sometimes attempts to increase the number of payouts of the game balls by operating so that the game balls do not enter the specific area in the special game state. On the side of the hall, such an action by the player is not a preferable action, and it is preferable that such an action can be suppressed. According to the gaming machine according to the fourth aspect of the present invention, in the special gaming state, the game ball in the specific area until the number of times the special winning device performs the changing operation from the closed state to the open state is the specific number or more. If is not entered, the notification is suppressed. As a result, if the player attempts to increase the number of payouts of the game balls by operating the game balls so that they do not enter the specific area, the notification may be suppressed. Can be suppressed.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the fourth aspect of the present invention, every time the notification right is granted, a right number storage unit (for example, a right number storage unit that updates and stores the notification right number granted by the right granting unit. If a game ball enters the specific area when the advantageous information is notified by the notification unit, the notification stored in the right number storage unit is provided. Even when the number of rights is subtracted and the notification by the notification means is suppressed, the number of notified rights stored in the right number storage means may be subtracted.

As a result, if the player attempts to increase the number of payouts of game balls by operating the game balls so that they do not enter the specific area, the number of notification rights will decrease. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from performing such an action.

Further, another game machine according to the fourth aspect of the present invention (for example, a pachinko game machine 1 or the like described later) is operated by the player to emit a game ball (for example, a shooter described later). Device 15 etc.), a passing area through which a shot game ball can pass (for example, a ball passing detector 43 described later), a state in which a shot game ball is easy to enter, and a shot game ball is entered. It is possible to change to one of the states where it is difficult to hit the ball, and a starting opening (for example, a second starting opening 45 described later) from which the gaming ball is dispensed when entering the ball and that the gaming ball has passed through the passage area. At the opportunity, a starting opening lottery means (for example, a main CPU 71, which will be described later) for executing a lottery for changing the starting opening into a state in which a game ball can easily enter, and a game ball entering the starting opening. Based on the above, it is possible to change the game ball from a closed state where it is difficult to enter the inside to an open state where the game ball is likely to enter inside, and there is a specific area (for example, a V winning opening 57 described later) inside which is a big prize. A device (for example, a second big winning device 53 described later) and a first special game state advantageous for a player (for example, a later-described second special winning device 53 or the like) as a special game state to be transferred when a game ball enters the specific area. Multiple types of special games including 16 rounds of "big hit game" and the like, and a second special game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first special game state (for example, 2 rounds of "big hit game" described later). Any one of the states is determined by a lottery when a game ball enters the starting opening that triggers the operation of changing the big winning device to the open state. CPU 71 etc.) and, regarding the lottery result by the game state lottery means, inform the advantageous information indicating that the game state to be shifted after the game ball enters the specific area becomes the first special game state. (For example, a liquid crystal display device 13 described later, for example, a display area 13a described later), and a right granting unit that can grant a notification right when a predetermined notification condition is satisfied ( For example, a sub-CPU 201, etc., which will be described later), and a game ball that is launched toward the passage area, the special winning device, and the area in which the start opening is installed are installed at a position where the game ball can pass, and the game ball has passed. And an abnormal detection means for detecting an abnormal emission timing different from the normal emission timing based on the detection output from the emission detection means (for example, a right-handed sensor 58 described later). Sub CP described later U201 etc.), and the notification means is the result that the notification right has been granted by the right granting means, and the lottery result by the game state lottery means corresponds to the first special game state. In this case, it is possible to notify the advantageous information, and the special winning state in which the big winning device is likely to be in the open state by changing the starting opening to a state in which the game ball is likely to enter ( For example, in a time saving game state described later), when the abnormality detection means detects the abnormal emission timing a predetermined number of times or more, the notification by the notification means is suppressed.

According to another gaming machine of the fourth aspect of the present invention, regarding the lottery result of the gaming state lottery means, notification of advantageous information indicating that the gaming state is the first special gaming state advantageous for the player Therefore, the player may advantageously advance the game state by shifting to the first special game state by performing a game ball firing operation according to the content of the notification. That is, there is a possibility that the player can advantageously proceed with the game by his/her own operation. Therefore, unlike the case where the player's advantage or disadvantage is not greatly influenced by the player's operation and is determined by the control of the game machine, the player concentrates on the firing operation so as to be in an advantageous state. You will be able to enjoy the game without getting tired. Thereby, the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the other gaming machine of the fourth aspect of the present invention, the gaming balls fired toward the area where the passage area, the special winning device and the starting opening are installed are always installed at positions where the game balls can pass. Based on the detection output from the launch detection means for detecting that the game ball has passed, if the abnormal launch timing different from the normal launch timing is detected, the abnormality detection means sets the abnormal launch timing to a predetermined number of times or more. Notification is suppressed when detected. As a result, if the player attempts to increase the number of payouts of the game balls by operating the game balls so that they do not enter the specific area, the notification may be suppressed. Can be suppressed. Note that the launch detection means can detect, for example, that the player is making a so-called right-hand hit so that the game ball rolls below the game board while passing the right side of the game board, It may be installed at a position where the game ball can pass when it is hit to the right. Further, for example, when the game ball does not pass through the firing detection means at a constant time interval but the time interval is irregular or the time interval is too long, it may be considered as an abnormal timing.

In addition, another gaming machine according to the fourth aspect of the present invention is a warning unit that issues a warning to the player (for example, a liquid crystal display device 13 described later, such as a display area 13a described later), When the number of detections of the abnormal emission timing by the abnormality detection unit is less than the predetermined number of times, the warning unit executes a warning stepwise according to the number of abnormal emission timings detected by the abnormality detection unit. It may be that.

As a result, a warning is given step by step until the notification is suppressed, so that the player may stop operating the game ball so as not to enter the specific area before the notification is suppressed. high. If the notification is suddenly suppressed, the player is likely to feel uncomfortable, but since the warning is given stepwise before the notification is suppressed in this manner, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. can do.

Further, the gaming machine according to the fifth aspect of the present invention (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like to be described later) is operated by the player to emit a game ball (for example, a launching device 15 to be described later). Etc.), a passing area through which the fired game ball can pass (for example, a ball passing detector 43, etc., which will be described later), a state in which the fired game ball easily enters and the fired game ball enters It is possible to change to any one of the difficult states, and when the game ball passes through the starting area (for example, the second starting opening 45 described later) from which the game ball is paid out when the ball enters, and the passing area. Based on the fact that a starting ball lottery means (for example, a main CPU 71, which will be described later) for executing a lottery for changing the starting mouth into a state in which a game ball is easy to enter, and a gaming ball entering the starting mouth Then, the game ball can be changed from a closed state where it is difficult to enter the inside to an open state where the game ball is easily entered inside, and a special winning device having a specific area (for example, a V winning opening 57 described later) inside ( For example, a second special winning device 53, etc., which will be described later), and a first special game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, 16 rounds, which will be described later) as a special game state to be transferred when a game ball enters the specific area. Of a plurality of special game states including a “big hit game”) and a second special game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first special game state (for example, two rounds of “big hit game” described later) A gaming state lottery means (for example, a main CPU 71 or the like to be described later) that determines one of them by lottery when the game ball enters the starting opening, which triggers the operation of changing the big winning device to the open state. ) And, regarding the lottery result by the game state lottery means, it is possible to notify advantageous information indicating that the game state to be shifted after the game ball enters the specific area becomes the first special game state. Notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 13 described later, for example, a display area 13a described later), and a right granting means (eg, a right granting means that can grant a notification right when a predetermined notification condition is satisfied. A sub CPU 201 described later) and a point storage means (for example, a work RAM 203 described later) for storing points added in the game, and the notification means is set to a state in which a game ball can easily enter. It is possible to notify the advantageous information in a special game state (for example, a time saving game state described later) in which the big winning device is likely to be in the open state by changing the starting opening, and the informing means Is before It is possible to notify the advantageous information when the notification right is granted by the right granting means and the lottery result by the gaming state lottery means is a result corresponding to the first special gaming state. When the number of points stored in the point storage means reaches a predetermined number, the state shifts to a specific state where the probability that the notification right is granted is relatively high (for example, a first high probability state described later). After the specific state is finished, it is possible to shift to a special state (for example, a second high probability state described later) in which the points stored in the point storage means are more likely to be added than the specific state. It is a feature.

As described above, according to the gaming machine according to the fifth aspect of the present invention, regarding the lottery result of the game state lottery means, it is possible to obtain advantageous information indicating that the game state is the first special game state advantageous for the player. Since the notification is performed, the player may advantageously advance the game state by performing a game ball firing operation in accordance with the content of the notification to shift to the first special game state. That is, there is a possibility that the player can advantageously proceed with the game by his/her own operation. Therefore, unlike the case where the player's advantage or disadvantage is not greatly influenced by the player's operation and is determined by the control of the game machine, the player concentrates on the firing operation so as to be in an advantageous state. You will be able to enjoy the game without getting tired. Thereby, the interest of the game can be improved.

Here, the notification of the advantageous information is, for example, a notification indicating that a game with a large number of rounds is determined by lottery when the types of special game states are two types with different round numbers. At this time, for example, the second special game state may be a 2R hit state, and the first special game state may be a 16R hit state that is more advantageous to the player than the 2R hit state. Further, for example, the second special game state may be a hit state that does not shift to the time saving game state after the end, and the first special game state may be a hit state that shifts to the time saving game state after the end.

Further, according to the gaming machine of the fifth aspect of the present invention, when the number of points stored in the point storage means reaches a predetermined number, the state shifts to a specific state in which the probability that the notification right is granted is relatively high. After the specific state is completed, the state is changed to a special state in which points stored in the point storage means are more likely to be added than in the specific state. As a result, the player also actively collects points, which makes it possible to diversify the game and improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, the gaming machine according to the fifth aspect of the present invention is provided with a clocking unit (for example, a real-time clock 80 described later) that can identify the current time, and there are a plurality of the identified states. The specific state corresponds to a predetermined time specified by the time counting means, and the right granting means corresponds to the predetermined time at the predetermined time among the plurality of specific states. In this case, the probability of granting the notification right may be set higher than in the case where the notification right is not provided at the predetermined time. Note that the time includes not only a certain moment but also a certain time width.

As a result, it becomes possible to further diversify the game and further enhance the interest of the game.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing a state advantageous to a player at a desired timing.

It is a perspective view showing an appearance of a pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a front view showing a configuration of a game board of the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a front view showing the configuration of the second big winning device of the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention, FIG. 4 (a) is a state in which the game ball does not win the V winning opening, FIG. Is a state in which the game ball wins the V winning opening. It is a schematic configuration diagram of a payout unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view showing the configuration of the prize ball case unit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the table which shows the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention, FIG.8(a) is a figure which shows a special symbol game specification table, and FIG.8(b) is a normal symbol. It is a figure which shows a game specification table, FIG.8(c) is a figure which shows a hit distribution table, and FIG.8(d) is a figure which shows an opening pattern table. It is a state transition diagram of the main control of the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a state transition diagram of sub-control of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the main fluctuation time determination table 1 of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the main fluctuation time determination table 2 of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ceiling lottery table of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the point addition table of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention, FIG.14(a) is a figure which shows 2nd high probability, and FIG.14(b) shows normal. It is a figure. It is a figure which shows an example of the payout-less time saving navigation lottery table of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit time navigation lottery table of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a diagram showing an example of a navigation game lottery table at the end of the set game of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the main processing performed by the main CPU in the pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the main processing performed by the main CPU in the pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the special design control processing in the pachinko game machine which relates to the execution form 1 of this invention. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the special design memory check processing in the pachinko game machine which relates to the execution form 1 of this invention. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the special design decision processing in the pachinko game machine which relates to the execution form 1 of this invention. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the special design fluctuation time management processing in the pachinko game machine which relates to the execution form 1 of this invention. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the special design display time management processing in the pachinko game machine which relates to the execution form 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart showing an example of a small hit start interval management process in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart showing an example of processing during a small hit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the post-end processing after a small hit in the pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flowchart showing an example of a big hit start interval management process in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the special winning opening re-opening waiting time management processing in the pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flowchart showing an example of a special winning opening opening process in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart showing an example of a big hit end interval process in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the special design game ending processing in the pachinko game machine which relates to the execution form 1 of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a system timer interruption processing in a pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of switch input processing in a pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the special design related switch check processing in the pachinko game machine which relates to the execution form 1 of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a movable member control processing in a pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of sub control main processing which is performed by a sub CPU in a pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the timer interruption processing in the pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the command interruption processing in the pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of command analysis processing in a pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of command analysis processing in a pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol effect start command reception process in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production decision processing during a normal game state in a pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production decision processing during a normal game state in a pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production decision processing during a normal game state in a pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 1st high probability middle production decision processing in the pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flowchart showing an example of a second high-probability middle effect determination process in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 3rd high-probability middle production decision processing in the pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 4th high probability middle production decision processing in the pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of the big hit start command reception in the pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flow chart showing an example of processing when V hit start command is received in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of the small hit end command reception in the pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the processing at the time of receiving the special winning opening display command in the pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol per interval end command reception time process in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram showing an effect in 16R hit of the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a diagram showing an effect in 2R hit of the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flowchart showing an example of a power-on process executed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart showing an example of a main process executed by a payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a system timer interruption processing performed by a payout CPU in a pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of security ball existence detection processing performed by a payout CPU in a pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the security ball absence detection processing which is executed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the counting switch detection processing executed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of motor starting waiting processing performed by a payout CPU in a pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of motor starting initial processing performed by a payout CPU in a pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a timing chart showing an excitation system of a payout motor in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart regarding the reception of prize ball control data of the payout control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart regarding the transmission of the payout error information data by the payout control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the modification of the communication form between the main control circuit and the payout control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a timing chart at the time of error information transmission by the payout control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the composition method of the error information in the pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the alerting|reporting aspect of the error information in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a timing chart of the origin adjustment control using the prize ball control processing by the payout control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart of the origin adjustment retry operation after the origin adjustment is not completed using the prize ball control processing by the payout control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart of the basic payout operation of the prize ball control processing by the payout control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the excitation data for every fall request number in the basic payout operation of the prize ball control processing by the payout control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a timing chart when a retry operation is required during the basic payout operation of the prize ball control processing by the payout control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram showing a payout state notification display device in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart when an overpayment error occurs in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart at the time of the error occurrence of the payout ball clogging in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart at the time of the error occurrence of the lower plate full in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart when a payout motor abnormality occurs in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart regarding the receiving process of the payout control circuit when the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention is powered off. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a pachinko gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the point addition table of the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 2 of this invention, FIG. 84 (a) is a figure which shows 2nd high probability middle, and FIG. 84 (b) shows normal middle. It is a figure. It is a figure which shows an example of the lost super-reach lottery table of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 2 of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the timer interruption processing in the pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 2 of the present invention. It is a flowchart showing an example of a first high-probability state mid-stage effect determination process in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 2 of the present invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the prize ball case unit of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 3 of this invention. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a pachinko gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a system timer interruption processing performed by a payout CPU in a pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 3 of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a counting switch detection processing performed by a payout CPU in a pachinko gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of motor drive processing performed by a payout CPU in a pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 3 of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of origin adjustment excitation data setting processing performed by a payout CPU in a pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 3 of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a counting switch detection processing performed by a payout CPU in a pachinko gaming machine according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of motor starting waiting processing performed by a payout CPU in a pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 4 of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of motor starting initial processing performed by a payout CPU in a pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 4 of the present invention. It is a front view showing the composition of the game board of the pachinko game machine concerning other embodiments of the present invention.

Hereinafter, the configuration and various operations of the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

(Embodiment 1)
First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 82, a gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described.

[Structure of pachinko machine]
The structure of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. 1 is a perspective view showing an appearance of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a main body 2, a base door 3 that is openably and closably attached to the main body 2, and a glass door that is openably and closably attached to the base door 3. 4 and 4.

[Body]
The main body 2 is composed of a frame-shaped member having a rectangular opening 2a (see FIG. 2). The main body 2 is made of a material such as wood.

[Base door]
The base door 3 is composed of a plate-shaped member having a rectangular outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer shape of the main body 2. The base door 3 is arranged in front of the main body 2 (on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1), and by rotating the base door 3 about one side end of the main body 2, The opening 2a is opened and closed.

As shown in FIG. 2, the base door 3 is provided with a rectangular opening 3a. The opening 3 a is formed from the vicinity of the central portion of the base door 3 to the upper region, and has a size that occupies most of the base door 3.

Further, a speaker 11, a game board 12, a liquid crystal display device 13, a plate unit 14, a launching device 15, a payout unit 16, and a board unit 17 are attached to the base door 3.

The speaker 11 is arranged above the base door 3 (near the upper end). The game board 12 is arranged in front of the base door 3 (on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1) and is arranged so as to cover the opening 3a of the base door 3.

The game board 12 is made of a light-transmissive plate-shaped resin member. Note that as the light-transmitting resin, for example, an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a methacrylic resin, or the like may be used.

Further, on the front surface of the game board 12 (the surface on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1), a game area 12a in which a game ball shot from the launching device 15 rolls is formed. This game area 12a is an area surrounded by a guide rail 41 (specifically, an outer rail 41a shown in FIG. 3 described later), and its outer peripheral shape is substantially circular.

Further, a plurality of game nails (see FIG. 3, which will be described later) are driven into the game area 12a. The structure of the game board 12 (game area 12a) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

The liquid crystal display device 13 is attached to the back side of the game board 12 (the side opposite to the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1). The liquid crystal display device 13 has a display area 13a for displaying an image. The size of the display area 13a is set so as to occupy the whole or a part of the surface of the game board 12.

In the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13, various images such as a performance identification pattern, a performance image, and a decorative image (decorative pattern) are displayed. The player can visually recognize various images displayed in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 through the game board 12.

Although the liquid crystal display device 13 is used as the display device in the first embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this. As the liquid crystal display device 13, for example, a display device such as a plasma display, a rear projection display, or a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) display may be applied.

Further, a spacer 19 is provided on the back side of the game board 12 (the side opposite to the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1). The spacer 19 is provided between the back surface of the game board 12 (the surface on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1) and the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 13 (the surface on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1). A space that serves as a flow path for the game balls rolling in the game area 12a is formed.

The spacer 19 is formed of a material having light transparency. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the spacer 19 may be partially formed of a material having a light-transmitting property, or may be formed of a material having no light-transmitting property. ..

The dish unit 14 is arranged below the game board 12. The plate unit 14 has an upper plate 21 and a lower plate 22 arranged below the upper plate 21. As shown in FIG. 2, the upper plate 21 and the lower plate 22 are respectively formed with payout openings 21a and payout openings 22a for lending game balls and paying out game balls (prize balls).

When the predetermined payout condition is satisfied, the game balls are discharged from the payout opening 21a and the payout opening 22a and stored in the upper plate 21 and the lower plate 22, respectively. The game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are shot by the launching device 15 to the game area 12a.

Further, the dish unit 14 is provided with an effect button 23. Specifically, the effect button 23 is attached on the upper plate 21. A dial operation unit (jog dial) 24 is rotatably attached to the effect button 23 with respect to the effect button 23.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment has a predetermined effect function performed by using at least one of the effect button 23 and the dial operation unit 24, and when performing a predetermined effect, the display of the liquid crystal display device 13 is performed. An image that prompts the user to operate at least one of the effect button 23 and the dial operation unit 24 is displayed in the area 13a.

The launching device 15 is arranged in the lower right region (near the lower right corner) on the front surface of the base door 3. The launching device 15 includes a launching handle 25 that can be operated by a player, and a panel body 26 that engages with the lower right portion of the dish unit 14. The firing handle 25 is disposed on the front surface side of the panel body 26 and is rotatably supported by the panel body 26.

Although not shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, a solenoid actuator (driving device) for controlling the shooting operation of the game ball is provided on the back side of the panel body 26. Similarly, although not shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, a touch sensor is provided on the peripheral portion of the firing handle 25, and a firing volume is provided inside the firing handle 25. The firing volume changes the resistance value according to the amount of rotation of the firing handle 25, and changes the electric power supplied to the solenoid actuator.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the player's hand touches the touch sensor of the firing handle 25, the touch sensor outputs a detection signal. That is, it is detected that the player holds the firing handle 25. Then, when it is detected that the player holds the firing handle 25, the game ball can be fired by the solenoid actuator.

When the player holds the firing handle 25 and turns it clockwise (clockwise when viewed from the player side), the resistance value of the firing volume changes according to the turning angle of the firing handle 25. Then, the electric power corresponding to the resistance value is supplied to the solenoid actuator. As a result, the game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are sequentially fired, and the fired game balls are guided to the guide rails 41 (see FIG. 3, which will be described later) and discharged to the game area 12a of the game board 12.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, a firing stop button is provided on the side of the firing handle 25. The firing stop button is a button provided to stop the firing of the game ball by the solenoid actuator. Even when the firing handle 25 is gripped and rotated by the player, the player presses the firing stop button to stop the firing of the game ball.

The payout unit 16 and the board unit 17 are arranged on the back side of the base door 3. Game balls are supplied to the payout unit 16 from a storage unit (not shown). The payout unit 16 pays out a predetermined number of game balls to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 22 from the game balls supplied from the storage unit based on the establishment of the payout condition.

The board unit 17 has various control boards. Various control boards are provided with a main control circuit 70, a sub control circuit 200, a payout control circuit 300, and the like, which will be described later (see FIG. 7, which will be described later).

[Glass door]
The glass door 4 is composed of a plate-shaped member having a substantially square surface. Further, the glass door 4 is arranged on the front side of the game board 12 and has a size that covers the game board 12. On the front surface of the glass door 4, a speaker cover 29 is provided in an upper region facing the speaker 11.

Further, in the central portion of the glass door 4, an opening having a size that exposes at least the game area 12a is formed in the area facing the game area 12a of the game board 12. A protective glass 28 having a light transmitting property is attached to the opening of the glass door 4, whereby the opening is closed.

Therefore, when the glass door 4 is closed with respect to the base door 3, the protective glass 28 is arranged so as to face at least the game area 12 a of the game board 12.

[Game board]
Next, the configuration of the game board 12 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board.

On the front surface of the game board 12, as shown in FIG. 3, a guide rail 41, a ball passage detector 43, a first starting port 44, a second starting port 45 (starting region), and an ordinary electric accessory 46. And are provided. In addition, on the front surface of the game board 12, general winning openings 51, 52, a first big winning device 54 (variable winning device), a second big winning device 53 (variable winning device), an outlet 55, a plurality of And the game nail 56 of.

Furthermore, on the front surface of the game board 12, a special symbol display device 61 (identification information display means, special symbol display means) and a normal symbol display are provided on the upper part of the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 arranged substantially in the center thereof. The device 62, the normal symbol reservation display device 63, the first special symbol reservation display device 64, and the second special symbol reservation display device 65 are provided.

In the first embodiment, a notification LED (Light Emitting Diode) that lights up when the result of the stop display of the special symbol is "big hit", a round number display LED that displays the number of rounds during the big hit game, etc. are provided. Good.

[Various components in the game area]
The guide rail 41 is configured by an outer rail 41a extending in an arc shape that partitions the game area 12a, and an inner rail 41b extending in an arc shape, which is arranged inside (outer circumferential side) of the outer rail 41a. To be done.

The game area 12a is formed inside the outer rail 41a. The outer rail 41a and the inner rail 41b are arranged so as to face each other in the vicinity of the left end portion of the game area 12a when viewed from the player side, whereby the launch device is provided between the outer rail 41a and the inner rail 41b. A guide path 41c for guiding the game ball shot by 15 to the upper part of the game area 12a is formed.

Further, at the tip of the inner rail 41b located on the upper left side of the game area 12a, a ball discharge port 41d is formed by the tip of the inner rail 41b and a part of the outer rail 41a facing it. A ball return prevention piece 42 is provided at the tip of the inner rail 41b so as to close the ball discharge port 41d.

The ball return prevention piece 42 prevents the game ball discharged from the ball discharge port 41d to the game area 12a from passing through the ball discharge port 41d again and entering the guide path 41c.

The game ball discharged from the ball discharge port 41d flows down from the upper part to the lower part of the game area 12a. At this time, the game ball collides with various members provided in the game area 12a such as the plurality of game nails 56, the first starting port 44, the second starting port 45, etc., and while changing the traveling direction of the game area 12a. Run down from the top to the bottom.

The display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 is provided in the approximate center of the game area 12a. An obstacle 13b is provided at the upper end of the display area 13a. By providing the obstacle 13b, the game ball does not pass over the area overlapping the display area 13a in the game area 12a.

The ball passage detector 43 is arranged near the right end of the display area 13a when viewed from the player side. The ball passing detector 43 is provided with a passing ball switch 43a (see FIG. 7 described later) for detecting a game ball passing through the ball passing detector 43. In addition, by passing the game ball through the ball passage detector 43, a lottery of whether or not the "hit" is made is performed, and the variable display of the normal symbol is started based on the result of the lottery.

The first starting port 44 is arranged below the display area 13a, and the second starting port 45 is arranged below the first starting port 44. The 1st starting opening 44 and the 2nd starting opening 45 are comprised by the member which can receive a game ball.

Hereinafter, entering or passing of the game ball into the first starting opening 44 or the second starting opening 45 is referred to as a "winning prize". When the game balls win the first start opening 44 or the second start opening 45, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. In the first embodiment, three game balls are paid out when the first start opening 44 is won, and two game balls are paid out when the second start opening 45 is won. The game balls that are paid out are called prize balls.

In addition, by entering the game ball into the first starting opening 44, a lottery is made as to whether it is a "big hit" or a "small hit", and a variation of the special symbol based on the result of the lottery. The display starts. By entering the game ball into the second starting port 45, a lottery is made as to whether it is a "big hit" or a "small hit", and the variable display of the special symbol is started based on the result of the lottery. To be done. In the first embodiment, the probability of winning the “small hit” when the game ball enters the first starting opening 44 is zero. That is, even if the player enters the first starting opening 44, he/she does not win the "small hit". Further, in the first embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting opening 45, the "small hit" is won with a higher probability than the probability of winning the "big hit". That is, when the player enters the second starting opening 45, it is easier to win the "small hit" than the "big hit".
In the first embodiment, the probability of winning the “small hit” when the game ball enters the first starting opening 44 is set to zero as described above, but it is not limited to zero. This probability may be lower than the probability of winning the “small hit” when the game ball enters the second starting opening 45. In this way, even if a game ball enters the first starting opening 44, it is possible to win the "small hit", so that the range of the game can be expanded. For example, it becomes possible to shift to a set game described later from a state other than the "time saving game state" described later, and the range of games can be expanded.

The first starting port 44 is provided with a first starting port winning ball switch 44a (see FIG. 7, which will be described later) for detecting a game ball that has won the first starting port 44. Further, the second starting port 45 is provided with a second starting port winning ball switch 45a (see FIG. 7, which will be described later) for detecting a game ball that has won the second starting port 45. The game balls that have won the first start port 44 and the second start port 45 are transferred to a game ball collection section (not shown) through a collection port (not shown) provided in the game board 12. To be done.

The ordinary electric accessory 46 is provided in the second starting port 45. The ordinary electric accessory 46 includes a pair of blade-like members rotatably attached to both sides of the second starting port 45, and an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 46a for driving the pair of blade-like members (see a later-described figure). 7)).

The ordinary electric accessory 46 is driven by the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 46a, and the pair of blade-shaped members are expanded to open the game ball to the second starting port 45 so that the game ball can be easily won, and the pair of blade-shaped members. The member is closed to generate either one of the closed states in which the game ball cannot be won in the second starting opening 45.

In the first embodiment, when the normal electric accessory 46 is in the closed state, the opening form of the pair of blade-shaped members is not a form in which the prize cannot be won, but a form in which it is difficult to win the game ball. You may

The general winning opening 51 is arranged near the lower left part of the game area 12a when viewed from the player side. Further, the general winning opening 52 is arranged below the ball passage detector 43, and is arranged near the lower right portion of the game area 12a as viewed from the player side.

The general winning opening 51 and the general winning opening 52 are made of members that can receive game balls. In the following, the entry or passage of the game ball into the general winning opening 51 or the general winning opening 52 is also referred to as "winning". When a game ball is won in the general winning opening 51 or the general winning opening 52, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. In the first embodiment, there are 10 prize balls each when the general winning opening 51 or the general winning opening 52 is won.

The general winning opening 51 is provided with a general winning ball switch 51a (see FIG. 7, which will be described later) for detecting a game ball that has won the general winning opening 51. Further, the general winning opening 52 is provided with a general winning ball switch 52a (see FIG. 7, which will be described later) for detecting a game ball winning in the general winning opening 52.

The first big winning device 54 and the second big winning device 53 are arranged below the ball passage detector 43 and between the first starting opening 44 and the general winning opening 52. The first big winning device 54 and the second big winning device 53 are arranged vertically along the flow path of the game ball, and the second big winning device 53 is arranged above the first big winning device 54. It

The first big winning device 54 is a so-called attacker-type opening/closing device, and has an openable/closable shutter 54a and a solenoid actuator (first big winning opening solenoid 54b in FIG. 7 described later) that drives the shutter.

The first big winning device 54 accepts the game ball when the corresponding shutter 54a is open (open state: first state), and closes the shutter 54a: closed state: second state) Sometimes they don't accept game balls.

In the following, entering or passing of the game ball into the first big winning device 54 is also referred to as “winning”. When the game balls win the first big winning device 54, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. In the first embodiment, when the game balls are won in the first big winning device 54, there are 15 prize balls.

Further, the first big winning device 54 is provided with a count switch 54c (see FIG. 7, which will be described later) for counting the game balls that have won the first big winning device 54.

The second big winning device 53 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view showing the configuration of the second big winning device of the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. FIG. 4A shows a state in which the game ball does not win the V winning opening, and FIG. 4B shows a state in which the game ball wins the V winning opening. The second big winning device 53 has a blade member 53a that can be opened and closed. When the blade member 53a is in the open state, the second big winning device 53 receives a game ball and the blade member 53a is in the closed state (FIG. 3). See) does not accept the game ball. That is, when the blade member 53a is in the open state, the game ball may enter the second big winning device 53, and when the blade member 53a is in the closed state, the game ball may enter the second large winning device 53. Absent.

In the following, the fact that the game ball enters the second big winning device 53 is also referred to as “winning”. When a game ball is won in the second big winning device 53, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. In the first embodiment, there are 15 prize balls even when the game balls are won in the second big winning device 53.

Further, a V winning opening 57 is provided inside the second big winning device 53. The second big winning device 53 has a movable member 57a that can be opened and closed to open and close the V winning opening 57. When the V winning opening 57 is open, the V winning opening 57 accepts a game ball, and when the V winning opening 57 is closed, the V winning opening 57 does not accept a game ball. The fact that the game ball enters the V winning opening 57 is called "V winning". In addition, when the game ball wins the V winning opening 57, it is "V winning".

The timing when the movable member 57a is opened is related to the timing when the blade member 53a is opened. For example, both the blade member 53a and the movable member 57a are normally closed. When the blade member 53a is in the open state, the movable member 57a may be in the open state at the same time or with a slight delay, and the movable member 57a may be in the closed state before the blade member 53a is in the closed state. For example, the time for which the blade member 53a is in the open state may be twice the time for which the movable member 57a is in the open state.

The second big winning device 53 is provided with a count switch 53c (see FIG. 7, which will be described later) for counting the game balls that have won the second big winning device 53. Further, the V winning opening 57 is provided with a V winning opening winning ball switch 57c (see FIG. 7, which will be described later) for detecting a game ball winning in the V winning opening 57. Further, the second starting port 45 is provided with a second starting port winning ball switch 45a (see FIG. 7, which will be described later) for detecting a game ball that has won the second starting port 45. Further, the second big winning device 53 has a V winning opening solenoid 57b for operating the movable member 57a.

The outlet 55 is provided at the bottom of the game area 12a. This out port 55 is a game in which none of the first starting port 44, the second starting port 45, the general winning opening 51, the general winning opening 52, the first big winning device 54 and the second big winning device 53 is won. Accept the ball.

When the arrangement of various components in the game area 12a of the first embodiment is set as shown in FIG. 3, when the player hits a game ball in the area on the right side of the game area 12a (when right-handed), The game ball is guided to the vicinity of the second start port 45 below the first start port 44 by the game nail 56 and the like.

In this case, there is almost no possibility of winning the first start opening 44. As described above, in the first embodiment, when the first starting opening 44 is won, the "small hit" is not won. Further, in the first embodiment, when the second starting opening 45 is won, it is easier to win the “small hit” than the “big hit”.

Therefore, in the "time saving game state" described below in which winning in the second starting opening 45 is relatively easy, right hitting reduces the possibility of winning in the first starting opening 44. It is possible to increase the possibility of winning the prize in the starting opening 45 and make it easy to win the “small hit”.

[Special symbol display device]
As shown in FIG. 3, the special symbol display device 61 is arranged substantially in the center of the upper part of the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13.

The special symbol display device 61 is a display device that variably displays (variable display and stop display) the special symbol in the special symbol game. In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, the special symbol display device 61 is configured by a device that displays the special symbol with a symbol such as a number or a symbol.

The present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol display device 61 may be composed of, for example, a plurality of LEDs. In this case, a display pattern configured by turning on/off a plurality of LEDs is represented as a special symbol.

The special symbol display device 61 performs a variable display of special symbols (identification information) when the game ball wins the first starting opening 44 or the second starting opening 45 (special symbol starting winning). Then, the special symbol display device 61 performs a variable display of the special symbol for a predetermined time, and then performs a stop display of the special symbol.

In the following, when the game ball wins the first starting opening 44, the special symbol that is variably displayed on the special symbol display device 61 is referred to as a first special symbol. Further, when the game ball wins the second starting port 45, the special symbol that is variably displayed on the special symbol display device 61 is referred to as a second special symbol. Whether the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display device 61 is the first special symbol or the second special symbol can be determined by the color displayed. That is, the special symbols displayed on the special symbol display device 61 are displayed in different colors in the case of the first special symbol and the case of the second special symbol. For example, when the first special symbol is displayed, it may be displayed in red, and when the second special symbol is displayed, it may be displayed in green. This makes it possible to distinguish which special symbol is displayed.
In the first embodiment, the special symbol display device 61 has one digit, but for example, the special symbol display device 61 has two digits, the left digit (the tens digit) is the first special symbol, and the right digit (one digit). Even if the position) displays the second special symbol, this makes it possible to distinguish which special symbol is displayed without making the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol different from each other. it can.

In the special symbol display device 61, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed is in a specific mode (a mode of "big hit"), the gaming state is advantageous to the player from the normal gaming state. The state shifts to the big hit game state. That is, in the special symbol display device 61, the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode in which it shifts to the big hit game state, is a "big hit". In the special symbol display device 61, when the second special symbol stopped and displayed is in the "small hit" mode, the blade member 53a is in the open state. As described above, even if the first starting opening 44 is won, the "small hit" is not won.

In the big hit game state, the first big winning device 54 is opened. Specifically, in the first embodiment, the game ball wins the first starting opening 44 or the second starting opening 45, and the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific mode on the special symbol display device 61. If so, the first big winning device 54 is opened.

The open state of the first big winning device 54 is maintained until a predetermined number of game balls are won, or until a certain period of time elapses. Further, there are a plurality of types of jackpot gaming states, and the opening time of the first big winning device 54 is not constant, but varies depending on each type. When the elapsed time of the open state of the first big winning device 54 satisfies any one of these conditions, the big winning opening that was in the open state is closed.

Hereinafter, a game in which the first big winning device 54 is in a state (open state) in which it is easy to receive a game ball is referred to as a round game. During the round game, the first big winning device 54 is closed.

The round game is counted as the number of rounds such as 1 round and 2 rounds. For example, the first round game is called the first round, and the second round game is called the second round.

That is, the special symbol game is a game in which the special symbol display device 61 variably displays the special symbol, and then the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the game state is shifted or maintained depending on the result.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, when the game ball wins the first starting opening 44 during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first special symbol corresponding to the winning is variable. The display (holding ball) is put on hold.

Then, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is currently displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol that has been held is started. In the first embodiment, the number of variable display of the first special symbol to be held (so-called, "holding number (number of holding balls)") is defined to be a maximum of four times (pieces).

Further, in the first embodiment, when the game ball wins the second starting port 45 during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the winning (holding ball) Is suspended.

Then, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is currently displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol that has been held is started. In the first embodiment, the number of variable displays of the second special symbols to be held (holding number) is defined to be a maximum of four times (pieces). Therefore, in the first embodiment, the maximum number of variable display of special symbols is 8 in total.

In the first embodiment, when the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the reserved balls of the second special symbol are mixed, the variable display of one special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the other special symbol. .. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and when the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the reserved balls of the second special symbol are mixed, the variable display of the special symbols may be executed in the reserved order. Note that the second special symbol may not be held.

[Normal symbol display device]
As shown in FIG. 3, the normal symbol display device 62 is arranged substantially in the center of the upper part of the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13. Then, in the first embodiment, the normal symbol display device 62 is arranged on the right side of the special symbol display device 61 when viewed from the player side.

The normal symbol display device 62 is a display device that variably displays (variable display and stop display) the normal symbol in the normal symbol game. In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, the normal symbol display device 62 is configured by two LEDs (normal symbol display LED) arranged vertically. Then, in the normal symbol display device 62, the display pattern configured by turning on/off each normal symbol display LED is represented as a normal symbol.

The normal symbol display device 62 alternately turns on and off the two normal symbol display LEDs when the game ball has passed the ball passage detector 43, and performs a variable display of the normal symbol. Then, the normal symbol display device 62, after performing a variable display of the normal symbol for a predetermined time, performs a stop display of the normal symbol.

In the normal symbol display device 62, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed is in a predetermined mode (a "hit" mode), the normal electric accessory 46 is changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period. On the other hand, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed is in a mode other than the predetermined mode (a mode of “miss”), the normal electric accessory 46 maintains the closed state. In the first embodiment, when the normal symbol is in the "hit" mode, the operation in which the normal electric accessory 46 goes from the closed state to the closed state again to the closed state is performed three times in succession. Further, the open state time is 1.5 seconds.

In addition, the lottery in the normal symbol game has a high probability in the "time saving game state", and has a low probability in other cases. In the first embodiment, the winning is not performed when the probability is low, and the winning is performed when the probability is high. In addition, in the lottery in this case, a random number value may be acquired in the case of a low probability but not won, or the lottery itself may not be performed in the case of a low probability.

That is, the ordinary symbol game is a game in which the ordinary symbol display device 62 variably displays the ordinary symbol, and then the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed, and the ordinary electric auditors product 46 operates according to the result.

In addition, when the game ball passes the ball passage detector 43 during the variable display of the normal symbol, the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended. Then, when the normal symbol which is currently displayed in a variable state is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the normal symbol whose variable display has been suspended is started. In the first embodiment, the number of variable displays of the ordinary symbols to be held (that is, the "held number") is defined to be a maximum of four times (pieces).

[Ordinary symbol hold display device]
As shown in FIG. 3, the normal symbol hold display device 63 has a display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13.
Is located approximately in the center of the upper part of. Then, in the first embodiment, the normal symbol hold display device 63 is arranged below the special symbol display device 61 and the normal symbol display device 62.

The normal symbol hold display device 63 is a device for displaying the number of held variable displays of normal symbols. In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, the normal symbol hold display device 63 is configured by four LEDs (normal symbol hold display LEDs) arranged in the left-right direction. Then, in the normal symbol hold display device 63, by turning on and off each normal symbol hold display LED, the number of held variable display of normal symbols is displayed.

Specifically, if the number of variable display of normal symbols is one, when viewed from the player side, the normal symbol hold display LED located on the leftmost side (the first normal symbol hold display LED from the left) Lights up, and other ordinary symbol hold display LEDs go out.

When the number of variable displays of the normal symbols is two, the first and second normal symbol hold display LEDs from the left are turned on, and the other normal symbol hold display LEDs are turned off. When the number of variable displays of the normal symbols is 3, the first to third normal symbol hold display LEDs from the left are turned on, and the other normal symbol hold display LEDs are turned off. Then, when the number of variable display of the normal symbols is four, all the normal symbol hold display LEDs are turned on.

[First special symbol hold display device]
As shown in FIG. 3, the first special symbol hold display device 64 is arranged on the upper side of the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 to the left of the special symbol display device 61 as viewed from the player side.

The first special symbol hold display device 64 is a device that displays information about the variable display of the first special symbol that is being held (holding ball of the first special symbol). In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, the first special symbol reservation display device 64 is composed of a first special symbol reservation number display section 64a and a first special symbol reservation information display section 64b.

Then, the first special symbol reservation information display unit 64b is arranged on the left side of the special symbol display device 61, and the first special symbol reservation number display unit 64a is arranged on the left side of the first special symbol reservation information display unit 64b. To be done.

The first special symbol reservation number display section 64a has four LEDs (first special symbol reservation display LED) arranged in the left-right direction. The display mode of the first special symbol reservation number display unit 64a is the same as the display mode of the normal symbol reservation display device 63.

That is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is suspended, as viewed from the player side, the first special symbol suspension display LED from the first special symbol suspension display LED located on the leftmost side to the suspension number Lights up.

Further, the first special symbol reservation information display unit 64b displays information about the reserved balls of the first special symbol. For example, the 1st special symbol reservation information display section 64b displays the information (identification information) about the reserved balls of the 1st special symbol to be variably displayed next in the form of numbers or symbols.

The configuration of the first special symbol hold display device 64 is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 3, and can be arbitrarily configured as long as it can display at least the number of variable display hold of the first special symbol. ..

[Second special symbol hold display device]
As shown in FIG. 3, the second special symbol hold display device 65 is arranged in the upper part of the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 to the right of the normal symbol display device 62 when viewed from the player side.

The second special symbol hold display device 65 is a device that displays information about the variable display of the second special symbol that is being held (holding ball of the second special symbol). In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, the second special symbol reservation display device 65 is composed of a second special symbol reservation number display section 65a and a second special symbol reservation information display section 65b.

Then, the second special symbol reservation information display unit 65b is arranged on the right side of the normal symbol display device 62, and the second special symbol reservation number display unit 65a is arranged on the right side of the second special symbol reservation information display unit 65b. To be done.

The second special symbol reservation number display portion 65a has four LEDs (second special symbol reservation display LED) arranged in the left-right direction. The display mode of the second special symbol reservation number display section 65a is the same as the display mode of the normal symbol reservation display device 63.

That is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended, as viewed from the player side, the second special symbol suspension display LED from the second special symbol suspension display LED located on the leftmost side to the reserved number. Lights up.

In addition, the second special symbol reservation information display unit 65b displays information about the reservation ball of the second special symbol. For example, the second special symbol reservation information display unit 65b displays information (identification information) about the reserved balls of the second special symbol to be variably displayed next in the form of numbers or symbols.

The configuration of the second special symbol hold display device 65 is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 3, and can be arbitrarily configured as long as it can display at least the number of variable display hold of the second special symbol. ..

[Liquid crystal display]
The liquid crystal display device 13 is made of liquid crystal as described above, and displays various effects in the display area 13a.

Specifically, in the first embodiment, the effect image associated with the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display device 61 is displayed in the display area 13a. At this time, for example, when the special symbol is being variably displayed on the special symbol display device 61, except for a specific case, for example, a plurality of production identification symbols (decoration) including numbers 1 to 8 and various characters (Pattern) is variably displayed in the display area 13a.

Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 61, a plurality of decorative symbols (such as liquid crystal symbol alignments described later) corresponding to the special symbol are also stopped and displayed in the display area 13a.

Then, in the case where the special symbol stopped and displayed in the special symbol display device 61 is in a specific mode (the result of the stop display is "big hit"), the player recognizes that it is "big hit". The effect image is displayed in the display area 13a.

As an effect for letting the player understand that it is a "big hit", for example, first, a plurality of stop-displayed decorative symbols are in a specific mode (for example, a mode in which the same decorative patterns are arranged in a predetermined direction) ), and thereafter, an effect of displaying an image for notifying the "big hit" can be mentioned.

Further, in the first embodiment, in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13, an effect image associated with the display contents of the first special symbol hold display device 64 and the second special symbol hold display device 65 is displayed. For example, in the display area 13a, holding information (for example, the same number of holding symbols as the holding number) for notifying the holding number of the variable display of the special symbol is displayed. In addition, when performing a so-called look-ahead effect, which is a well-known technique, based on the information of the reserved ball of the special symbol, the advance notice may be displayed in the display area 13a.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the ordinary symbol stopped and displayed on the ordinary symbol display device 62 is in a predetermined mode, an effect image for the player to grasp the information is displayed in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13. You may further provide the function to make it.

[Notification production]
As will be described later in detail, in the first embodiment, when a certain condition is satisfied, the game ball is won in the V winning opening 57, and the notification about the game state executed when “V hit” is achieved, It is executed when the small hit which triggers the "V hit" is won. This notification is performed by displaying an effect image in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13. Thus, the player can perform an advantageous game state by performing a game ball shooting operation based on the notification. Specifically, depending on the content of the notification, a firing operation is performed such that the game ball enters the second big winning device 53 so as to be “V hit”, or the second is set so as not to be “V hit”. It is possible to perform a shooting operation so that the game ball does not enter the special winning device 53.

[Schematic configuration of payout unit]
Next, the payout unit 16 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. 5: is a figure which shows the whole structure of the payout unit 16, and is the figure which looked at the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the back side. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a configuration of a prize ball case unit 170 as a payout device described later.

As shown in FIG. 5, the payout unit 16 is supplied with game balls from a storage unit (not shown) in the upper portion of the gaming machine, and a ball tank 161 as a ball storage tank for storing the supplied game balls, and a ball. The ball tank lower passage 162 connected to the ball tank 161 so as to communicate with the tank 161, and the payout of the game ball, such as paying the game ball to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, that is, the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 22, can be managed A prize ball case unit 170.

Further, below the ball tank 161 and the ball tank lower passage 162, the board unit 17 in which various control boards including the payout control circuit 300 are incorporated is arranged in parallel with the prize ball case unit 170. ..

Here, the storage unit (not shown) described above is, for example, a replenishing device as an auxiliary facility of a hall (game hall) installed for supplying game balls to the ball tank 161 of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the payout unit 16, the game balls supplied from the storage unit are guided to the prize ball case unit 170 through the ball tank 161 and the ball tank lower passage 162 and stored.

As shown in FIG. 6, the prize ball case unit 170 includes a first starting opening 44, a second starting opening 45, and a general winning opening 51 as a plurality of winning openings provided in the game area 12a (see FIG. 3) described above. , The general winning opening 52, the first big winning device 54 and the second big winning device 53, the game ball is paid out from the ball tank 161 to the payout passage 180 described later on condition that the game ball is won. is there. The payout passage 180 is arranged at the bottom of the prize ball case unit 170.

The prize ball case unit 170 includes a first ball supply passage 171A, a first 15-ball guarantee switch 172A as a replenishment detecting means, and a first sprocket 173A as a moving means. Here, although the prize ball case unit 170 is omitted in FIG. 6 except a part, it is the same as the first ball supply passage 171A, the first 15-ball guarantee switch 172A, and the first sprocket 173A described above. The second ball supply passage 171B, the second 15-ball securing switch 172B, and the second sprocket 173B as a moving means, which are configured, are arranged on the back side in the plane of FIG. 6 (the front-back direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1). There is.

That is, the prize ball case unit 170 has a structure including two rows of the ball supply passage 171, the 15 ball securing switch 172 and the sprocket 173.

However, the first sprocket 173A and the second sprocket 173B are arranged with their phases shifted by 60°. In the following description, unless otherwise specified, the first sphere supply passage 171A and the second sphere supply passage 171B are collectively referred to as a "ball supply passage 171", and the first 15-ball collateral switch 172A and the first sphere supply switch 172A. The 15-ball collateral switch 172B of No. 2 is collectively referred to as "15-ball collateral switch 172", and the first sprocket 173A and the second sprocket 173B are collectively referred to as "sprocket 173".

The payout passage 180 is actually a two-row structure having a first payout passage 180A and a second payout passage 180B. However, in the following, unless otherwise specified, the first payout passage 180A and the second payout passage 180B are collectively referred to as the “payout passage 180”.

The ball supply passage 171 communicates with the ball tank 161 via the ball tank lower passage 162, and the game balls are supplied from the ball tank 161 via the ball tank lower passage 162. The ball supply passage 171 can store a predetermined number (15 in the first embodiment) of game balls supplied from the ball tank 161. It should be noted that, in reality, the first payout passage 180A and the second payout passage 180B have a two-row structure, so that a total of 30 game balls can be accumulated in these passages.

The 15-ball guarantee switch 172 is for detecting the game balls replenished in the ball supply passage 171. Specifically, the 15-ball guarantee switch 172 detects that the game ball is being replenished by detecting the ball detection shield plate 172a by the detection sensor 172b every time the game ball is replenished (passed). To do.

Therefore, when the game balls accumulated in the ball supply passage 171 are insufficient, that is, when the number of game balls is less than 15, the ball detection shield plate 172a is actuated to move out of the detection area of the detection sensor 172b. It is detected that the prescribed number (15 in the first embodiment) has not been accumulated in.

Further, the 15-ball guarantee switch 172 is turned on while detecting that the game balls are being supplied. It should be noted that FIG. 6 shows a state in which the 15-ball security switch 172 is detecting the supplied game ball.

Further, the 15-ball security switch 172 is turned on while detecting that the game ball replenished in the ball supply passage 171 is passing over the 15-ball security switch 172. The "balls are replenished" means that the 15-ball collateral switch 172 detects that the game balls pass through the ball supply passage 171 and that the game balls exist in the ball supply passage 171. Then, on the premise that the game balls are connected, it includes ensuring that a specified number of game balls exist in the ball supply passage 171.

The sprocket 173 is connected to a payout motor 174, which is a driving unit composed of a stepping motor, and is rotated clockwise in the drawing in response to the drive of a payout motor 174 described later. The sprocket 173 receives the game balls accumulated in the ball supply passage 171 one by one, rotates by the payout motor 174 driving by a predetermined number of steps, and moves to the payout passage 180 one by one, that is, payout. It has become.

In addition to the above, the sprocket 173 is rotated by the payout motor 174 being driven by a predetermined number of steps, and as a result, the game balls accumulated in the ball supply passage 171 can be rotated one by one. The form depending on the rotation of the payout motor 174 may be included.

That is, it can be expressed that the sprocket 173 is rotated by the payout motor 174 so that the sprocket 173 can be received one ball at a time and the ball is paid out one ball at a time. It can be expressed as accepting and paying one ball at a time.

Further, the sprocket 173 is premised to rotate, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sprocket 173 is formed into a plate shape and is a slide type that is movable or driven in parallel and perpendicular to the dispensing passage 180. The shape of the sprocket 173 may be any shape as long as a predetermined number of game balls can be received and paid out.

As the payout motor 174, a common one is used for the first sprocket 173A and the second sprocket 173B. The sprocket 173 and the payout motor 174 in the first embodiment constitute a game ball control unit and a payout unit that can move the game ball that has passed through the ball supply passage 171.

A first counting switch 181A and a second counting switch 181B are provided in the first payout passage 180A and the second payout passage 180B, respectively. However, in the following, unless otherwise specified, the first counting switch 181A and the second counting switch 181B are collectively referred to as "counting switch 181".

The counting switch 181 detects the game ball paid out to the payout passage 180 by the sprocket 173. The counting switch 181 in the first embodiment constitutes payout detection means.

A ball removing shutter 175 is provided near the top of the ball supply passage 171. When the ball removing shutter 175 is rotated clockwise in the drawing, the ball supply passage 171 is opened, and the game balls accumulated in the upper portion of the ball supply passage 171 are discharged through the ball removal passage 176. It has become. The ball removal shutter 175 is normally in a locked state, and is used, for example, when discharging the game balls stored in the ball tank 161.

[Circuit configuration of pachinko game machines]
Next, the configuration of various circuits included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 7. 7. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the circuit configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 mainly includes a main control circuit 70 for controlling game operations, a sub-control circuit 200 for controlling effect operations according to the progress of the game, and a main game ball. It has a payout control circuit 300 for controlling payout.

[Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 70 includes a main CPU (Central Processing Unit) 71, a main ROM (Read Only Memory) 72, and a main RAM (Random Access Memory) 73. Further, the main control circuit 70 includes a reset clock pulse generation circuit 74, an initial reset circuit 75, and a serial communication IC (Integrated Circuit) 76. As described above, in the first embodiment, the special symbol lottery process is performed at the time of winning the first start opening 44 or the second start opening 45. This process is controlled by the main control circuit 70. That is, the main control circuit 70 also serves as a means (lottery means) for performing lottery processing as to whether or not to shift the game state to a state advantageous to the player.

A main ROM 72, a main RAM 73, a reset clock pulse generation circuit 74, an initial reset circuit 75, a serial communication IC 76, etc. are connected to the main CPU 71. The main ROM 72 stores various programs (see FIGS. 18 to 36) for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the main CPU 71, various data tables (see FIGS. 11 and 12), and the like.

The main CPU 71 executes various types of processing according to the programs stored in the main ROM 72. The main RAM 73 acts as a temporary storage area when the main CPU 71 executes various processes, and stores various flags and variable values required by the main CPU 71 for various processes.

Although the main RAM 73 is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 71 in the first embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and any recording medium may be used as the temporary storage area as long as it is a readable/writable storage medium. ..

The reset clock pulse generation circuit 74 generates a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 milliseconds) in order to execute a system timer interrupt process described later. The initial reset circuit 75 generates a reset signal when the power is turned on. Then, the serial communication IC 76 transmits a command to the sub control circuit 200.

Further, as shown in FIG. 7, the main control circuit 70 is connected to various devices that operate according to the output signal sent from the main control circuit 70.

Specifically, the main control circuit 70, the special symbol display device 61, the normal symbol display device 62, the normal symbol hold display device 63, the first special symbol hold display device 64 and the second special symbol hold display device 65 are connected. To be done.

Each of these devices performs a predetermined operation based on the output signal sent from the main control circuit 70. For example, when a predetermined output signal is transmitted from the main control circuit 70 to the special symbol display device 61, the special symbol display device 61, based on the output signal, the operation control of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. To do.

Further, the main control circuit 70 is connected to an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 46a, a first special winning device solenoid 54b, a second special winning opening solenoid 53b, and a V winning opening solenoid 57b. Then, the main control circuit 70 drives and controls the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 46a to open or close the pair of blade-shaped members of the ordinary electric accessory 46.

Further, the main control circuit 70 drives and controls the first big winning opening solenoid 54b and the second big winning opening solenoid 53b, respectively, to open or close the first big winning apparatus 54 and the second big winning apparatus 53. To do.

Further, the main control circuit 70 drives and controls the V winning opening solenoid 57b to open or close the V winning opening 57.

Further, as shown in FIG. 7, the main control circuit 70 is connected to various switches and receives output signals from the various switches. Specifically, in the main control circuit 70, the count switches 53c, 54c, the general winning ball switches 51a, 52a, the passing ball switch 43a, the first starting entrance winning ball switch 44a and the second starting entrance winning ball switch 45a, V. The winning opening winning ball switch 57c, the backup clear switch 121, etc. are connected.

The count switch 54c counts the game balls that have won the first big winning device 54, and outputs a predetermined output signal indicating the result to the main control circuit 70. The count switch 53c counts the game balls that have won the second big winning device 53, and outputs a predetermined output signal indicating the result to the main control circuit 70.

The general winning ball switch 51a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when the game ball has won in the general winning opening 51, and the general winning ball switch 52a has the game ball winning in the general winning opening 52. In this case, a predetermined detection signal is output to the main control circuit 70.

In addition, the passing ball switch 43a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when the game ball passes the ball passing detector 43. The first start opening winning ball switch 44a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when a game ball enters the first starting opening 44.

The second start opening winning ball switch 45a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when the game ball enters the second starting opening 45. Further, the backup clear switch 121 outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 and the payout control circuit 300 when the backup data is cleared in response to an operation by a manager of a game shop at the time of power failure or the like. ..

Further, the payout control circuit 300 is connected to the main control circuit 70. Here, the main control circuit 70 determines the number of prize balls, which is the number of game balls to be paid out through a prize ball case unit 170 described later, on condition that a predetermined payout condition is satisfied.

The main control circuit 70 for determining the number of prize balls constitutes a payout amount determining means. It should be noted that the predetermined payout condition is that the game balls have won the various starting openings and the various winning openings described above.

Further, the main control circuit 70 transmits information including the number of prize balls determined as described above to the payout control circuit 300 as a prize ball control command. Therefore, the main control circuit 70 constitutes a signal transmitting means.

[Payout control circuit]
The payout control circuit 300 includes a payout CPU 301, a ROM 302, and a RAM 303. The ROM 302 stores, for example, various programs (see FIGS. 57 to 64) for controlling the payout operation of the game balls by the prize ball case unit 170.

The payout CPU 301 executes various processes according to the programs stored in the ROM 302. The RAM 303 acts as a temporary storage area when the payout CPU 301 executes various processes, and stores various flags and variable values required by the payout CPU 301 for various processes.

Although the RAM 303 is used as the temporary storage area of the payout CPU 301 in the first embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and any recording medium may be used as the temporary storage area as long as it is a readable/writable storage medium.

A prize ball case unit 170 for paying out game balls is connected to the payout control circuit 300. Specifically, the first and second 15-ball collateral switches 172A and 172B, the payout motor 174, and the first and second counting switches 181A and 181B are connected to the payout control circuit 300.

The 1st and 2nd 15 ball guarantee switches 172A and 172B detect the game balls replenished in the 1st and 2nd ball supply passages 171A and 171B, and output a predetermined output signal indicating the result to the payout control circuit. Output to 300.

The payout motor 174 is driven according to a control signal from the payout CPU 301. The first and second counting switches 181A and 181B detect the game balls paid out to the first and second payout passages 180A and 180B by the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B, and show the results. A predetermined output signal is output to the payout control circuit 300.

Further, the payout control circuit 300 is connected to a payout state notification display device 178 and a lower plate full tank switch 179. The payout state notification display device 178, which will be described in detail later, is a display device for notifying the type of the abnormality when an abnormality occurs with respect to the payout of gaming balls, and constitutes a notification means.

The payout state notification display device 178 is composed of a 7-segment display as shown in FIG. 77, and is provided, for example, at a predetermined position on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 so that only the manager of the hall can visually recognize it.

The lower plate full tank switch 179 detects when the gaming balls stored in the lower plate 22 are full, and outputs the result to the payout control circuit 300. When a signal indicating that the lower plate full tank state is in the lower plate full tank switch 179 is input, the payout control circuit 300 gives a notification through the payout state notification display device 178 and causes the main control circuit 70 to display the lower plate. A signal indicating that the tank is full is output.

As a result, the main control circuit 70 transmits a production control command to the sub control circuit 200, and the sub control circuit 200 causes the lower plate 22 to be fully filled through the speaker 11, the lamp 18, the LED, and the liquid crystal display device 13. Let me know.

Further, the payout control circuit 300 is connected to a launching device 15 for launching a game ball, an external terminal board 140, and a card unit 150. Further, the data display 141 is connected to the external terminal board 140, and the lending operation unit 151 is connected to the card unit 150.

Here, the card unit 150 determines the number of game balls to be paid out, which is the number of game balls to be paid out via a request case unit 170 described later, on condition that a predetermined payout condition is satisfied. The card unit 150, which determines the number of lent balls, constitutes a payout amount determination means. The predetermined payout condition is that the lending operation unit 151 described above is operated.

The payout control circuit 300 supplies power to the solenoid actuator of the launching device 15 according to the turning angle when the firing handle 25 is gripped by the player and is turned clockwise. Thereby, the launching device 15 controls to launch the game ball.

The external terminal board 140 is used for transmitting data to a hall computer that manages all pachinko gaming machines in the hall (game hall). The data display 141 is installed as, for example, an accessory facility of a hall on the top of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and has a function of calling a hall staff member and a function of displaying the number of hits.

When the player operates the lending operation unit 151, the lending operation unit 151 outputs to the card unit 150 a signal requesting for lending a game ball. When the card unit 150 receives a signal requesting to lend a game ball from the lending operation unit 151, the card unit 150 transmits a lending ball control signal including information on the determined number of lending balls to the payout control circuit 300. Therefore, the card unit 150 constitutes a signal transmitting means.

The payout control circuit 300 receives the prize ball control command transmitted from the main control circuit 70 and the loan ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 150, and transmits a predetermined signal to the prize ball case unit 170.

Thereby, the prize ball case unit 170 pays out the game balls. The payout control circuit 300 that receives the award ball control command and the lending ball control signal as described above constitutes a signal receiving means.

Further, in the first embodiment, the payout CPU 301 has first and second collateral ball counters 305A and 305B and first and second collateral ball timers 306A and 306B. The first and second collateral sphere counters 305A and 305B and the first and second collateral sphere timers 306A and 306B are provided as a function of the payout CPU 301.

The first and second collateral sphere counters 305A and 305B respectively calculate from the initial values (“1950 times” in the first embodiment) set in the collateral sphere monitoring initial setting process (see S309 and S312 in FIG. 57) described later. This is a counter that is decremented by "1" each time a predetermined time ("1 ms" in the first embodiment) elapses while the first and second 15-ball guarantee switches 172A, 172B detect a game ball.

In the first embodiment, the countdown counter is used as the first and second collateral ball counters 305A and 305B, but a countup counter may be used.

Therefore, the payout CPU 301 has a condition that the payout of game balls is started by the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B and that the first and second 15-ball guarantee switches 172A and 172B detect the game balls. In addition, every time a predetermined time (“1 ms” in the first embodiment) has passed the initial value (“1950 times” in the first embodiment), that is, every time a system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 59) described later is performed, “ 1" is subtracted, that is, updated.

The payout CPU 301 that performs such an update constitutes a second updating unit. The values updated by the first and second collateral ball counters 305A and 305B can be set to values in a narrower range than the values updated by the first and second collateral ball timers 306A and 306B described later. At the same time, it corresponds to the time during which the first and second 15-ball collateral switches 172A, 172B are detecting the game sphere, and constitutes the second value.

The first and second collateral ball timers 306A and 306B are set to predetermined values from the initial values (“2000 ms” in the first embodiment) set in the collateral ball monitoring initial setting process (see S309 and S312 in FIG. 57) described later. This is a timer that is decremented by "1" every time (1 ms in the first embodiment) elapses. In the first embodiment, the countdown timer is used as the first and second collateral ball timers 306A and 306B, but a countup timer may be used.

Therefore, the payout CPU 301 sets an initial value (“2000 ms” in the first embodiment) for a predetermined time (“first embodiment” in the first embodiment, on the condition that the payout of the game balls is started by the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B. 1 ms"), that is, every time a system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 59) described later is performed, "1" is subtracted, that is, updated.

Here, the initial value (“2000 ms” in the first embodiment) set in the above-described first and second collateral ball timers 306A and 306B is the time assumed to complete the collateral of 15 game balls, that is, The time is set to be sufficient to pay out a predetermined number (15 in the first embodiment) of game balls from the ball tank 161. The payout CPU 301 that performs such an update constitutes a first updating unit. The values updated by the first and second secured ball timers 306A and 306B form the first value.

[Sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 200 is connected to the serial communication IC 76 of the main control circuit 70. Then, the sub-control circuit 200 responds to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 70, display control in the liquid crystal display device 13, control regarding sound generated from the speaker 11, control of the lamp 18 including a decorative lamp, and the like. I do.

That is, the sub control circuit 200 executes various effects according to the progress of the game based on the command from the main control circuit 70. In addition, in the first embodiment, the configuration is such that the signal cannot be supplied from the sub control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 70, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a signal can be transmitted from the sub control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 70. It may be provided with various configurations.

The sub-control circuit 200 is also connected to the effect button 23 and is also connected to an effect button switch 23a that outputs a signal by operating the effect button 23. Accordingly, the sub-control circuit 200 can also perform effect control of a mini game or the like using the effect button 23, for example.

As shown in FIG. 7, the sub control circuit 200 includes a sub CPU 201, a program ROM 202, a work RAM 203, a display control circuit 205, a voice control circuit 206, and a lamp control circuit 207. A program ROM 202, a work RAM 203, a display control circuit 205, a voice control circuit 206, and a lamp control circuit 207 are connected to the sub CPU 201.

The program ROM 202 stores various programs (see FIGS. 37 to 54) for controlling the staging operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the sub CPU 201, and various data tables (see FIGS. 13 to 17). Then, the sub CPU 201 executes various processes in accordance with the programs stored in the program ROM 202. In particular, the sub CPU 201 controls the entire sub control circuit 200 according to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 70.

In the first embodiment, the main ROM 72 and the program ROM 202 are applied as storage means for storing the programs and various tables, but the present invention is not limited to this. As such a storage means, a storage medium of another mode may be used as long as it is a computer-readable storage medium including a control means, and for example, storage of a hard disk device, a CDROM and a DVD-ROM, a ROM cartridge, or the like. A medium may be applied.

Moreover, each of the programs may be recorded in different storage media. Further, the program may be recorded in a recording medium in advance, or may be downloaded from the outside or the like after the power is turned on and recorded in the work RAM 203 or the like.

The work RAM 203 acts as a temporary storage area when the sub CPU 201 executes various processes, and stores various flags and variable values required by the sub CPU 201 for various processes. Although the work RAM 203 is used as the temporary storage area of the sub CPU 201 in the first embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and any recording medium may be used as the temporary storage area as long as it is a readable/writable storage medium.

The display control circuit 205 controls the liquid crystal display device 13 to display an image related to an effect. Although not shown, the display control circuit 205 has an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP (Video Display Processor)), an image data ROM, a frame buffer, a D/A (Digital to Analog) converter, and the like.

The image data ROM stores data for generating various image data. The frame buffer temporarily stores image data. Further, the D/A converter converts the image data (digital electric signal) into an image signal (analog electric signal).

The display control circuit 205 performs various processes for displaying an image in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 based on the data supplied from the sub CPU 201. Further, the display control circuit 205 temporarily stores image data such as decorative pattern image data indicating a decorative pattern (production identification pattern), background image data, and production image data based on an image display command supplied from the sub CPU 201. The frame buffer.

Then, the display control circuit 205 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the image signal to the liquid crystal display device 13 at a predetermined timing. As a result, a predetermined effect image is displayed in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13.

The voice control circuit 206 includes a sound source IC that controls voice, a voice data ROM that stores various voice data, and an amplifier (hereinafter, referred to as AMP) for amplifying a voice signal.

The sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speaker 11. The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM based on the voice generation command supplied from the sub CPU 201.

Then, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the read audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the audio signal to the AMP. The AMP also amplifies the audio signal and causes the speaker 11 to generate audio.

The lamp control circuit 207 has a drive circuit for supplying a lamp control signal, a lamp data ROM in which a plurality of types of lamp lighting patterns are stored, and the like. The drive circuit selects one lamp lighting pattern from a plurality of lamp lighting patterns stored in the lamp data ROM based on the lamp lighting command supplied from the sub CPU 201.

Then, the selected lamp lighting pattern is read from the lamp data ROM, the read audio data is converted into a predetermined lamp control signal, and the lamp 18 including a decorative lamp is turned on and off.

[Type of game state]
First, the types of game states controlled and managed by the main CPU 71 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an example of a table showing basic specifications of a pachinko gaming machine.

In the first embodiment, as the types of game states controlled and managed by the main CPU 71, there are a “big hit game state”, a “small hit game state”, and a “time saving game state”.

The "big hit game state" is a game state in which the "big hit game" is performed, and is a game state in which the shutter 54a of the first big winning device 54 is opened and closed. That is, the "big hit game" is a game in which the shutter 54a of the first big winning device 54 is opened and closed to perform a plurality of round games. The “big hit game” is performed by winning the “big hit” in the lottery performed by entering the first starting opening 44 or the second starting opening 45.

When a game ball enters the first starting opening 44 or the second starting opening 45, each wins a "big hit" with a probability of 1/200 (see FIG. 8A). When the "big hit" is won, the "big hit game state" is entered. In addition, as shown in FIG. 8C, when the "big hit" is won by entering the first starting opening 44, twelve special characters (1)-1 to (1)-12 Of the special figure types, it is divided into any type. In addition, the special drawing type when the "big hit" is won by entering the second starting opening 45 is only the special drawing (2)-1.

The winning content of the special figure (1)-1 and the special figure (1)-2 is "short time with payout". In this case, the “big hit game” has five round games. That is, the opening/closing operation of opening the shutter 54a five times is performed. The opening time of the shutter 54a per time is 27.996 seconds (see FIG. 8D). However, even if the opening time is shorter than this, when it is detected that ten game balls have entered the first big winning device 54, the shutter 54a is closed (see FIG. 8A). 15 game balls that enter the first big winning device 54 are paid out.

The expected value of special figure (1)-1 is 1%. In other words, when the big hit game is decided, the probability that the hit type is the special figure (1)-1 is 1%. Moreover, the expected value of the special figure (1)-2 is 44%. In addition, after shifting from the normal game, after the "big hit game" of special figure (1)-1 and special figure (1)-2 is performed, "time saving game" is performed. Here, the maximum number of times the "time saving game" is performed is 100 times. Although the details will be described later, the number of times the "time saving game" is performed corresponds to the number of times the variable display of the special symbol is executed. Whether or not there is a "time saving game" after the "big hit game" that has not been transferred from the "normal game" will be described later.

Further, the hit contents of the special drawings (1)-3 to the special drawing (1)-7 are "short time without payout". In this case, the “big hit game” has five round games. That is, the opening/closing operation of opening the shutter 54a five times is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 8D, since the opening time of the shutter 54a per time is 0.102 seconds and the opening time is short, the game ball is placed in the first big winning device 54 in this "big hit game". Possibility of entering a ball is low. Therefore, in this "big hit game", it is unlikely that a game ball will enter the first big winning device 54, and the game ball is rarely paid out.

The expected value of each of the special figures (1)-3 to (1)-7 is 1%. Moreover, after shifting from the normal game and after the "big hit game" of special figures (1)-3 to (1)-7 is performed, the "time saving game" is performed. Here, the maximum number of times the "time saving game" is performed is 100 times.

Further, the hit contents of the special drawings (1)-8 to the special drawings (1)-12 are "normal without coins". In this case, the “big hit game” has five round games. That is, the opening/closing operation of opening the shutter 54a five times is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 8D, since the opening time of the shutter 54a per time is 0.102 seconds and the opening time is short, the game ball is placed in the first big winning device 54 in this "big hit game". Possibility of entering a ball is low. Therefore, in this "big hit game", it is unlikely that a game ball will enter the first big winning device 54, and the game ball is rarely paid out.

The expected value of each of the special figures (1)-8 to (1)-11 is 12%, and the expected value of the special figure (1)-12 is 2%. Also, after shifting from the normal game, after the "big hit game" of special figure (1)-8 to special figure (1)-12 is performed, "time saving game" is not performed, and "normal game state" Become.

The winning content of Toku-zu (2)-1 is "There is a payout." In this case, the “big hit game” has five round games. That is, the opening/closing operation of opening the shutter 54a five times is performed. The opening time of the shutter 54a per time is 27.996 seconds. However, even if the opening time is shorter than this, when it is detected that ten game balls have entered the first big winning device 54, the shutter 54a is closed (see FIG. 8A). 15 game balls that enter the first big winning device 54 are paid out.

The expected value of special figure (2)-1 is 100%. That is, when the big hit game is decided by the ball entering the second starting port 45, it is always the special figure (2)-1. After the special jackpot (2)-1 "big hit game" is played, a "time saving game" is played. Here, the maximum number of times the "time saving game" is performed is 100 times.

The "small hit game state" is a game state in which the "small hit game" is performed, and is a game state in which the blade member 53a of the second big winning device 53 is opened and closed. The "small hit game" is performed by winning the "small hit" by a lottery performed when a game ball enters the second starting opening 45. As described above, even if the player enters the first starting opening 44, he/she does not win the "small hit".

When a game ball enters the second starting port 45, the "small hit" is won with a probability of 199/200 (see FIG. 8A). When the "small hit" is won, the "small hit game state" is entered. In addition, as shown in FIG. 8C, when the "small hit" is won by the ball entering the second starting port 45, the small hit (2)-1 to the small hit (2)-4 are 4 It is sorted into any of the special figure types.

The hit contents of the small hit (2)-1 and the small hit (2)-2 are "16R per V". The "small hit game" in this case is an opening/closing operation in which the blade member 53a is opened three times. The opening time of the blade member 53a per one turn is 1.5 seconds for the small hit (2)-1 and 1.2 seconds for the small hit (2)-2 (see FIG. 8D). ). However, even if the opening time is shorter than this, when it is detected that four game balls have entered the second big winning device 53, the blade member 53a is closed and does not open (FIG. 8(a)). reference). In addition, when it is detected that four game balls are entered in the second big winning device 53, the blade member 53a is closed and does not open even if the opening number of the blade member 53a is not three times. .. 15 game balls are paid out to the second big winning device 53.

In addition, in the "small hit game" of the small hit (2)-1 and the small hit (2)-2, when the game ball enters the V winning opening 57 of the second big winning device 53, it becomes "V hit", 16 rounds of "big hit games" will be held. However, in this case, since the opening/closing operation of the blade member 53a that triggers the ball to enter the V winning opening 57 is the first round, the shutter 54a of the first big winning device 54 after entering the V winning opening 57. Opens and closes 15 times. In this way, the game started by entering the V winning opening 57 is also called a "big hit game". In this "big hit game", the opening time for each shutter 54a is 27.996 seconds. However, even if the opening time is shorter than this, when it is detected that 10 game balls have entered the first big winning device 54, the shutter 54a is closed. Then, 15 game balls that enter the first big winning device 54 are paid out.

The expected value of the small hit (2)-1 is 16%. That is, the probability of being a small hit (2)-1 when the small hit game is determined is 16%. The expected value of the small hit (2)-2 is 17%. After the "big hit game" of the small hit (2)-1 and the small hit (2)-2, the "time saving game" is played. Here, the maximum number of times the "time saving game" is performed is 100 times. In addition, after the "big hit game" of the small hit (2)-1 and the small hit (2)-2, the "time saving game" may not be performed in some cases, which will be described later.

Further, the hit contents of the small hit (2)-3 and the small hit (2)-4 are "2R per V". The "small hit game" in this case is an opening/closing operation in which the blade member 53a is opened three times. The opening time of the blade member 53a is 1.5 seconds for the small hit (2)-3 and 1.2 seconds for the small hit (2)-4 (see FIG. 8D). ). However, even if the opening time is shorter than this, when it is detected that four game balls have entered the second big winning device 53, the blade member 53a is closed and does not open (FIG. 8(a)). reference). 15 game balls are paid out to the second big winning device 53.

Also, in the "small hit game" of the small hit (2)-3 and the small hit (2)-4, when the game ball enters the V winning opening 57 of the second big winning device 53, it becomes "V hit", Two rounds of "big hit games" will be held. However, in this case, since the ball entering the V winning opening 57 is the first round, the opening/closing operation of opening the shutter 54a of the first big winning device 54 once is performed after entering the V winning opening 57. In this way, the game started by entering the V winning opening 57 is also called a "big hit game". The number of rounds of this "big hit game" is different from that of the "big hit game" of the small hit (2)-1 and the small hit (2)-2, but the open time and the number of payouts are the same.

The expected value of the small hit (2)-3 is 33%. The expected value of the small hit (2)-4 is 34%. In addition, after the "big hit game" of the small hit (2)-3 and the small hit (2)-4, the "time saving game" is played. Here, the maximum number of times the "time saving game" is performed is 100 times.

The "time saving game state" is a game state in which the "time saving game" is performed, and is a game state in which the winning probability of a normal symbol is relatively high. That is, the "time saving game state" is a game state in which the normal electric auditors object 46 provided in the second starting port 45 is likely to be in an open state (a gaming state in which the second starting port winning is likely to occur), and for the player. It is an advantageous game state. The "time saving game state" is ended when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the first embodiment), when it becomes "V win", or when the "big hit" is won. ..
In the "time saving game state", not only is the winning probability of the ordinary symbol relatively high, but the lottery time in the ordinary symbol game may be relatively short. Further, the opening time of the opening/closing operation of the ordinary electric accessory 46 may be relatively long.

As shown in FIG. 8(b), in the "time saving game state", the winning probability of the normal symbol is high and is 256/256. In the first embodiment, the regular symbols are drawn with a high probability of 256/256 in the "time saving game state", but the regular symbols may not be drawn, and the winning may always be performed. In addition, except for the “time saving game state”, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is low, and 0/256, that is, the ordinary symbol is not won. In addition, except for the "time saving game state", in the first embodiment, the lottery for the ordinary symbol is performed with a low probability of 0/256, but the lottery for the ordinary symbol may not be performed and may always be lost.

The "normal game state" is a game state in which the "normal game" is performed, and is a game state that is neither a "big hit game state", a "small hit game state", or a "time saving game state".

The transition operation between the various game states described above is controlled by the main control circuit 70. That is, the main control circuit 70 also serves as means for controlling the transition operation between various game states.

[State transition of main control]
The transition between the various game states described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a state transition diagram of main control of the pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 9, when the game is started in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game is normally performed in the "normal game state". Here, every time the first starting opening 44 is won, a lottery process of special symbols for the first starting opening 44 is performed. However, as described above, since the normal symbol is not won in the “normal game state”, the normal electric accessory 46 does not open and the second starting opening 45 does not win.

When the "big hit" is won when the first start opening 44 is won, the "big hit game state" is entered. At this time, if the hit contents are the special figure (1)-8 to the special figure (1)-12, after the "big hit game state", the "normal game state" is entered (non-time saving big hit).

In the "normal game state", when the first start opening 44 is won and the "big hit" is won, if the winning content is special figure (1)-1 to special figure (1)-7, "big hit" After "gaming state", it shifts to "time saving game state" (time saving big hit). Specifically, the lottery process of the normal symbol is performed by the game ball passing the ball passage detector 43. In the "time saving game state", a lottery for ordinary symbols is won with a high probability, so when the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 43, the ordinary electric auditors object 46 is opened. If the game ball wins the second starting port 45 when the normal electric auditors product 46 is opened, the special symbol lottery process for the second starting port 45 is performed.

In the "time saving game state", since it is preferable for the player to pass the game ball through the ball passage detector 43, the player preferably performs "right hit". Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may perform an effect that prompts the player to "right hit" by using a display, a sound, or the like.

When the "small hit" is won when the second start opening 45 is won, the "small hit game state" is entered, and the opening/closing operation of the blade member 53a is performed. When the second big winning device 53 is won when the blade member 53a is in the open state and the V winning opening 57 is won, the "big hit game state" is entered. It should be noted that the number of round games varies depending on the winning content at this time. In the case of the small hit (2)-1 and the small hit (2)-2, the hit content is "16R per V", and the blade member 53a of the second big winning device 53 when the "V hit" is achieved. Is set as an open state, and 16 rounds of "big hit game" are executed including this round. Further, in the case of the small hit (2)-3 and the small hit (2)-4, the hit content is "2R per V", and the blades in the second big winning device 53 when "V hit" is reached. The state in which the member 53a is in the open state is one round, and this round is two rounds. In general, the larger the number of rounds is, the more game balls are paid out. Therefore, for the player, “per V” in “16R per V” is “V”. It can be said that it is more advantageous than "V hit" in "2R" "small hit".

As will be described later in detail, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, a “big hit game” round that is transferred when “V hit” is achieved when the “small hit” is won by satisfying a predetermined condition. Notify about numbers. As a result, the player pays out in the "big hit game state" that shifts after "V hit" by changing the shooting operation of the game ball such as performing "stop hit" according to the content of this notification. The number of game balls can be increased.

Here, when the "normal game state" is a time saving big hit, the "time saving game state" and the "big hit game state" are alternately shifted by a predetermined number of times. In the first embodiment, after the "big hit game state" after the "normal game state", the so-called "big hit game state" at the first hit, the "time saving game state" and the "big hit game state" are alternately repeated three times for each predetermined number of times. Transfer. That is, "normal game state" → "big hit game state" → "time saving game state" → "big hit game state" → "time saving game state" → "big hit game state" → "time saving game state" → "big hit game state" → It shifts in the order of "normal game state". However, in the transition of these gaming states, for example, when "small hit" is won in the "time saving gaming state", it shifts to "small hitting gaming state", but this "small hitting gaming state" is omitted. ing. The "big hit game state" other than the "big hit game state" of the first hit is not always triggered by "V hit". That is, the "big hit game state" due to the "big hit" of the special figure (2)-1 shown in FIG. 8 is also included, and there is a possibility that the "big hit game state" due to the "big hit" will shift three times, for example.

As described above, in the first embodiment, in the case of a short-time big hit, in principle, four "big hit games" and three "time-short games" are performed. Regardless of the winning content of the "small hit" in the third "time saving game state", after the subsequent "big hit game state", it becomes "normal game state" instead of "time saving game state" .. In addition, regardless of the winning content of "small hit" in the first and second "time saving game status", the "time saving game status" is set after the subsequent "big hit game status".

In the special symbol lottery of the second starting port 45, there is a case where the "big hit" is won instead of the "small hit", but in that case, the "big hit game state" is also entered.

Here, in the "time saving game state", there is a high possibility that the player is performing "right hitting", and there is a low possibility that the player will win the first starting opening 44. However, when the first start opening 44 is won and the "big hit" is won, the number of rounds and the opening time are determined according to the winning content, and the "big hit game" is performed. In addition, in the first and second "time saving game state" "big hit" winning, even if the winning content is special figure (1)-8 to special figure (1)-12, after "big hit gaming state" Is "time saving game state". Further, in the third "time saving game state", when the first start opening 44 is won and the "big hit" is won, the "time saving" is continued after the "big hit game state", regardless of the hit contents. Instead of the "game state", the "normal game state" is entered.

In this way, in the first embodiment, when the short-time jackpot is hit in the "normal game state", the set game is played, but in the "time-short game state", "time-short game" is performed 100 times, "V If the "hit" is not made, the "time saving game state" shifts to the "normal game state". However, in the first embodiment, it can be set by adjusting the opening timing of the movable member 57a of the V winning opening 57 when a game ball enters the second big winning device 53. Therefore, when the player performs a normal shooting operation, it is unlikely that the "V hit" is not performed while the "time saving game" is performed 100 times. For example, when entering the second big winning device 53, the probability of entering the V winning opening 57 may be set to about 2/3.
Specifically, the movable member 57a may perform the opening/closing operation until the blade member 53a of the second big winning device 53 starts to open and closes. Then, by adjusting the timing at which the movable member 57a starts the opening operation, the opening time, and the like, the probability of entering the V winning opening 57 when entering the second big winning device 53 can be adjusted. .. As a result, this probability should be about 2/3. For example, the time during which the movable member 57a is open may be set to about 2/3 of the time during which the blade member 53a is open.

[Sub-control state transition]
The transition between the various game states described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a state transition diagram of sub-control of the pachinko gaming machine.

Here, the special jackpot (1)-1 to the special jackpot (1)-2 "big hit" is a trigger for shifting to the "big hit gaming state" in which the payout of the game balls can be expected, and therefore, in the display area 13a at this time. The displayed decorative pattern may be, for example, three same numbers arranged. As a result, it is understood that the player also shifts to an advantageous gaming state. Therefore, the "big hit" in special figures (1)-1 to (1)-2 may be referred to as "symbol-matching big hit".

Further, the special jackpot (1)-3 to the special jackpot (1)-12 "big hit" is a trigger for the shift to the "big hit gaming state" in which the payout of the game balls cannot be expected, and therefore is displayed in the display area 13a at this time. The decorative pattern to be used may be a series of different numbers. Therefore, the "big hit" in special figures (1)-3 to (1)-12 may be referred to as "big hit with no pattern".
Note that the decorative symbol displayed in the display area 13a may be in a mode in which three symbols of the right symbol, the middle symbol, and the left symbol are arranged in a line, and the special symbols (1)-3 to (1)-12 In the "big hit", the right symbol and the left symbol may be the same symbol, and a special symbol may be displayed for the medium symbol. There may be a plurality of types of medium symbols that are special symbols, and the effect in the "big hit" may be different depending on the displayed medium symbol. The degree of expectation of entry into the "time saving game state" may differ due to the difference in these effects. In this case, if the selection ratios of a plurality of types of medium symbols are made different for each of the special maps (1)-3 to (1)-12, the expectation of time saving entry can be made different. Good. For example, the middle symbol is a symbol that draws an omikuji, and the omikuji that appears may suggest a transition to a time saving game.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the "normal gaming state", the "big hit gaming state" and the "time saving gaming state" are provided. As shown in FIG. 10, the "normal gaming state" and the "big hit gaming state" can be changed to each other, and the "big hit gaming state" and the "time saving game state" can be changed to each other. Although there is a "small hitting game state", it is omitted here.

As shown in FIG. 10, the "normal gaming state" includes a "first high probability state", a "second high probability state", a "third high probability state", and a "fourth high probability state". Has been. Then, the "normal game state" includes "normal game state (sub)" which is a state other than the "first high probability state" to the "fourth high probability state". As described above, in the first embodiment, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, when the "small hit" is won, the "big hit game" round number to be transferred when the "V hit" is reached is notified. .. It is necessary to determine whether or not to make this notification, or the notification mode such as the number of times of notification. And the notification mode determined in each of these "1st high probability state"-"4th high probability state" and "normal game state (sub)" differs.

First, each of the “first high probability state” to the “fourth high probability state” will be described.

In the "first high probability state", when the "big hit" of special figure (1)-1 to special figure (1)-7 is won and the process shifts to the set game, "3 times" executed in the set game are executed. In all of the "time saving game state", when the "small hit" is won, the number of rounds of the "big hit game" to be transferred when the "winning V" is won is notified. That is, when the game ball wins the V winning opening 57, it is notified which of the 16 rounds of the "big hit game" and the 2 rounds of the "big hit game" will be executed. It should be noted that when the set game ends and shifts to the "normal game state", it becomes the "first high probability state". In addition, if the special jackpot (1)-8 to the special jackpot (1)-12 "big hit" is won and the game shifts to the "big hit gaming state" of only one shot instead of the set game, "big hit game" When the "state" ends and the "normal game state" is entered, the "first high probability state" is maintained.

The "first high-probability state" includes "normal gaming state" other than "third high-probability state" and "fourth high-probability state", that is, "second high-probability state" and "normal gaming state (sub)". , The number of points accumulated according to the effect in the pachinko game (for example, according to the result of the mini game) reaches 100 points, and then the transition is made. Then, when 20 games are exhausted in the "first high probability state", the state shifts to the "second high probability state". Specifically, in the "first high probability state", when the variable display of the special symbol is performed 20 times, the "second high probability state" is entered.

The “second high-probability state” is a state in which it is easy to transition to the “first high-probability state”. That is, the “second high probability state” is a gaming state in which points that trigger the transition to the “first high probability state” are more likely to be accumulated than in other gaming states. In addition, if you win the "big hit" of special figure (1)-8 to special figure (1)-12 and shift to "big hit game state" of one shot only instead of set game, "big hit game state" When the "ends" and shifts to the "normal game state", the "first high probability state" is set.

As described above, when 20 games are exhausted in the “first high probability state”, the state shifts to the “second high probability state”. Further, when 10 games are exhausted in the "second high probability state", the "normal game state (sub)" other than the "first high probability state" to the "fourth high probability state" is entered.

In the “normal game state” other than the “first high probability state”, the “third high probability state” and the “fourth high probability state”, that is, the “second high probability state” and the “normal game state (sub)”, If you win the "big hit" in Fig. (1)-1 and move to the set game, you will get "small win" when you win the "small hit" in all of the three "time saving game states" executed in the set game. The number of rounds of "big hit game" to be transferred when "per V" is notified. In addition, when the "big hit" of special figure (1)-2 to special figure (1)-7 is won and the set game is started, the number of times the round number is notified is determined by lottery. This lottery will be described later. It should be noted that, when the set game ends and shifts to the "normal game state", it becomes the "first high probability state". In addition, when the special jackpot (1)-8 to the special jackpot (1)-12 “big hit” is elected and it shifts to the “big hit gaming state” of only one shot instead of the set game, “big hit gaming state” When the "ends" and shifts to the "normal game state", the "first high probability state" is set.

The "third high probability state" is a gaming state (ceiling state) for activating a so-called ceiling function. The ceiling function is to give a privilege advantageous to the player on condition that the condition disadvantageous to the player continues. Specifically, in the "third high probability state", when the special jackpot (1)-1 to the special jackpot (1)-7 "big hit" is won and the set game is entered, the set game is executed. In all of the three "time saving game states", when the "small hit" is won, the number of rounds of the "big hit game" to be transferred when the "V hit" is given is notified. After the end of this set game, the "high probability state" is entered. Furthermore, in the "third high probability state", the "big hit" of special figure (1)-8 to special figure (1)-12 is won, and the "big hit game state" is transferred only once instead of the set game. In this case, when the "big hit game state" ends and the "normal game state" is entered, the "third high probability state" is maintained. The "third high probability state" is maintained until the "big hit" of special figure (1)-1 to special figure (1)-7 is won and the set game is started.

As described above, the "third high probability state" is a gaming state for activating the ceiling function. Even if a game ball enters the first starting opening 44, if the state where the "big hit" does not occur continuously, the state shifts to the "third high probability state". In the first embodiment, the state where the game ball does not become a “big hit” even if the game ball enters the first starting opening 44 is 111 games, 222 games, 333 games, 444 games, 555 games, 666 games, 777 games, and 888 games. When the game continues for 999 games, the ceiling CPU lottery is performed each time by the sub CPU 201, and when the game is won, the state shifts to the “third high probability state”. Details of the ceiling lottery will be described later.

Even after shifting to the “third high probability state” which is the ceiling state, there are 111 games, 222 games, in which the special jackpots (1)-1 to (1)-7 are not won. When 333 games, 444 games, 555 games, 666 games, 777 games, 888 games and 999 games have continued, the sub CPU 201 may perform the ceiling lottery each time. When the player wins, the “third high probability state” may be accumulated and stored. That is, when a plurality of "third high probability states" are stored, the "big hit" of special figure (1)-1 to special figure (1)-7 is won and executed three times in the set game. In all of the "time saving game state", when the "small hit" is won, the "big hit game" round number notification to be transferred when "V hit" is stored, and the "third high probability state" is stored. It suffices to be possible as many times as there are. That is, when the “third high probability state” is accumulated and stored, the number of times the “third high probability state” is stored is changed to the “third high probability state” again after the end of the set game.

In addition, after transitioning to the “third high probability state” which is the ceiling state, the number of games that are not won in the “big hit” of special figure (1)-1 to special figure (1)-7 is counted and notified. When the "third high probability state" is performed and the "normal game state" is transitioned to, when the counting of the number of games that is the reference for the ceiling lottery is started again, after the transition to the "third high probability state" The number of games may be counted by adding the number of games.

The “fourth high probability state” is for giving a privilege (all day navigation) advantageous to the player all day. Specifically, in the "fourth high probability state", if the "big hit" of special figure (1)-1 to special figure (1)-7 is won and the process shifts to the set game, it is executed in the set game. In all of the three "time saving game states", when the "small hit" is won, the number of rounds of the "big hit game" to be transferred when the "V hit" is given is notified.

Also, in the "4th high probability state", if the set game ends, and if the single "big hit game state" that does not shift to the "time saving game state" ends, the "4th high probability state" is maintained To be done. In this way, when the "fourth high probability state" is entered, the "fourth high probability state" is maintained. The “fourth high probability state” is maintained unless the work RAM 203 is cleared. Thus, in the "4th high probability state", the notification is made in all of the 3 "time saving game states" executed in the set game, and the "4th high probability state" is kept until the work RAM 203 is cleared. Since it is maintained, the above notification in the set game continues until the store is closed. Therefore, the above notification in the “fourth high probability state” is referred to as an all day navigation.

The work RAM 203 is cleared by turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 while pressing the backup switch. The work RAM 203 is not cleared by simply turning off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1. That is, even if the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off due to some error, the work RAM 203 is not cleared and the “fourth high probability state” is maintained. Note that normally, the work RAM 203 is not cleared during the business hours of the hall.
Here, when the work RAM 203 is cleared, the RAM clear flag is set, and if the first hit after the RAM clear flag is set is the “big hit” of the special figure (1)-12, there is a probability of 1/1. Win the “4th high probability state” and move to the “4th high probability state”. Further, the RAM clear flag is turned off regardless of the first hit after the RAM clear flag is set. When the subsequent hit is the "big hit" of special figure (1)-12, the "4th high probability state" is won with a probability of 1/10, and the "4th high probability state" is entered.
As described above, in order to shift to the “fourth high probability state”, the work RAM 203 has been cleared, but the work RAM 203 is not cleared and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is simply powered off. It may be on condition that it is turned on. In other words, after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, if the first hit is a "big hit" in special figure (1)-12, there is a 1/1 chance of winning the "4th high probability state", It is also possible to shift to the “fourth high probability state”. The power ON flag may be set when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned ON. Then, whichever the first hit is after the power-on flag is set, the power-on flag is turned off. If the subsequent hits are "big hits" in Toku-zu (1)-12, there is a 1/10 chance of winning the "4th high probability state" and transitioning to the "4th high probability state". May be In this case, the “fourth high probability state” may be maintained until the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off. At the time of "big hit" of special figure (1)-12, we decided to win "4th high probability state" with probability of 1/1 or 1/10, but in "4th high probability state" The type of winning and the probability of winning can be set as appropriate.

Next, the transition between the "normal gaming state" and the "big hit gaming state" will be described. As shown in FIG. 10, in the "normal game state", when the "symbol matching hit" (first big hit state) is won, and when the "symbol not matched" (first big hit state) is won, both It shifts to "big hit game state". It should be noted that if the "winning symbol" is won, the game balls are expected to be paid out, and the game is transferred to a "big hit game state" of five rounds. It shifts to the "big hit game state" (second big hit state) of the round.

Then, from the "normal game state" other than the "fourth high probability state", that is, "first high probability state" to "third high probability state" and "normal game state (sub)", special figure (1)-1 If the special jackpot (1)-7 is a "big hit", the set game is executed, and after the set game is completed, the "first high probability state" is entered.

Also, from the "normal game state" other than the "third high probability state" and the "fourth high probability state", that is, the "first high probability state", the "second high probability state" and the "normal game state (sub)" , Special figure (1)-8 ~ special figure (1)-12 "big hit" in the "big hit game state" transition, it becomes a single "big hit game state" without time saving, this "big hit game state" After the completion of, shifts to the “first high probability state”. Also, when the "third high probability state" shifts to the "big hit gaming state" with the "big hit" of special figure (1)-8 to special figure (1)-12, a single "big hit gaming state without time saving" , And after this "big hit game state" ends, the state shifts to the "third high probability state" again.

When the "fourth high probability state" is transitioned to the "big hit gaming state", the "fourth high probability state" is changed again after the set game is completed or the single "big hit gaming state" without time saving is completed.

Next, the transition between the "big hit game state" and the "time saving game state" will be described. As shown in FIG. 10, during a set game after "big hit" by winning the first start opening 44 or the second start opening 45, or after "V hit" in the "small hit game state" When the set game is being played, the "big hit game state" is shifted to the "time saving game state".

Further, the "time saving game state" is shifted to the "big hit game state" when "V hit" occurs in the "time saving game state". At this time, if the 16-round "big hit game" is won, the third big hit state is entered, and if the 2nd round "big hit game" is won, the fourth big hit state is entered. Further, in the "time saving game state", when the "big hit" is won by entering the first starting opening 44 or the second starting opening 45 instead of the "V hit", the "time saving gaming status" to the "big hit game" State. In this case, the first big hit state is entered.

[Structure of data table stored in main ROM]
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the main ROM 72 of the main control circuit 70 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12.

[Main fluctuation time determination table]
First, the main variation time determination table will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12. 11 and 12 are diagrams showing an example of main fluctuation time determination tables 1 and 2 of the pachinko gaming machine.

The main variation time determination table 1 is referred to when a loss or a "small hit" is won in the special symbol game. The main variation time determination table 1 defines the relationship between the game state, the reach determination random number range, the effect selection random number range, the variation pattern, the variation pattern command, and the variation time.

In the main fluctuation time determination table 1, the gaming state is identified as a "time saving game state" (with time saving) and a state other than "time saving game state" (without time saving). Furthermore, the special figure classification is divided into five special figure (1) missing, small hit (2)-1 to small hit (2)-4.

The random number range for reach determination defines whether or not the selection content is reach in the case where the special map type is Special Figure (1) Loss. The range of random numbers for reach determination that determines the variable time for reach and the range of random numbers for reach determination that does not determine the variable time for reach is defined. The reach determination random number value is extracted from a reach determination counter (not shown) and stored in the main RAM 73 when the game ball wins the first and second starting openings 44 and 45 in the respective game states. The reach determination random number value extracted from the reach determination counter of the first embodiment is set to 0 to 250.

As shown in FIG. 11, for example, if the special figure (1) is lost and the game state at that time is not the time saving game state, the reach determination random number range that determines the reach variation time is 0 to 250. Range. Furthermore, it is determined that the reach occurs when the reach determination random number range is any one of 0 to 25, and the variation pattern is determined according to the value of the effect selection random number in the range of 0 to 99. .. By determining the variation pattern, the variation time (20000 ms, 30000 ms, 40000 ms) for reach and the effect contents (“miss normal reach”, “miss super reach A” and “miss super reach B”) are determined. It should be noted that each of these reaches includes a plurality of types of reach contents, and the reach contents thereafter are determined by the sub control circuit 200.

In addition, when the special figure (1) is a loss and the game state at that time is a time saving game state, the variable time (50000 ms) is set relatively long, but this is "time saving game state. This is to make it difficult to draw the first special symbol which is disadvantageous to the player. The lottery for the second special symbol has priority over the lottery for the first special symbol. If the specification does not hold the second special symbol, it is not necessary to provide this data, so this data is not provided.

Here, if the small hit (2)-1 to small hit (2)-4 and the game state at that time is not the time saving game state, after the "time saving game" is performed 100 times, the second special symbol This is due to the reserve, and this is unlikely to occur. In this case, when "per V", it is preferable to perform a revival effect such that "time saving game" is performed again.

The random number range for effect selection defines the range of random numbers for reach determination, the variation time, and the range of random numbers for effect selection corresponding to effect contents. The effect selection random number value is extracted from an effect selection counter (not shown) when the game ball wins the first start opening 44 or the second start opening 45 in each game state. The random number value for effect selection extracted from the counter for effect selection on the main side of the first embodiment is set to 0 to 99.

For example, if the special figure (1) is lost and the game state at that time is not the time-saving game state, the reach determination random number range that determines the reach variation time ranges from 0 to 250. Further, it is determined that the normal variation is performed when the reach determination random number range is any of 26 to 250, and the variation pattern is determined according to the value of the effect selection random number in the range of 0 to 99. It By determining the variation pattern, the variation time (10000 ms, 5000 ms) and the effect contents ("normal variation A" and "normal variation B") are determined. Sub-control circuit 200 determines the subsequent production contents.

The fluctuation pattern is data representing the content of the effect. For example, the variation pattern 02H represents a lost normal reach. The fluctuation pattern command is data representing whether the winning or losing, the fluctuation time and the effect contents, and is transmitted from the main control circuit 70 to the sub control circuit 200. When the variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control circuit 70 to the sub control circuit 200, a parameter specifying the game state is also transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main variation time determination table 2 will be described with reference to FIG.

The main fluctuation time determination table 2 is referred to when the big hit is won in the special symbol game. The main variation pattern determination table 2 defines the relationship among the gaming state, the big hit type, the effect selection random number range, the variation pattern, the variation pattern command, and the variation time.

In the main fluctuation time determination table 2, the gaming state is the same as in the main fluctuation time determination table 1, "with time saving" indicates that it is a time saving game state when the big hit is won, and "no time saving" is won with the big hit. It shows that it is not in the time saving game state. The special figure classification is divided into thirteen special figure (1)-1 to special figure (1)-12 and special figure (2)-1.
For example, in the case of the big hit of special figure (1)-2, when the gaming state at that time is not the time saving game state, the contents of the big hit type are the time shortening with a payout (the game ball may be paid out in the big hit gaming state. The variation pattern is determined according to the value of the random number for effect selection that is expected and shifts to the time-saving game state after the big hit game state), and the range of 0 to 99. By determining the variation pattern, the variation time (20100 ms, 30100 ms, 40100 ms) and the effect content (“normal reach”, “super reach A”, and “super reach B”) are determined. It should be noted that each of these reaches includes a plurality of types of reach contents, and the reach contents thereafter are determined by the sub control circuit 200.

As shown in FIG. 12, the special drawing (1)-1 and the special drawing (1)-2 are reach effects regardless of whether the jackpot is in the time saving game state or not when the big hit is won. However, in the case of special figure (1)-3 to special figure (1)-12, a production without a payout is performed. Toku-zu (1)-1 and Toku-zu (1)-2 are "big hits with matching symbols", while Toku-zu (1)-3 to (1)-12 are "big hits with no matching marks".

[Configuration of data table stored in sub ROM]
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the program ROM 72 of the sub control circuit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Ceiling lottery table]
First, the ceiling lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a ceiling lottery table of a pachinko gaming machine.

The ceiling lottery table is used in the above-mentioned ceiling lottery. In the sub-control circuit 200, the number of special symbol games (the number of times the special symbol fluctuates and is displayed) when the game ball enters the first starting opening 44 and becomes a "big hit" after the end of the set game is counted. When the set game is entered, the counting is reset so that the number of special symbol games is counted again after the end of the set game. When the counted number of special symbol games reaches 111 times, 222 times, 333 times, 444 times, 555 times, 666 times, 777 times, 888 times and 999 times, the ceiling lottery is performed.

Here, the range of random numbers in the ceiling lottery is 0-9. First, when the number of counted special symbol games reaches 111 times, the winning random number value is 0 to 1. Therefore, the probability of winning the ceiling lottery is 20%. Moreover, when the number of counted special symbol games reaches 222 times, the winning random number value is 0 to 2. Therefore, the probability of winning the ceiling lottery is 30%. Moreover, when the number of counted special symbol games reaches 333 times, the winning random number value is 0 to 3. Therefore, the probability of winning the ceiling lottery is 40%. Moreover, when the number of counted special symbol games reaches 444 times, the winning random number value is 0 to 4. Therefore, the probability of winning the ceiling lottery is 50%. Moreover, when the number of counted special symbol games reaches 555 times, the winning random number value is 0 to 5. Therefore, the probability of winning the ceiling lottery is 60%. Further, when the counted number of special symbol games reaches 666, the winning random number value is 0 to 6. Therefore, the probability of winning the ceiling lottery is 70%. Also, when the number of counted special symbol games reaches 777 times, the winning random number value is 0 to 7. Therefore, the probability of winning the ceiling lottery is 80%. Also, when the number of counted special symbol games reaches 888, the winning random number value is 0 to 8. Therefore, the probability of winning the ceiling lottery is 90%. When the number of counted special symbol games reaches 999, the winning random number value is 0 to 9. Therefore, the probability of winning the ceiling lottery is 100%.

As shown in FIG. 13, as the state where the "big hit" is not won continues, the probability of winning the ceiling lottery increases. When the number of special symbol games that do not win the "big hit" reaches 999, the ceiling lottery is always won. When winning the ceiling lottery, the state shifts to the “third high probability state”.

[Point addition table]
The point addition table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of a point addition table of a pachinko gaming machine.

As described above, the "normal game state" other than the "first high probability state", the "third high probability state" and the "fourth high probability state", that is, the "second high probability state" and the "normal game state (sub )”, points are accumulated according to the effect, and when 100 points are accumulated, the state shifts to the “first high probability state” (FIG. 10). In the "first high probability state", if you win the "big hit" of the special figure (1)-1 and the special figure (1)-2 ("big hit of matching symbols"), you win "V" in the "time saving game state" The notification (navigation) of the number of rounds of the "big hit game" to be transferred in the case is performed in all three "time saving game states". Further, in the "first high probability state", the special jackpot (1)-3 and the special jackpot (1)-7 "big hit" ("big hit not having a pattern", shift to "time saving game state". Even if you win "big hit"), notification of the number of rounds of "big hit game" (navigation) that shifts when "V hit" in "time saving game state" occurs in all three "time saving game state" Be seen. Therefore, it can be said that shifting to the “first high probability state” is advantageous for the player. In addition, hereinafter, when simply referred to as “navi”, it refers to notification of the number of rounds of “big hit game” to be transferred when the above “V hit” occurs.

As described above, the "second high probability state" is a game state in which points are easily accumulated, and different point addition tables are used during the "second high probability state" and during other games. FIG. 14A is a table used in the “second high probability state”. FIG. 14(a)
As shown in, when the variation pattern command sent from the main control circuit 70 to the sub control circuit 200 is an effect corresponding to “83H00H”, “83H01H”, “83H02H”, “83H03H” and “83H04H”, , The value of the additional points varies depending on the lottery, but some points are added. That is, in the "second high probability state", points are always added if there is a loss. The point determination random number range is 0 to 9, and the added points differ depending on the acquired random number value.

The effect content corresponding to "83H00H" is "normal variation A", the effect content corresponding to "83H01H" is "normal variation B", and the effect content corresponding to "83H02H" is "miss normal reach". Yes, the effect content corresponding to "83H03H" is "miss super reach A", and the effect content corresponding to "83H04H" is "miss super reach B" (see FIG. 11). In these effects, point addition effects may be performed so that the player can recognize that points will be added. Also, in "Loss Super Reach B", navigation can be acquired with a probability of 1/10.

Further, FIG. 14B is a table normally used. As shown in FIG. 14B, in the case where the effect corresponding to the variation pattern command is “83H00H”, “83H01H”, “83H02H”, “83H03H” and “83H04H”, the value of the added point is determined by lot However, points may not be added in some cases. The point determination random number range is 0 to 9 as in the “second high probability state”. As can be seen from FIGS. 14A and 14B, points are more likely to be accumulated in the “second high probability state” than in the normal state.

[Short time navigation lottery table without payout]
The short time navi lottery table without payout will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing an example of a payout-less time saving navigation lottery table of a pachinko gaming machine.

As described above, when the winning content is “short payout time saving”, a short payout time saving navigation lottery is performed, and the number of times of navigation is determined according to this lottery. When the winning content is “short time without payout”, the special drawing types are special drawing (1)-3 to special drawing (1)-7. As shown in FIG. 15, the range of the random number value is 0-9. In Toku-zu (1)-3, when the acquired random number value is "9", one navigation is given, and with other random number values, no navigation is given. In Toku-zu (1)-4, when the acquired random number value is "7 to 9," one navigation is given, and with other random number values, no navigation is given. In special figure (1)-5, when the acquired random number value is "7-9", two navigations are given, when it is "2-6", one navigation is given and other random numbers are given. Navigation is not given with numerical values. In special figure (1)-6, two navigations are given when the acquired random number value is "5-9", and one navigation is given when it is "0-4". In special figure (1)-7, when the acquired random number value is "9", three navigations are provided, and when the acquired random value is "0-8", two navigations are provided. In addition, when the navigation is given, the navigation acquisition effect is executed. Further, the number of times of navigation given is updated (for example, added) and stored in the work RAM 203, for example.

[Navi lottery table for big hits]
The big hit navigation lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of a big hit navigation lottery table of a pachinko gaming machine.

In the "normal game state", the "1st high probability state", "3rd high probability state" and "4th high probability state" are won by "winning time with payout" and the transition to the set game is decided. In this case, the navigation is performed for all of the three "time saving game states" (see S1127 in FIG. 46, S1164 in FIG. 48 and S1174 in FIG. 49). In addition, in special figure (1)-1, navigation is performed for all three "time saving game states" regardless of the game state. However, when the special figure (1)-2 is won in the "normal game state" other than the above-mentioned game state, the number of times of navigation during the set game is selected by the sub-control circuit 200. The big hit navigation lottery table is used for this lottery.

The number of winning navigations in the big hit navigation lottery and their winning probabilities differ depending on the selected character. The player selects one of the characters 1 to 3 as the character. It is selected by operating the effect button 23, for example, by winning the "big hit" and before starting the one-round game. If a character has not been selected by the time the 1-round game is started, the initially set character is selected.

The character is a character image displayed in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13. There are a plurality of types of character images (three types in the first embodiment), the player can select one of the characters, and enjoy the effect according to the selected character.

In the big hit navigation lottery, the range of the random number value is 0 to 9. As shown in FIG. 16, when character 1 is selected, it is a “stable type” and does not get three navigations, but can get one or two navigations and cannot get navigations. If not. In addition, when character 2 is selected, it is a "normal type", and although navigation may not be obtained in some cases, navigation can be obtained on average for each of 1 to 3. Also, when the character 3 is selected, it is a “one-shot reversal type”, and when the navigation is obtained, the number is always 3, but the navigation cannot be obtained with a probability of 1/2 or more. The player may select a character from these according to his or her preference. However, with respect to each character, the number of navigations and the winning rate thereof are set such that no substantial advantage or disadvantage will occur regardless of which character is selected. Although the number of characters is three in the first embodiment, other numbers may be used. As the number of characters increases, the range of characters that the player can select is broadened, and there is a high possibility that the interest in the game will improve.

[Navi lottery table at the end of set game]
The navigation lottery table at the end of the set game will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of the navigation lottery table at the end of the set game of the pachinko gaming machine.

As described above, during the set game, three "time saving game states" are included. That is, it is possible to execute the navigation three times at the maximum. However, when the "big hit" by the special symbol game is won instead of the "big hit" by "V hit", the navigation cannot be performed. In such a case, the player cannot make an advantageous situation by his/her own operation. Therefore, in the first embodiment, as a relief measure in such a case, navigation is given by lottery according to the number of "big hits" by the special symbol game during the set game.

In the sub-control circuit 200, when the set game is finished, the set game end navigation lottery is performed according to the number of "big hits" by the special symbol game in the set game.

In the navigator lottery at the end of the set game, the range of random number values is 0-9. As shown in FIG. 17, the number of “big hits” in the special symbol game is 0, 1, 2, 3 and each time, a lottery is performed to determine the number of navigations to be given. The larger the number of "big hits" in the special symbol game, the larger the number of navigations provided. In the first embodiment, the number of "big hits" by the special symbol game during the set game is used as a reference, but for example, the number of "big hits" by the special symbol game over consecutive set games is used as the reference The number may be drawn by lot. That is, based on the number of times of "big hit" by the lottery performed by the game ball entering the first starting opening 44 or the second starting opening 45 during a plurality of consecutive set games, the number of navigations May be drawn by lot.

It should be noted that the number of navigations to be given may be selected based on the total number of rounds in all the "big hit game states", not the number of "big hits" by the special symbol game during the set game. .. It suffices to randomly select the number of navigations to be given according to the game state during the set game. For example, the number of navigations to be given may be drawn based on the type and order of the “big hit game” in the set game. For example, the order of 2R, 2R, and 16R and the order of 2R, 16R, and 16R may be different in the lottery rate of the number of navigations to be provided. ..

Also, during the set game, it is possible to perform "V hits" up to 3 times, but if the results are all 2R hits, the number of payouts of game balls is small, so this is not a very desirable result for the player. Absent. Therefore, in such a case, the number of navigations for the set game after the next time may be added (see S1210 in FIG. 51). The number to be added may be once, for example. Also, the number of navigations may be added in the same manner even when the number of 2R hits is not the same as the number of 2R hits in one set game, but the number of 2R hits is consecutive 3 times over different set games. In the case of a different set game, the number of consecutive 2Rs may not be set to three, and if the number of consecutive 2Rs is more than that, the navigation may be added. In addition, when the number of 2R hits is a certain number or more in a plurality of consecutive set games, navigation may be added. In this way, some relief measures may be given to the game balls for which the number of payouts in the set game is small.

Although the number of navigations to be given has been described, the number of navigations to be given may be displayed in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 as an effect, for example, in the “big hit game state”.

[Description of operation of main control circuit]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Main control main processing]
First, the main control main process under the control of the main CPU 71 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19. 18 and 19 are flowcharts showing an example of the main processing executed by the main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine.

In S11, a watchdog timer disable setting process is performed. In this processing, the main CPU 71 executes processing for setting the watchdog timer to be disabled. When this process ends, the process moves to S12.

In S12, an input/output port setting process is performed. In this processing, the main CPU 71 performs input/output port setting processing. When this process ends, the process moves to S13.

In S13, a process of determining whether or not the power failure is detected. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the power failure detection signal is HI (high level). If the power failure detection signal is HI, it is determined that the power failure is in the power failure detection state, and the process proceeds to S13. If the power failure detection signal is not HI, it is determined that the power failure is not detected and the process is performed in S14. When the power failure detection signal is HI, it is determined that the power failure is in the power failure detection state, the process is moved to S13 again, and this is repeated until it is determined that the power failure is not detected.

In S14, a sub-control reception acceptance wait process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of waiting until the sub control circuit 200 receives a signal. When this process ends, the process moves to S15.

In S15, RAM write permission processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of permitting writing to the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the process moves to S16.

In S16, processing for determining whether or not the backup clear switch 121 (see FIG. 7) is on is performed. In this process, when determining that the backup clear switch 121 (see FIG. 7) is on, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S24, and when determining that the backup clear switch 121 is not on, proceeds to S17. Transfer processing.

In S17, a process of determining whether or not there is a power failure detection flag is performed. In this processing, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S18 when it determines that there is the power failure detection flag, and shifts the processing to S24 when it does not determine that the power failure detection flag exists.

In S18, processing for calculating the work damage check value is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process damage check and calculates a work damage check value. When this process ends, the process moves to S19.

In S19, a process of determining whether the work damage check value is a normal value is performed. In this process, when determining that the work damage check value is a normal value, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S20, and when it is not determined that the work damage check value is a normal value, the main CPU 71 proceeds to S24. Transfer.

In S20, a process of setting 7FFEH to the stack pointer is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting 7FFEH in the stack pointer. When this process ends, the process moves to S21.

In S21, a work area initial setting process at power recovery is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs an initial setting process of the work area at the time of power recovery. When this process ends, the process moves to S22.

In S22, processing for transmitting a command for power recovery is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of transmitting to the sub control circuit 200 a command for returning to the game state at the time of power interruption. When this process ends, the process moves to S23.

In S23, CPU peripheral device initialization processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 initializes the devices around the main CPU 71. When this process ends, the program returns to the address before the power failure, that is, the program address indicated by the program counter restored from the stack area.

In S24, a process of setting 8000H to the stack pointer is performed. In this processing, the main CPU 71 executes processing for setting 8000H in the stack pointer. When this process ends, the process moves to S25.

In S25, a process of acquiring an initial value of a random number related to the big hit determination is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of acquiring an initial value of a random number related to jackpot determination. When this process ends, the process moves to S26.

In S26, all work area clear processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of clearing the entire work area. When this process ends, the process moves to S27 (FIG. 19).

In S27, a process of setting an initial value of a random number related to jackpot determination is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting an initial value of a random number related to jackpot determination. When this process ends, the process moves to S28.

In S28, the work area is initialized when the RAM is initialized. In this process, the main CPU 71 initializes the work area when the main RAM 73 is initialized. When this process ends, the process moves to S29.

In S29, a process of transmitting a command for initializing the RAM is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of transmitting a command for initializing the main RAM 73 to the sub control circuit 200. Further, in the sub control circuit 200, initialization is executed based on the received command. When this process ends, the process moves to S30.

In S30, CPU peripheral device initialization processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 initializes the devices around the main CPU 71. When this process ends, the process moves to S31.

In S31, interrupt prohibition processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of prohibiting the interrupt process. When this process ends, the process moves to S32.

In S32, an initial value random number updating process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of updating the initial random number counter value. When this process ends, the process moves to S33.

In S33, interrupt permission processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of permitting the interrupt process. When this process ends, the process moves to S34.

In S34, the random number update for production is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process for updating the random number counter for effect. When this process ends, the process moves to S35.

In S35, the main CPU 71 determines whether the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more. In this processing, the main CPU 71 refers to the system timer monitoring timer value stored in the main RAM 73, and when the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more, moves the processing to S36 and sets the system timer monitoring timer value to 3 If not, the process proceeds to S31.

In S36, the value of the system timer monitoring timer is decremented by 3. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting 3 from the value of the system timer monitoring timer stored in the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the process moves to S37.

In S37, timer update processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 measures a waiting time timer for synchronizing the main control circuit 70 and the sub control circuit 200, and an open time for measuring the opening time of the first big winning device 54 and the second big winning device 53. The process of updating various timers such as the winning device opening time timer is executed. When this process ends, the process moves to S38.

In S38, special symbol control processing is performed. As will be described later in detail, in this process, the main CPU 71 performs a special symbol control process. The main CPU 71 extracts a hit determination random value and a hit symbol determination random value in accordance with the detection signals from the first starting opening winning ball switch 44a and the second starting opening winning ball switch 45a, and stores them in the main ROM 72. The winning determination table is referred to, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery (big hit or small hit) is won, and the result of the determination is stored in the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the process moves to S39.

In S39, normal symbol control processing is performed. As will be described later in detail, in this process, the main CPU 71 normally performs a symbol control process. In this processing, the main CPU 71 extracts a random number value according to the detection signal from the passing ball switch 43a, refers to the normal symbol winning table stored in the main ROM 72, and determines whether or not the normal symbol lottery is won. The determination is performed, and the result of the determination is stored in the main RAM 73. In addition, when the normal symbol lottery is won, the normal electric auditors product 46 is opened, and the game ball easily enters the second starting opening 45. When this process ends, the process moves to S40.

In S40, a symbol display device control process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71, the special symbol display device 61 and the normal symbol display device 62 according to the result of the special symbol control process stored in the main RAM 73 in S38 and S39, and the result of the normal symbol control process. The control signal for driving is stored in the main RAM 73. The main CPU 71 transmits the control signal to the special symbol display device 61. The special symbol display device 61 variably displays and stops the special symbol based on the received control signal. The normal symbol display device 62 variably displays and stops the normal symbol based on the received control signal. When this process ends, the process moves to S41.

In S41, a game information data generation process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of generating data relating to the game information signal to be transmitted to the base computer or the hall computer and storing the data in the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the process moves to S42.

In S42, a symbol reserve number data generation process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 causes the first start-winning prize ball switch 44a, the second start-winning prize ball switch 45a, and the passing ball switch to be detected in the switch input process (FIG. 33, S235) in the timer interrupt process described later. Based on the detection signal from 43a and the update result of the number-of-holds data stored in the main RAM 73, which is updated in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol and the normal symbol, the display of the hold regarding the special symbol and the normal symbol A process of storing a control signal for performing the above in the main RAM 73 is performed. When this process ends, the process moves to S43.

In S43, port output processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs the process of outputting the control signal stored in the main RAM 73 from each port in the above steps. Specifically, it supplies an LED power source (common signal) for lighting the LED, a solenoid power source for driving the first special winning opening solenoid 54b, the second special winning opening solenoid 53b, and the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 46a. When this process ends, the process moves to S44.

In S44, a winning opening related command control process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of controlling a winning opening-related command. When this process ends, the process moves to S45.

In S45, payout processing is performed. In this processing, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the game balls have won the general winning openings 51, 52, the first starting opening 44, the second starting opening 45, the first big winning device 54 and the second big winning device 53. When a check is made and a winning is made, a payout request command corresponding to each is sent to the payout control circuit 300. When this process ends, the process moves to S31.

[Special symbol control processing]
The subroutine (special symbol control process) executed in S38 of FIG. 19 will be described with reference to FIG. 20, numerical values (00H to 10H) described near S52 to S62 indicate control state flags corresponding to those steps, and are stored in a storage area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 73. There is. The main CPU 71 executes one step corresponding to the numerical value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 73, and the special symbol game proceeds.

First, in S51, a process of loading a control state flag is executed. In this process, the main CPU 71 reads the control state flag. When this process ends, the process moves to S52.

In S52 to S62 described below, the main CPU 71 determines whether to execute various processes in each step based on the value of the control state flag. This control state flag indicates the state of the game of the special symbol game, and enables any of the processes in S52 to S62. In addition to that, the main CPU 71 executes the processing in each step at a predetermined timing determined according to a waiting time timer set for each step. Before reaching the predetermined timing, the processing in each step is ended without being executed, and another subroutine is executed. Of course, the system timer interrupt process is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

In S52, a special symbol storage check process is executed. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the process moves to S53.

In S53, special symbol variation time management processing is executed. Although the details of this processing will be described later, in this processing, the main CPU 71, when the control state flag is a value (01H) indicating the special symbol variation time management, and a predetermined variation time has elapsed in the previous special symbol variation. (When the special symbol fluctuation stops changing), the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management is set in the control status flag, and the waiting time after confirmation (for example, 600 ms) is set in the waiting time timer. That is, it is set to execute the process of S54 after the waiting time after confirmation elapses. When this process ends, the process moves to S54.

In S54, a special symbol display time management process is executed. Although the details of this processing will be described later, in this processing, the main CPU 71 hits (big hit) when the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management and the waiting time after determination has elapsed. Or it is a small hit). When it is a small hit, the main CPU 71 sets a value (03H) indicating the small hit start interval management in the control state flag, and sets a time corresponding to the small hit start interval in the waiting time timer. That is, the processing of S55 is set to be executed after the time corresponding to the small hit start interval has elapsed.

Further, in the case of a big hit, the main CPU 71 sets a value (06H) indicating the big hit start interval management in the control state flag, and sets the time corresponding to the big hit start interval in the waiting time timer. That is, the processing of S58 is set to be executed after the time corresponding to the big hit start interval has elapsed.

Further, the main CPU 71 sets a value (10H) indicating the end of the special symbol game when it is not a win. That is, it is set to execute the process of S62.

In S55, a small hit start interval management process is executed. Although the details of this processing will be described later, in this processing, when the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the small hitting start interval management and the time corresponding to the small hitting start interval has elapsed, the main CPU 71 The data for opening the second big winning device 53 read from the main ROM 72 is stored in the main RAM 73. Then, in the process of S43 of FIG. 19, the main CPU 71 reads out the data for opening the second special winning device 53 stored in the main RAM 73, and outputs a signal indicating that the second special winning device 53 is opened. It is supplied to the two major winning prize opening solenoids 53b. In this way, the main CPU 71 and the like control the opening and closing of the second big winning device 53. That is, the "small hitting game state" is executed.

Further, the main CPU 71 sets a value (04H) indicating that the small hit is in the control state flag and sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 1.5 seconds or 1.2 seconds) of the second big winning device 53 to the second. Set the big winning device opening time timer. In addition, it is set to execute the process of S56. When this process ends, the process moves to S56.

In S56, processing during small hit is executed. Although the details of this process will be described later, in this process, the main CPU 71 sets the special winning opening opening process (07H) or the small hit end post-processing (05H) in the control state flag depending on the condition. When this process ends, the process moves to S57.

In S57, post-small hit end processing is executed. Although the details of this processing will be described later, in this processing, after closing the blade member 53a, it is confirmed that there is no game ball that may enter the V winning opening 57 in the second big winning device 53. .. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets the special symbol game end process (10H) in the control state flag. When this process ends, the process moves to S58.

In S58, a big hit start interval management process is executed. Although the details of this processing will be described later, in this processing, the main CPU 71 determines whether the control state flag has a value (06H) indicating the big hit start interval management and the time corresponding to the big hit start interval has passed. The data for opening the first big winning device 54 read from the ROM 72 is stored in the main RAM 73. Then, in the process of S43 of FIG. 19, the main CPU 71 reads the data for opening the first big winning device 54 stored in the main RAM 73, and outputs a signal indicating that the first big winning device 54 is opened. It is supplied to the one-win prize port solenoid 54b. In this way, the main CPU 71 and the like control the opening and closing of the first big winning device 54. That is, the "big hit game state" is executed.

Further, the main CPU 71 sets a value (07H) indicating the special winning opening opening process in the control state flag, and sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 27.996 seconds or 0.102 seconds) in the special winning opening opening time timer. set. That is, it is set to execute the process of S59. When this process ends, the process moves to S59.

In S59, a special winning opening opening process is executed. Although the details of this processing will be described later, in this processing, the main CPU 71 sets the special winning opening winning counter to "10" or more when the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating that the special winning opening is open. And the condition that the opening upper limit time has elapsed (the special winning opening opening time timer is “0”) is satisfied. The main CPU 71 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 73 in order to close the first big winning device 54 when any of the conditions is satisfied. Then, it is determined whether or not the condition that the special winning opening opening counter is equal to or larger than the maximum opening opening maximum value (the final round) is satisfied. The main CPU 71 sets the value (09H) indicating the hit end interval in the control state flag in the case of the final round, and the value (08H) in the case of not the final round indicating the waiting time management before the special winning opening reopening. To the control status flag. When this process ends, the process moves to S60.

In S60, a special winning opening reopening waiting time management process is executed. Although the details of this processing will be described later, in this processing, the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is the value (07H) indicating the special winning opening reopening waiting time management and the time corresponding to the inter-round interval has elapsed. In addition, the special winning opening opening counter is stored and updated so as to be incremented by "1". The main CPU 71 sets a value (07H) indicating that the special winning opening is open in the control state flag. The main CPU 71 sets the opening upper limit time ((eg, 27.996 seconds or 0.102 seconds) to the special winning opening opening time timer. That is, the processing of S59 is set to be executed. When it is finished, the process is transferred to S59.

In S61, a hit end interval process is executed. Although details of this process will be described later, in this process, the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is a value (09H) indicating the hit end interval, and when the time corresponding to the hit end interval has elapsed, the special symbol game. A value (10H) indicating the end is set in the control state flag. That is, the setting of S62 is executed. When this process ends, the process moves to S62.

In S62, special symbol game end processing is executed. Although the details of this processing will be described later, in this processing, the main CPU 71 sets a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check when the control state flag is a value (10H) indicating the end of the special symbol game. .. That is, it is set to execute the process of S52. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

As described above, the special symbol game is executed by setting the control state flag. Specifically, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flags to "00H", "01H", "02H", "10H" in this order when the hit determination result indicates a loss, so that S52 shown in FIG. , S53, S54, and S62 are executed at a predetermined timing.

Further, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flag to "00H", "01H", "02H", "06H" in order when the result of the hit determination is a big hit when the game is not in the big hit or small hit game state. As a result, the processing of S52, S53, S54, and S58 shown in FIG. 20 is executed at a predetermined timing, and control to the jackpot gaming state is executed. Further, when the control to the big hit game state is executed, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flag to "07H" and "08H" in order, thereby performing the processing of S59 and S60 shown in FIG. It will be executed at the timing of, and the jackpot game will be executed. In addition, when the termination condition of the big hit game is satisfied, the processes of S59, S61, and S62 shown in FIG. 20 are executed at a predetermined timing by sequentially setting “07H”, “09H”, and “10H”. The jackpot game is over.

Further, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flag to “00H”, “01H”, “02H”, “03H” in order when the result of the hit determination is a small hit when the game is not the big hit or the small hit game state. By doing so, the processing of S52, S53, S54, and S55 shown in FIG. 20 is executed at a predetermined timing, and control to the small hitting game state is executed. Further, when the control to the small hitting game state is executed, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flag to "04H" to execute the process of S56 shown in FIG. 20 at a predetermined timing, A big hit game will be executed. In addition, when the ending condition of the small hit game is satisfied, by setting "05H" and "10H" in order, the processes of S57 and S62 shown in FIG. 20 are executed at a predetermined timing, and the small hit game is executed. It will end.

By the way, in the special symbol control process, as described above, the process is branched according to the status. Further, although not described in detail, the normal symbol control process similarly branches the process according to the status.

[Special symbol memory check process]
The subroutine (special symbol storage check process) executed in S52 of FIG. 20 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, as shown in FIG. 21, in S71, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the control state flag is the value (00H) indicating the special symbol storage check. When the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is the value indicating the special symbol storage check, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S72. On the other hand, the main CPU 71 ends the present subroutine when it is not determined that the control state flag is the value indicating the special symbol storage check.

In S72, a process for determining the presence/absence of starting memory is performed. Here, the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol is stored as the starting memory in the first special symbol starting storage area (0) of the main RAM 73, and the special symbol game is held four times. Information is stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (1) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4) as starting memory. Similarly for the special symbol game of the second special symbol, when the special symbol game of the second special symbol is held four times, the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the changing second special symbol is the main. The second special symbol starting storage area (0) of the RAM 73 is stored as starting memory, and the information of the four special symbol games held is the second special symbol starting storage area (1) to the second special symbol starting memory. It is stored in the area (4) as starting memory. Therefore, it is possible to hold a maximum of eight times.

In the process of determining the presence or absence of the start memory of S72, the main CPU 71 determines that there is no start memory of the special symbol game, that is, the first special symbol start memory area (0) to the first special symbol start memory area (4 ) Or the second special symbol starting storage area (0) to the second special symbol starting storage area (4) when it is determined that the data is not stored, the process proceeds to S73. On the other hand, if the main CPU 71 determines that there is a start-up memory, it moves the process to S74.

In S73, a demo display process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the demo display permission value in the main RAM 73. Furthermore, the state of starting memory of the special symbol game (the first special symbol starting storage region or the second special symbol starting storage region in which the random number for hit determination is stored) becomes 0 for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) If so, a value that allows execution of the demo display is set as the demo display permission value. Then, the main CPU 71 carries out a process of setting the demo display command data when the demo display permission value is a predetermined value. The demo display command data stored in this manner is supplied from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub control circuit 200 as a demo display command. As a result, in the sub control circuit 200, the demo display is controlled to be displayed in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In S74, a process of determining whether or not the starting memory corresponding to the second special symbol is the earliest hold. In this process, the main CPU 71, the data in the first special symbol starting storage area, and the data in the second special symbol starting storage area, whether the earliest hold is the starting storage corresponding to the second special symbol Determine. If it is determined that the earliest hold is not the starting memory corresponding to the second special symbol, the process proceeds to S75. If it is determined that the earliest hold is the starting memory corresponding to the second special symbol, the process proceeds to S76.

In S75, the main CPU 71 executes a process of setting a value (02H) indicating the fluctuation of the second special symbol as a fluctuation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the process moves to S77.

In S76, the main CPU 71 executes a process of setting a value (01H) indicating a fluctuation of the first special symbol as a fluctuation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the process moves to S77.

In S77, the main CPU 71 executes a process of setting a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management as a control state flag. When this process ends, the process moves to S78.

In S78, special symbol memory transfer processing is executed. In this process, the main CPU 71, when the special symbol to be variably displayed is the first special symbol, each of the data of the first special symbol starting storage area (1) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4), The first special symbol starting storage area (0) shifts (stores) from the first special symbol starting storage area (3) to the process, and the special symbol to be variably displayed is the second special symbol, the second special symbol. Each of the data in the second special symbol starting storage area (4) from the symbol starting storage area (1) is shifted (stored) from the second special symbol starting storage area (0) to the second special symbol starting storage area (3). To execute the process. When this process ends, the process moves to S79.

In S79, a hit determination process is executed. In this process, the main CPU 71 refers to the hit determination table stored in the main ROM 72, and is extracted at the time of winning the start, in the first special symbol starting storage area (0) and the second special symbol starting storage area (0). The random number for hit determination in the special symbol starting storage area set to and the hit determination table are referred to. Then, the main CPU 71 determines that it is a big hit or a small hit when the hit determination random number value and the hit determination value match. That is, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not to make the "big hit game state" and "small hit game state". In addition, when it is not "big hit" and "small hit", it is determined that the game is lost. When this process ends, the process moves to S80.

In S80, the main CPU 71 executes a special symbol determination process. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines a big hit symbol when the result of the hit determination is a big hit, and a small hit symbol when the result of the hit determination is a small hit, and it is neither a big hit nor a small hit. In the case, that is, in the case of losing, the process of determining the losing symbol is performed. The details of the special symbol determination process will be described later. When this process ends, the process moves to S81.

In S81, the main CPU 71 executes a special symbol variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main CPU 71 selects the main variation time determination table for determining the special symbol variation pattern based on the special symbol determined in the process of S80 and the result of the hit determination determined in the process of S79. To do. Specifically, when the big hit is won, the main fluctuation time determination table 2 in FIG. 12 is selected, and in other cases, the main fluctuation time determination table 1 in FIG. 11 is selected. Further, the main CPU 71 determines a variation pattern based on the reach determination random number value extracted from the reach determination random number counter, the effect selection random number value extracted from the effect selection random number counter, and the selected main change time determination table. It is determined and stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The main CPU 71 determines the variable display mode of the special symbol in the special symbol display device 61 based on the data showing such a variation pattern.

The data indicating the variation pattern stored in this way is supplied to the special symbol display device 61. As a result, the special symbol display device 61 is variably displayed in the variation pattern determined by the special symbol. The data indicating the variation pattern stored in this way is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 by the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 as a variation pattern command. The sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 executes the effect display according to the received variation pattern command. When this process ends, the process moves to S82.

In S82, special symbol variation time setting processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets a variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern in the waiting time timer and executes a process of clearing the storage area used for the variation display this time. When this process ends, the process moves to S83.

In S83, the special symbol effect start command is set in the main RAM 73. The special symbol effect start command is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 by the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70. The sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 will start the effect based on the received special symbol effect start command. When this process ends, the process moves to S84.

Then, in S84, the main CPU 71 executes processing for clearing the value of the storage area (0) used for the variable display this time. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[Special symbol determination process]
The subroutine (special symbol determination process) executed in S80 of FIG. 21 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in S91, the main CPU 71 conducts a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit as a result of the hit determination (S79). If it is determined to be a big hit, the process proceeds to S92. If it is not determined that it is a big hit, the process proceeds to S97.

In S92, the main CPU 71 conducts processing to determine whether or not the variation state number is (01H). If it is determined that the fluctuation state number is (01H), the process proceeds to S93. If it is not determined that the variation state number is (01H), the process proceeds to S95.

In S93, a process of determining the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining the big hit symbol of the first special symbol based on the big hit symbol determination random number value extracted from the big hit symbol determination counter and the hit determination table. When this process ends, the process moves to S94.

In S94, the data set of the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the command set of the big hit symbol are performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets the big hit symbol data of the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 and supplies it to the special symbol display device 61. The special symbol display device 61 variably displays the first special symbol and stops and displays it in a mode based on the data of the big hit symbol of the first special symbol. Further, the main CPU 71 sets the command of the big hit symbol of the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73, and supplies it as a special symbol designation command to the sub control circuit 200 by the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70. As a result, by the control of the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200, the identification symbol is derived and displayed in the display area 13a in the big hit stop display mode. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In S95, the process of determining the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining the big hit symbol of the second special symbol, based on the big hit symbol determination random number value extracted from the big hit symbol determination counter and the hit determination table. When this process ends, the process moves to S96.

In S96, the data set of the big hit symbol of the second special symbol and the command set of the big hit symbol are performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets the data of the big hit symbol of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 and supplies it to the special symbol display device 61. The special symbol display device 61 variably displays the second special symbol and stops and displays it in a mode based on the data of the big hit symbol of the second special symbol. Further, the main CPU 71 sets the command of the big hit symbol of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73, and supplies it as a special symbol designation command to the sub control circuit 200 by the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70. As a result, by the control of the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200, the identification symbol is derived and displayed in the display area 13a in the big hit stop display mode. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In S97, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S98 when the result of the hit determination (S79) determines that the hit is a small hit. If it is not determined that it is a small hit, the process proceeds to S100.

In S98, a process for determining the small hit symbol of the second special symbol is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining the small hit symbol of the second special symbol according to the random number value extracted from the small hit symbol determination counter. When this process ends, the process moves to S99. In the first embodiment, it is only the second special symbol that the "small hit" is won.

In S99, the data set of the small hit symbol of the second special symbol and the command set of the small hit symbol are performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets the data of the small hit symbol of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 and supplies it to the special symbol display device 61. Further, the main CPU 71 sets the command of the small hit symbol of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73, and supplies it from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special symbol designation command. .. As a result, under the control of the sub control circuit 200, the identification symbol is derived and displayed in the display area 13a in the small hit stop display mode. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In S100, a data set of lost symbols and a command set of lost symbols are performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets the data of the lost symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 and supplies it to the special symbol display device 61. The special symbol display device 61 variably displays the special symbol and stops and displays it in a mode based on the data of the lost symbol. Further, the main CPU 71 sets a command for a lost symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73, and supplies it as a special symbol designation command from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, under the control of the sub-control circuit 200, the identification symbol is derived and displayed in the display area 13a in the lost stop display mode. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[Special symbol variable time management processing]
The subroutine (special symbol variation time management process) executed in S53 of FIG. 20 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in S101, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management, and is determined to be a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management. If yes, the process moves to S102, and if it is not determined that the value is the special symbol variation time management value (01H), this subroutine is terminated.

In S102, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the waiting time timer is "0", and when determining that the waiting time timer is "0", shifts the processing to S103. When it is not determined that the waiting time timer is “0”, this subroutine is finished.

In S103, a process of setting a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management as a control state flag is executed. In this process, the main CPU 71 carries out a process of setting (storing) a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management in the control state flag. When this process ends, the process moves to S104.

In S104, a symbol stop command is set. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting (storing) the symbol stop command data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. Then, the symbol stop command data is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 by the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70, so that the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the symbol stop. When this process ends, the process moves to S105.

In S105, after the confirmation, a process of setting a waiting time timer as a waiting time is executed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of storing the post-determination wait time in an area of the main RAM 73 that functions as a wait time timer. The waiting time may be about 100 ms. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[Special symbol display time management process]
The subroutine (special symbol display time management process) executed in S54 of FIG. 20 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in S111, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process. When it is determined that the control state flag is the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the process proceeds to S112. When it is not determined that the control state flag is the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, this subroutine is ended.

In S112, the main CPU 71 determines whether the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is “0” when the control state flag is the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process. judge. When the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S113. If the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", this subroutine is finished.

In S113, the main CPU 71 conducts a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit. If it is a big hit, the process moves to S119. If it is not a big hit, the process proceeds to S114.

In S114, the main CPU 71 conducts a process of determining whether or not it is a small hit. If it is a small hit, the process proceeds to S115. If not a small hit, the process proceeds to S124.

In S115, the main CPU 71 executes a process of setting a value (03H) indicating the small hit start interval management process in the control state flag of the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the process moves to S116.

In S116, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit start interval time corresponding to the small hit in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The waiting time may be 5000 ms, for example. When this process ends, the process moves to S117.

In S117, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a special symbol effect stop command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. This special symbol production stop command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 by the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70, so that the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the special symbol production stop. When this process ends, the process moves to S118.

In S118, the main CPU 71 carries out a process of setting a small hit start command corresponding to the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. In this process, the small hit start command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 by the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70, so that the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the big hit or the small hit start. .. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In S119, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (06H) indicating the big hit start interval management process in the control state flag of the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the process moves to S120.

In S120, the main CPU 71 performs processing for turning off (clearing) the time saving flag of the main RAM 73. In the "big hit game state", the "time saving game" is not performed. On the other hand, it does not clear the counter for the number of consecutive hours saved. When this process ends, the process moves to S121.

In S121, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value of a waiting time timer as a big hit start interval time corresponding to a special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The waiting time may be 5000 ms, for example. When this process ends, the process moves to S122.

In S122, the main CPU 71 executes a process of setting a special symbol effect stop command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. This special symbol production stop command is determined by referring to the opening pattern table shown in FIG. 8D, and is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 by the control of the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70, thereby the sub control circuit. The sub CPU 201 of 200 comes to recognize the stop of the special symbol effect. When this process ends, the process moves to S123.

In S123, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a jackpot start command corresponding to a special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. In this process, the big hit start command is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 by the control of the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70, so that the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the big hit start. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In S124, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (10H) indicating the special symbol game end process in a predetermined area which is a control state flag in the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the process moves to S125.

In S125, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a special symbol effect stop command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. This special symbol production stop command is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 by the control of the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70, so that the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the special symbol production stop. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[Small hit start interval management processing]
The subroutine (small hitting start interval management process) executed in S55 of FIG. 20 will be described with reference to FIG.
In the following description, the "special winning opening opening number counter" in S133, S134, S144, S145 is a "big winning opening opening number counter" used at the time of a small hit, and S151, S173, S174, S178, S187, The "special winning opening opening number counter" in S203 is a "special winning opening opening counter" used at the time of a big hit.

First, in S131, the main CPU 71 executes a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the small hit start interval management process. When it is determined that the control state flag is the value (03H) indicating the small hit start interval management process, the process proceeds to S132. When it is not determined that the control state flag is the value (03H) indicating the small hit start interval management processing, this subroutine is ended.

In S132, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the small hit start interval management processing is “0”, that is, whether the small hit start interval time has been exhausted. When the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S133. If the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", this subroutine is finished.

In S133, a process of setting the special winning opening opening number upper limit value related to the opening number of the second special winning device 53 in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 is performed. In the first embodiment, the upper limit value is limited to 3 (see FIG. 8D). When this process ends, the process moves to S134.

In S134, the main CPU 71 increments the special winning opening opening counter by one. When this process ends, the process moves to S135.

In S135, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting an opening/closing pattern for each number of times of opening corresponding to the type of the small hit symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 according to the opening pattern table shown in FIG. 8D. In the first embodiment, the opening time for each opening number is set in the same way. When this process ends, the process moves to S136.

In S136, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting the special winning opening open display command data for the second special winning device 53 in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The special winning opening opening display command data is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 as a special winning opening opening display command by the control of the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70. When this process ends, the process moves to S137.

In S137, the main CPU 71 carries out a process of setting a value (04H) indicating the small hit medium process in the control state flag of the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the process moves to S138.

In S138, the main CPU 71 performs processing for clearing the special winning opening winning counter regarding the number of winnings of the second special winning apparatus 53. When this process ends, the process moves to S139.

In S139, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer in the predetermined area of the main RAM 73 for the opening time of the second big winning device 53. The waiting time may be 1200 ms or 1500 ms, for example. When this process ends, the process moves to S140.

In S140, with respect to the operation of the movable member 57a of the V winning opening 57, the main CPU 71 sets a movable member operating flag, which indicates whether or not the movable member 57a is in an open state, in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. Perform processing. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[Processing during small hits]
The subroutine (process during small hit) executed in S56 of FIG. 20 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in S141, the main CPU 71 executes a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the process during small hit. If it is determined that the control state flag is the value (04H) indicating the small hitting process, the process proceeds to S142. When it is not determined that the control state flag is the value (04H) indicating the small hitting process, this subroutine is finished.

In S142, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening counter of the second special winning device 53 is 4 or more. Here, there is a possibility that four gaming balls will enter and the special winning opening counter will count 4 or more before the second special winning device 53 is opened four times. That is, as in one round in the case of a big hit, when the second big winning device 53 is opened once, the number of game balls entering the big winning opening counted by the big winning counter is determined. Different from each other, the total number of game balls that enter the special winning opening counted by the special winning counter is determined regardless of the number of times the second special winning device 53 is opened for one small win. When the special winning opening counter is 4 or more, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S148. If the special winning opening counter is not 4 or more, the process proceeds to S143.

In S143, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the small hit medium processing is "0". That is, it is determined whether or not the waiting time timer has become 0 and the opening time or the closing time of the second special winning device 53 has come to an end. When the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S144. When the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the processing is moved to S147.

In S144, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the special winning opening opening number counter is equal to or larger than the special winning opening opening upper limit value set in S133. That is, in the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening opening counter has reached the opening number of three times of the second special winning device 53 set in S133. When the special winning opening opening number counter is equal to or larger than the special winning opening opening upper limit value, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S148. When the special winning opening opening number counter is not greater than or equal to the special winning opening opening upper limit value, the process proceeds to S145.

In S145, the main CPU 71 adds 1 to the special winning opening opening counter if it is closed this time. That is, when the special winning opening opening number counter is not greater than or equal to the maximum winning opening upper limit value, the "small hitting game state" is continued, and the second big winning apparatus 53 which is in the closed state is later opened and then reopened. In order to determine the number of times the second special winning opening 53 of the special winning opening opening counter is opened, 1 is added to the special opening opening counter. When this process ends, the process moves to S146.

In S146, the main CPU 71 sets the next opening/closing mode data and opening/closing timer in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. That is, the opening/closing mode data and the opening/closing timer of the second big winning device 53 which are in the open state or the closed state again are set here. When this process ends, the process moves to S147.

In S147, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not there is a V winning flag related to winning in the V winning opening 57. When the V winning flag is present, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S150. If there is no V winning flag, this subroutine is finished.

In S148, when the main CPU 71 determines in S142 that the special winning counter of the second special winning apparatus 53 is 4 or more, or in S144, the special winning opening opening counter is set to the special winning opening set in S133. If it is determined that the number of times of release is equal to or more than the upper limit value, the waiting time timer corresponding to the small hitting process is cleared. When this process ends, the process moves to S149.

In S149, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not there is a V winning flag. When the V winning flag is present, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S150. When there is no V winning flag, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S156.

In S150, the main CPU 71 sets the special winning opening opening process (07H) in the control state flag. That is, in S149, when the main CPU 71 determines that there is a V winning flag, the preparation for the "big hit game" starting from "V win" has been started. When this process ends, the process moves to S151.

In S151, the process of setting the special winning opening opening number counter to 2 is performed. As described above, in this process, the "big hit game" started from the "V hit" is the opening of the second big winning device to be inserted into the V winning opening 57 for the first round, and the "big hit game" thereafter. Is a process that occurs when the opening of the second big winning device becomes the second round. When this process ends, the process moves to S152.
In S152, the main CPU 71 carries out a process of setting a special winning opening opening counter upper limit value for the first special winning device 54 of the main RAM 73. In this case, the special winning opening opening counter upper limit value is set to "2" or "16" depending on the winning content of the small hit that triggered the V hit. When this process ends, the process moves to S153.

In S153, the main CPU 71 executes the process of setting the value of the timer in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 as the start interval time per V. It should be noted that this time may be the same as the inter-round interval, for example, 5000 ms. When this process ends, the process moves to S154.

In S154, the main CPU 71 executes processing for turning off the V winning flag. When this process ends, the process moves to S155.

In S155, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting the V hit start command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In S156, the main CPU 71 carries out a process of setting a value (05H) indicating the post-small hit completion process in the control state flag of the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the process moves to S157.

In S157, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a timer value in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 as the remaining ball monitoring time at the end of the small hit. This time may be 5000 ms, for example. This process is necessary to perform a process of confirming that there is no game ball that may enter the V winning opening 57 in the second big winning device 53 after closing the blade member 53a. is there. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[Post-processing after small hits]
The subroutine (process after the small hit end) executed in S57 of FIG. 20 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in S161, the main CPU 71 conducts processing to determine whether or not the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating post-small hit completion processing. When it is determined that the control state flag is the value (05H) indicating the process after the completion of the small hit, the process proceeds to S162. When it is not determined that the control state flag is the value (05H) indicating the post-small hit end processing, this subroutine is ended.

In S162, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the small ball end time remaining ball monitoring time timer is "0". That is, it is determined whether or not the residual monitoring time at the end of the small hit has been consumed. When the value of the timer is "0", the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S164. When the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the processing is moved to S163.

In S163, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not there is a V winning flag. Whether or not there is a V winning flag is determined at this timing, and even if a fraudulent act such that the V winning flag is intentionally made is performed at timings other than these, the determination of the V winning flag is not performed. Not done When the V winning flag is present, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S150 of FIG. If there is no V winning flag, this subroutine is finished.

In S164, the main CPU 71 executes processing for setting a small hit command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the process moves to S165.

In S165, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (10H) indicating the special symbol game end process in the control state flag of the main RAM 73. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[Big hit start interval management processing]
The subroutine (big hit start interval management process) executed in S58 of FIG. 20 will be described with reference to FIG.

In the jackpot start interval management process, as shown in FIG. 28, in S171, the main CPU 71 executes a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (06H) indicating the jackpot start interval management process. When it is determined that the control state flag is the value (06H) indicating the big hit start interval management process, the process proceeds to S172. When it is not determined that the control state flag is the value (06H) indicating the big hit start interval management process, this subroutine is ended.

In S172, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the big hit start interval management processing is “0” when the control state flag is the value (06H) indicating the big hit start interval management processing. To do. Further, the main CPU 71 proceeds to the processing of S173 when the value of the waiting time timer is "0", and ends the present subroutine when the value of the waiting time timer is not "0".

In S173, the main CPU 71 carries out a process of setting a special winning opening opening counter upper limit value for the first special winning device 54 of the main RAM 73. In the first embodiment, since the "big hit game" by the special symbol is all 5 rounds, the special winning opening opening counter upper limit value is set to "5". When this process ends, the process moves to S174.

In S174, the main CPU 71 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the special winning opening opening counter of the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the process moves to S175.

In S175, the main CPU 60 refers to the open pattern table of FIG. 8D and performs a process of setting an opening/closing pattern for each round according to the type of the big hit symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. In the first embodiment, the opening/closing pattern is set differently according to the type of the big hit symbol, and as the opening/closing pattern, two patterns of the special winning opening opening time of 27.996 seconds or 0.102 seconds are set. However, the opening and closing patterns for each round are the same and are set the same. When this process ends, the process moves to S176.

In S176, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting (storing) the special winning opening open display command data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The special winning opening open display command is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 under the control of the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70. When this process ends, the process moves to S177.

In S177, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (07H) indicating a special winning opening opening process in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 73, as a control state flag. When this process ends, the process moves to S178.

In S178, the main CPU 71 performs processing for clearing the special winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the process moves to S179.

In S179, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the special winning opening opening time in the main RAM 73. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[Prize winning opening processing]
The subroutine (special winning opening opening process) executed in S59 of FIG. 20 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 29, in the special winning opening opening process, in S181, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state flag has a value (07H) indicating the special winning opening opening process. If it is determined that the control state flag is the value (07H) indicating the special winning opening opening process, the process proceeds to S182. When it is not determined that the control state flag is the value (07H) indicating the special winning opening opening process, this subroutine is ended.

In S182, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening winning counter is "10" or more. In this process, if the main CPU 71 determines that the special winning opening winning counter is "10" or more, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S185, and does not determine that the special winning opening winning counter is "10" or more. If so, the process proceeds to S183.

In S183, the special winning opening opening/closing processing according to the opening/closing pattern for each set round is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of opening and closing the first big winning device 54 according to the opening/closing pattern for each round set in S175. Specifically, according to the opening/closing pattern for each round, the process of waiting for time and closing and opening the first big winning device 54 is performed. When this process ends, the process moves to S184.

In S184, it is determined whether or not the waiting time timer as the special winning opening opening time timer is "0". When the main CPU 71 determines that the waiting time timer in the predetermined area functioning as the special winning opening opening time timer in the main RAM 73 is “0”, the process proceeds to S185, and the waiting time timer is “0”. If it is not determined that this subroutine is finished. That is, when it is determined that the special winning opening winning counter is “10” or more, or when it is determined that the special winning opening opening time timer is “0”, the processing is moved to S185, and the special winning opening winning counter is If it is not determined that is greater than or equal to "10", and if it is not determined that the special winning opening opening time timer is "0", this subroutine is ended.

In S186, processing for setting the special winning opening closing data is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 updates the variable located in the main RAM 73 based on the data read from the main ROM 72 in order to close the special winning opening. The variable stored in this manner causes the first special winning opening solenoid 54b to be closed by the processing in S43 of FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S187.

In S187, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening opening number counter is equal to or larger than the special winning opening opening upper limit value. In this process, the main CPU 71 compares the special winning opening opening number counter stored in the main RAM 73 with the special winning opening opening number upper limit value or more, and the special winning opening opening number counter sets the big winning opening opening upper limit value. It is determined whether or not the above. When it determines with it being more than the maximum winning opening number upper limit value, a process is moved to S191, and when it is not determined that it is more than a maximum winning port opening number upper limit value, a process is moved to S188.

In S188, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer in the main RAM 73 as the inter-round interval time and the remaining ball monitoring time. When this process ends, the process moves to S189.

In S189, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (08H) indicating the special winning opening pre-reopening waiting time management process in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 73 as a control state flag. When this process ends, the process moves to S190.

In S190, the main CPU 71 carries out a process of setting the inter-round display command data in the main RAM 73. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In S191, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting a waiting time timer as a jackpot end interval time and a remaining time monitoring time in the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the process moves to S192.

In S192, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (09H) indicating the big hit end interval process in the control state flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 that functions as a control state flag. When this process ends, the process moves to S193.

In S193, the main CPU 71 carries out a process of setting the special symbol per interval end display command data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[Waiting time before re-opening the big winning a prize management processing]
The subroutine executed in S60 of FIG. 20 (the special winning opening pre-opening waiting time management process) will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 30, in the main winning opening pre-reopening waiting time management processing, in S201, the main CPU 71 determines whether the control state flag is a value (08H) indicating the special winning opening pre-reopening waiting time management processing. The process of determining whether or not is performed. If it is determined that the control state flag is the value (08H) indicating the waiting time before pre-reopening big winning opening management process, the process proceeds to S202. When it is not determined that the control state flag is the value (08H) indicating the waiting time before big winning opening reopening management processing, this subroutine is ended.

In S202, the main CPU 71 determines whether the value of the waiting time timer as the inter-round interval time is "0" when the control state flag is the value (08H) indicating the waiting time management processing before the special winning opening reopening. Determine whether or not. Further, the main CPU 71 proceeds to the processing of S203 when the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, and ends the present subroutine when the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”.

In S203, the main CPU 71 performs a process of adding 1 to the special winning opening opening counter of the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the process moves to S204.

In S204, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting (storing) the special winning opening open display command data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. In this case, the special winning opening open display command data is data indicating the second and subsequent rounds. The special winning opening opening display command data is supplied from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special winning opening opening display command. The special winning opening open display command includes an instruction to the sub CPU 201 to perform a round counter +1. When this process ends, the process moves to S205.

In S205, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (07H) indicating a special winning opening opening process in a control region flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 that functions as a control state flag. When this process ends, the process moves to S206.

In S206, the main CPU 71 performs processing for clearing the special winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the process moves to S207.

In S207, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a waiting time timer as the special winning opening opening time in the main RAM 73. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[Big hit end interval processing]
The subroutine (big hit end interval process) executed in S61 of FIG. 20 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in S211, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 73 is a value (09H) indicating the big hit end interval process. When it is determined that the control state flag is the value (09H) indicating the big hit end interval process, the process proceeds to S212. When it is not determined that the control state flag is the value (09H) indicating the big hit end interval process, this subroutine is ended.

In S212, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the hit end interval is “0” when the control state flag of the main RAM 73 is the value (09H) indicating the big hit end interval process. To do. That is, it is determined whether the jackpot end interval time has been exhausted and the value of the waiting time timer has become "0". Further, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S213 when the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, and ends the present subroutine when the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”.

In S213, the main CPU 71 sets a value (10H) indicating the end of the special symbol game in the main RAM 73 in the control state flag. When this process ends, the process moves to S214.

In S214, the main CPU 71 determines whether it is a time saving win. The main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S215 in the case of the short-time winning. If it is not a short-time winning, the process proceeds to S219.

In S215, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the time-saving continuous counter is 0. If the time-saving continuous counter is 0, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S216. If the time-saving continuous counter is not 0, the process proceeds to S217. The time-saving continuous counter is provided to count the number of "time-saving game states" during the set game. When the time saving continuous counter is 0, for example, it indicates a "big hit" from the "normal game state", that is, a so-called "first hit", and the "time saving game" is not yet performed in the set game, and thereafter. , Indicates that the first "time saving game" will be played.

In S216, the main CPU 71 sets the "time saving game state" and sets the time saving continuous counter to 1. Further, 0 is set in the hour/hour counter. The time saving counter is for counting the number of "time saving games", and it is possible to perform "time saving games" up to 100 times in the "time saving game state". When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In S217, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the time-saving continuous counter is 4. That is, the "big hit" including the "first win" is performed four times, and during the set game, it is determined whether or not the third "time saving game state". When the time-saving continuous counter is 4, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S219. If the time saving continuous counter is not 4, the process proceeds to S218.

In S218, the main CPU 71 sets the "time saving game state" and adds 1 to the time saving continuous counter. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In S219, the main CPU 71 sets the "normal game state". When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[Special symbol game end processing]
The subroutine (special symbol game ending process) executed in S62 of FIG. 20 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in S221, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 73 is the value (10H) indicating the special symbol game ending process. When it is determined that the control state flag is the value (10H) indicating the special symbol game ending process, the process proceeds to S222. When it is not determined that the control state flag is not the value (10H) indicating the special symbol game ending process, this subroutine is ended.

In S222, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not there is a V winning flag. If the V winning flag is present, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S223. If there is no V winning flag, the process proceeds to S224.

In S223, the V winning flag is turned off. When this process ends, the process moves to S224.

In S224, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the hour/hour counter is 1 or more. When the hour/hour counter is 1 or more, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S225. When the hour/hour counter is not 1 or more, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S228. After the "big hit" from the "normal game state", 0 is set in the hour/hour counter in S216, so in S224, the hour/hour counter counts 0 times in the "hour/hour game", so S228. Transfer processing to.

In S225, the main CPU 71 increments the hour/hour counter by 1. When this process ends, the process moves to S226.

In S226, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the hour/hour counter is 100 or more. When determining that the hour/hour counter is 100 or more, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S227. When determining that the hour/hour counter is not 100 or more, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S228. In S226, for example, when it is determined that the hour/hour counter is 100 or more, and the "V hit" is not reached during 100 times of this "hour saving game", the processing is moved to S227.

In S227, the hour/hour counter and the hour/hour continuous counter are cleared, and the hour/hour flag is turned off (cleared). When this process ends, the process moves to S228.

In S228, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check as a control state flag in the main RAM 73. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[System timer interrupt processing]
The main CPU 71 may interrupt the main processing and execute the system timer interrupt processing even when the main processing is being executed. The system timer interrupt process will be described below with reference to FIG.

In S231, register saving processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of saving the register. When this process ends, the process moves to S232.

In S232, a timer update process is performed. When this process ends, the process moves to S233.

In S233, processing for setting clear data in the watchdog output data is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets clear data to the watchdog output data. Further, the main CPU 71 transmits a control signal based on the watchdog output data to the initial reset circuit 75 (see FIG. 7). The initial reset circuit 75 releases the voltage of the capacitor based on the received control signal. After the watchdog timer provided in the initial reset circuit 75 is cleared, a predetermined time (for example, 3100 msec) determined by the capacitance of the capacitor connected to the initial reset circuit 75 elapses, and then the main CPU 71 moves from the initial reset circuit 75. A system reset signal is output to. When the system reset signal is input from the initial reset circuit 75, the main CPU 71 enters the system reset state. When this process ends, the process moves to S234.

In S234, a random number update process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of updating the random number. For example, the main CPU 71 updates random numbers such as a big hit determination random number counter, a reach determination random number counter, a normal symbol determination random number counter, and an effect selection random number counter. Note that the big hit determination random number counter and the reach determination random number counter become unfair when the update timing of the counter value is indefinite. Therefore, in order to ensure this, at a fixed timing every 2 msec. I am trying to update. When this process ends, the process moves to S235.

In S235, switch input processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not there is an input to the switch. For example, the main CPU 71, the count switch 54c and the count switch 53c provided in the first big winning device 54 and the second big winning device 53, the general winning ball switches 51a, 52a provided in the general winning openings 51, 52, and the like. , A passing ball switch 43a provided in the ball passing detector 43, a first starting entrance winning ball switch 44a and a second starting entrance winning ball switch 45a provided in the first starting opening 44 and the second starting opening 45, By receiving the detection signal from the V winning opening winning ball switch 57c provided in the V winning opening 57, it is determined whether or not each switch detects the game ball. If the main CPU 71 determines that it has been detected, it updates the special winning opening prize ball counter, the general winning opening prize ball counter, the starting opening prize ball counter, the V prize ball counter, or the like in accordance with the detection. Details of the switch input process will be described later. When this process ends, the process moves to S236.

In S236, movable member control processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 controls the movable member 57a. Details of this control will be described later. When this process ends, the process moves to S237.

In S237, register restoration processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of restoring the register to the address before the interrupt process. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[Switch input processing]
The switch input processing of S235 shown in FIG. 33 will be described with reference to FIG.

In S241, prize ball-related switch check processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the count switches 54c, 53c, the general winning award ball switches 51a, 52a, the first starting mouth winning award ball switch 44a, and the second starting mouth award winning ball switch 45a are input, in other words, the game ball It is determined whether or not is detected. When the main CPU 71 determines that the count switches 54c and 53c are input, it performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the special winning opening prize ball counter, and the general winning ball switches 51a and 52a are input. If it is determined, the process of adding 1 to the value of the general winning award winning ball counter is performed, and if it is determined that the first starting winning award ball switch 44a and the second starting award winning ball switch 45a are input, A process of adding 1 to the value of the starting mouth prize ball counter is performed. When this process ends, the process moves to S242.

In S242, special symbol related switch check processing is performed. The special symbol related switch check processing will be described later. When this process ends, the process moves to S243.

In S243, normal symbol related switch check processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the passing ball switch 43a has been input, in other words, whether or not a game ball has been detected, and if it is determined that the input has been made, the number of reserves is the upper limit (for example, (4 pieces), and if it is determined to be the upper limit, this subroutine is ended. When it is not determined to be the upper limit, the random number for hit determination is extracted from the random number counter for determining hit of the normal symbol game, and the random number value for hit symbol determination is further extracted from the random symbol for hit symbol determination, in the main RAM 73. Processing for storing in the normal symbol storage area is performed. If this process ends, if this process ends, the process moves to S244.

In S244, V switch check processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the V winning opening winning ball switch 57c has been input, in other words, whether or not a game ball has been detected. If it is determined that the input has been made, the main CPU 71 sets the V winning flag. Perform processing to turn it on. When this process ends, in the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag is ON only during the "small hit", and at other times, even if the V winning flag is ON. The special symbol game ending process 00H (see FIG. 20) is cleared. When this process ends, the process moves to S245.

In S245, abnormality related switch check processing is performed. In this processing, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not there is an abnormality in the abnormality-related switch, for example, whether or not it is detected that the open/close switch of the glass door 11 is opened and the glass door 11 is opened. Further, for example, it is determined whether or not the signal from the count switch 54c is detected in the state where the signal that the first big winning device 54 is operating is not transmitted. If an abnormality is detected, a process for notifying the abnormality is performed, and if no abnormality is detected, this subroutine is finished as it is.

[Special symbol related switch check processing]
The special symbol related switch check processing of S242 shown in FIG. 34 will be described with reference to FIG.

In S251, a process of determining whether or not the start winning for the first start opening 44 is detected is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not there is an input from the first starting opening winning ball switch 44a. If it is determined that the first starting opening winning ball switch 44a has been input, the process proceeds to S252. If it is not determined that the first starting opening winning ball switch 44a has been input, the process proceeds to S257.

In S252, processing for determining whether or not the starting memory of the first special symbol is 4 or more is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the starting storage of the first special symbol, that is, the number of holdings is 4 or more. If it is determined that the number of reservations is 4 or more, the present subroutine is terminated, and if it is determined that the number of reservations is not 4 or more, the process proceeds to S253.

In S253, a process of adding 1 to the starting memory of the first special symbol is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the reserved number of the first special symbol stored in the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the process moves to S254.

In S254, various random number value acquisition processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 extracts the big hit determination random number value of the special symbol game from the big hit determination random number counter (so-called special symbol lottery), and further extracts the reach determination random number value from the reach determination random number counter. A process for extracting a random number value for effect selection from the random number counter for effect selection and storing it in the first special symbol starting storage area of the main RAM 73 is performed. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol starting storage area is the first special symbol starting storage area (0) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4), and the first special symbol starting storage area (0). The determination result based on the random number for hit determination stored in is derived and displayed by the special symbol, and various random number values obtained by starting winning during the fluctuation of the special symbol are the first special symbol starting storage area (1). ~ First special symbol starting storage area (4) is stored in order. When this process ends, the process moves to S255.

In S255, winning effect determination processing is performed. In this processing, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not to perform a winning effect based on a random number lottery. When this process ends, the process moves to S256.

In S256, the main CPU 71 sets the first starting opening winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The first start-winning command is supplied to the sub-control circuit 200 under the control of the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70, so that the sub-control circuit 200 receives the first start-winning prize and whether or not the winning lottery result is won. Become aware of. The data of the first starting opening winning command includes data for executing a winning effect, for example, changing the display mode of the reserved ball displayed in the effect, when it is determined that the winning effect is achieved in the process of S255. .. As a result, it is possible to perform a so-called “pre-reading effect”, which is a well-known technique in which an effect is executed based on the start storage information before the variation execution. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In S257, processing for determining whether or not a start winning into the second start opening 45 is detected is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not there is an input from the second starting opening winning ball switch 45a. When it is determined that the second starting opening winning ball switch 45a has been input, the process proceeds to S258, and when it is not determined that the second starting opening winning ball switch 45a has been input, this subroutine ends.

In S258, processing for determining whether or not the starting memory of the second special symbol is 4 or more is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the starting storage of the second special symbol, that is, the number of holdings is 4 or more. If it is determined that the number of holdings is 4 or more, the present subroutine is ended, and if it is determined that the number of holdings is not 4 or more, the process proceeds to S259.

In S259, a process of adding 1 to the starting memory of the second special symbol is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the reserved number of the second special symbol stored in the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the process of S260 is moved.

In S260, various random number values are acquired. In this process, the main CPU 71 extracts a random number for jackpot determination of the special symbol game from the jackpot determination random number counter (so-called special symbol lottery), and further extracts a reach determination random number value from the reach determination random number counter. A process for extracting a random number value for effect selection from the random number counter for effect selection and storing it in the second special symbol starting storage area of the main RAM 73 is performed. In the present embodiment, the second special symbol starting storage area is the second special symbol starting storage area (0) to the second special symbol starting storage area (4), and the second special symbol starting storage area (0). The determination result based on the big hit determination random number stored in, is derived and displayed by the special symbol, various random number values obtained by starting winning during the fluctuation of the special symbol, the second special symbol starting storage area (1) ~ It is sequentially stored in the second special symbol starting storage area (4). When this process ends, the process moves to S261.

In S261, winning effect determination processing is performed. In this processing, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not to perform a winning effect. When it is determined that the winning effect is achieved, winning effect command data for executing an effect such as changing the display mode of the reserved ball displayed for effect is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The winning effect command data is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 as a winning effect command by the control of the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70, so that the auxiliary control circuit 200 recognizes the content of the winning effect. As a result, a so-called “pre-reading effect”, such as performing an effect based on the start storage information before the variation execution, becomes possible. When this process ends, the process moves to S262.

In S262, the main CPU 71 sets the second starting opening winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The second start opening winning command is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 by the control of the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 200 receives the second starting opening winning and the winning lottery result. Become aware of. The data of the second start opening winning command includes data for executing a winning effect, for example, changing the display mode of the reserved ball displayed as an effect when it is determined that the winning effect is achieved in the process of S261. .. As a result, a so-called “pre-reading effect”, such as performing an effect based on the start storage information before the variation execution, becomes possible. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

Although not shown in the present embodiment, various commands set in the main RAM 73 of the main control circuit 70 are supplied to the sub control circuit 200 in each process of the main control circuit 70.

[Movable member control processing]
The movable member control process of S236 shown in FIG. 33 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in S271, the main CPU 71 conducts a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the process during small hit. When it is determined that the control state flag is the value (04H) indicating the small hitting process, the process proceeds to S272. When it is not determined that the control state flag is the value (04H) indicating the small hitting process, the process proceeds to S274.

In S272, a process of determining whether or not there is a moving flag indicating that the movable member 57a is operating is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 ends the present subroutine if it is determined that there is a moving flag, and moves the process to S273 if it is determined that there is no moving flag.

In S273, the movable member 57a is started to operate, and the process of turning on the moving flag is performed. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In S274, the main CPU 71 conducts processing to determine whether or not the control state flag has a value (05H) indicating post-small hit completion processing. When it is determined that the control state flag is the value (05H) indicating the process after the completion of the small hit, the process proceeds to S275. When it is not determined that the control state flag is the value (05H) indicating the process after the end of the small hit, the process proceeds to S277.

In S275, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the small ball end remaining ball monitoring time is zero. When determining that the remaining ball monitoring time at the end of the small hit is 0, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S276. When it is determined that the remaining ball monitoring time at the end of the small hit is not 0, this subroutine is ended. In the first embodiment, the remaining ball monitoring time at the end of the small hit is 5000 msec, and the “V winning” is valid until 5000 msec elapses, and thus the movable member is also movable.

In S276, the main CPU 71 stops the operation of the movable member 57a and turns off the moving flag. When this process ends, this subroutine ends. In the first embodiment, when the residual ball monitoring time at the end of small hit 5000 msec elapses, the moving flag is turned off and the "small hit game state" ends.

In S277, the main CPU 71 executes a process of determining whether or not the control state flag has a value (07H) indicating the special winning opening opening process. If it is determined that the control state flag is the value (07H) indicating the special winning opening opening process, the process proceeds to S278. When it is not determined that the control state flag is the value (07H) indicating the special winning opening opening process, this subroutine is ended.

In S278, the main CPU 71 conducts processing to determine whether or not there is a moving flag. In this process, the main CPU 71 ends the present subroutine if it is determined that there is no moving flag, and moves the process to S279 if it is determined that there is a moving flag. When the "V prize" is given in the "small hit", the moving flag is on, so the processing is shifted to S279, and when it is simply the "big hit", this subroutine is finished.

In S279, the main CPU 71 stops the operation of the movable member 57a and turns off the moving flag. That is, in the "big hit game", the movable member 57a does not need to operate. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[Explanation of operation of sub control circuit]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Sub-control main processing]
The sub-control main processing will be described with reference to FIG. The sub control circuit 200 receives various commands from the main control circuit 70 and performs various processing such as display processing. Among these processes, the control process according to the present invention will be described below.

In step S1011 initialization processing is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of initialization setting in response to power-on. For example, the power ON flag is turned on. When this process ends, the process moves to S1012. This initialization processing can also be performed according to the on/off operation of the power supply.

In S1012, random number update processing is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of updating the random number stored in the work RAM 203. When this process ends, the process moves to S1013.

In S1013, command analysis processing is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of analyzing a command received from the main control circuit 70 and stored in the reception buffer of the work RAM 210. This processing will be described later. When this process ends, the process moves to S1014.

In S1014, effect control processing is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs control of production of a mini game using the production button 23 and the like. Moreover, you may perform the pre-reading hold production|generation control etc. regarding a reserve ball by what is called a pre-reading production mentioned above. When this process ends, the process moves to S1014.

In S1015, display control processing is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 transmits data for displaying on the liquid crystal display device 13 to the display control circuit 205. In the display control circuit 205, VDP (not shown) is various image data such as identification pattern data, background image data, and effect image data based on the data for displaying the effect image under the control of the sub CPU 201. Is read out from the image data ROM, and is superimposed and displayed on the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13. When this process ends, the process moves to S1016.

In S1016, sound/lamp control processing is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 executes a voice control process for controlling a sound generated from the speaker 11 and a lamp control process for controlling light emission of various lamps (not shown). When this process ends, the process moves to the random number update process (S1012) again.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Even when the sub-control main process shown in FIG. 37 is being executed, the sub-control main process may be interrupted and the timer interrupt process may be executed. The timer interrupt processing will be described below with reference to FIG.

In S1021, the process of saving the register is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of saving the value used in the program being executed stored in each register (storage area). When this process ends, the process moves to S1022.

In S1022, timer updating processing is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of updating the timer stored in the work RAM 210. Specifically, a process for updating a timer for round effects or the like is performed. When this process ends, the process moves to S1023.

In S1023, effect button switch input detection processing is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of detecting whether or not the effect button switch 23a is operated by operating the effect button 23. For example, the operation of the effect button 23 for selecting a character during the big hit game is detected. When this process ends, the process moves to S1024. Although the effect button switch input detection process is executed in the timer interrupt process, other interrupts may be used. The navigation lottery pattern may be changed depending on the selected character. For example, the average number of navigation provided may be changed depending on the selected character.

In S1024, a process of restoring the register is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of restoring the value saved in S1021 to each register. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[Command interrupt processing]
Even in the state where the sub-control main processing shown in FIG. 37 is being executed, the sub-control main processing may be interrupted and the command interrupt processing may be executed. The command interruption process will be described below with reference to FIG.

In S1031, a process of saving the register is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of saving the value used in the program being executed stored in each register (storage area). When this process ends, the process moves to S1032.

In step S1032, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for storing the received command in the buffer. When this process ends, the process moves to S1033.

In S1033, a process of restoring the register is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of restoring the value saved in S1031 to each register. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[Command analysis processing]
The subroutine (command analysis process) executed in S1013 of FIG. 37 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41.

In S1041, a process of determining whether or not a command has been received is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the received command is stored in a predetermined buffer, and if it is determined that there is a received command, the process proceeds to S1042, and the sub CPU 201 determines that there is a received command. If not, this subroutine is finished.

In S1042, processing is performed to determine whether the received command is a special symbol effect start command. In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that it is the special symbol effect start command, it moves the process to S1043, and if it is not determined to be the special symbol effect start command, it moves the process to S1044.

In S1043, the sub CPU201 performs a special symbol effect start command reception process. The special symbol effect start command includes data regarding a game state, a variation pattern, a special symbol, a short remaining time, a so-called navigation lottery, and the like. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In S1044, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the received command is a symbol stop command. If it is determined to be the symbol stop command, the process proceeds to S1045, and if not to be the special symbol effect stop command, the process proceeds to S1046.

In S1045, the sub CPU 201 performs a symbol stop command reception process. For example, processing such as stopping the decorative symbol in synchronization with the stop of the special symbol by the control of the main control circuit 70 is performed. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In S1046, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether the received command is a big hit start command. If it is determined that it is a big hit start command, the process proceeds to S1047, and if it is not determined that it is a big hit start command, the process proceeds to S1048.

In S1047, the sub CPU 201 performs a big hit start command reception process. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In S1047, for example, a big game start command is received, and a mini game or the like involving the operation of the effect button 23 by the player is executed before the "big hit game" is started. Details will be described later.

In S1048, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether the received command is a small hit start command. If it is determined that the command is a small hit start command, the process proceeds to S1049. If it is not determined that the command is a small hit start command, the process proceeds to S1050.

In S1049, the sub CPU 201 performs processing upon receipt of a small hit start command. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In S1050, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether the received command is a V hit start command. If it is determined that the command is a V hit start command, the process proceeds to step S1051, and if it is not determined that the command is a V hit start command, the process proceeds to step S1052.

In step S1051, the sub CPU 201 performs a process for receiving a V hit start command. In step S1051, for example, a subtraction process of the navigation by executing the navigation is performed. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In S1052, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether the received command is a small hit end command. If it is determined that it is a small hit end command, the process proceeds to S1053, and if it is not determined that it is a small hit end command, the process proceeds to S1054.

In S1053, the sub CPU 201 performs processing upon receipt of a small hit end command. In S1053, for example, an effect depending on whether or not the result when the navigation effect is executed is “V hit” is performed. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In S1054, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether the received command is a special winning opening open display command. If it is determined that the command is for displaying the special winning opening, the process proceeds to S1055, and if it is not determined to be the command for displaying the special winning opening, the process proceeds to S1056.

In S1055, the sub CPU 201 executes a special winning opening open display command reception process. In S1055, for example, a process of displaying the result of the mini game displayed in S1047 or the like is performed. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In S1056, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether the received command is an inter-round display command. If it is determined that the command is an inter-round display command, the process proceeds to S1057, and if it is not determined that the command is an inter-round display command, the process proceeds to S1058.

In step S1057, the sub CPU 201 performs processing during a round-to-round display command reception. The round-to-round display command includes data regarding effects and the like between rounds. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In S1058, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether the received command is a special symbol per interval end display command. If it is determined that it is a special symbol per interval end display command, the process proceeds to S1059, and if it is not determined to be a special symbol per interval end display command, the process proceeds to S1060.

In S1059, the sub CPU 201 performs a special symbol per interval end display command reception process. In S1059, a process such as so-called navigation lottery is performed when the "time saving game state" in the set game reaches a predetermined number of times. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In step S1060, the sub CPU 201 performs processing when receiving another command. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[Processing when special symbol production start command is received]
The subroutine (process at the time of receiving the special symbol effect start command) executed in S1043 of FIG. 40 will be described with reference to FIG.

In S1061, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the gaming state is the "normal gaming state" or the "time saving gaming state". The "normal game state" means a "normal game state (sub-state)" other than the "first high probability state", "second high probability state", "third high probability state" and "fourth high probability state". )”. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the gaming state is the "normal gaming state" or the "time saving gaming state", the processing is moved to S1062. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the gaming state is the “normal gaming state” or the “time saving gaming state”, the process proceeds to S1063.

In S1062, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining an effect in the "normal game state" or the "time saving game state". Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In S1063, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the gaming state is the “first high probability state”. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the game state is the “first high probability state”, the process is moved to S1064. That is, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the first high probability state flag is turned on, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1064. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the gaming state is the “first high probability state”, the process proceeds to S1065.

In S1064, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining the first high probability state effect. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In S1065, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the game state is the “second high probability state”. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the game state is the “second high probability state”, the process is moved to S1066. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the gaming state is the “second high probability state”, the process proceeds to S1067.

In S1066, the sub CPU 201 performs the process of determining the second high probability state effect. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In S1067, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the game state is the “third high probability state”. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the game state is the “third high probability state”, the process is moved to S1068. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the game state is the “third high probability state”, the process proceeds to S1069.

In S1068, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining the third high probability state effect. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In S1069, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining the effect during the fourth high-probability state. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[Normal game state (sub) mid/time saving effect determination process]
The subroutine (normal game state (sub) during/time saving effect determination process) executed in S1062 of FIG. 42 will be described with reference to FIG. The "normal game state" means a "normal game state (sub-state)" other than the "first high-probability state", "second high-probability state", "third high-probability state" and "fourth high-probability state". )”.

In S1071, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the lottery result is lost. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11, when the variation pattern command is "83H00H" to "83H06H", there is a loss. Note that among them, the variation pattern commands “83H02H” to “83H04H” are lost reach. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the lottery result is a loss, the process proceeds to S1072. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the lottery result is a loss, the process is moved to S1084.

In S1072, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining a stop symbol and effect contents based on the variation pattern command. When this process ends, the process moves to S1073.

In S1073, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the above point addition effect is executed as described above with reference to FIG. If the sub CPU 201 determines to execute the point addition effect, the process proceeds to S1074. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine to execute the point addition effect, the process proceeds to S1077.

In step S1074, the sub CPU 201 adds points to a predetermined area of the work RAM 203. When this process ends, the process moves to S1075.

In S1075, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the accumulated points are 100 points or more. The sub CPU 201 checks the points accumulated in a predetermined area of the work RAM 203 to make a determination. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the number of points is 100 points or more, the process proceeds to step S1076. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the points are 100 points or more, the process proceeds to S1077.

In S1076, the sub CPU 201 sets the first high probability flag and clears the accumulated points. Therefore, when the next game is played, the state is shifted to the "first high probability state". When this process ends, the process moves to S1077.

In S1077, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not to execute the navigation acquisition effect. When the sub CPU 201 determines to execute the navigation acquisition effect, the process is moved to S1078. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine to execute the navigation acquisition effect, the process proceeds to S1079. Here, as described above, when the lost super reach B of the navigation acquisition effect content shown in FIG. 11 is selected, in the “first high probability state”, there is a lottery in which navigation is given with a probability of 1/10. Therefore, when the loss super reach B is selected and it is determined that the navigation is given, the sub CPU 201 determines to execute the navigation acquisition effect in S1077.

In S1078, the sub CPU 201 sets the navigation acquisition effect by adding 1 to the number of navigation times (pieces) stored in the predetermined area of the work RAM 203. When this process ends, the process moves to S1079.

In S1079, the sub CPU 201 increments the game number counter by 1. The game number counter is for counting the number of times the special symbols are variably displayed (the number of special symbol games). When this process ends, the process moves to S1080.

In S1080, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of special symbol games counted as a reference for executing the ceiling lottery is a predetermined number of games for performing ceiling lottery as shown in FIG. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the number of special symbol games is the number of times the ceiling lottery is performed, the process is moved to S1081. In addition, when the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the number of special symbol games is the number of times the ceiling lottery is performed, this subroutine is ended.

In S1081, the sub CPU 201 executes ceiling lottery processing. Specifically, the ceiling lottery is executed based on the ceiling lottery table shown in FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S1082.

In S1082, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the ceiling lottery executed in S1081 has been won. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the ceiling lottery is won, the process is moved to S1083. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the ceiling lottery is won, this subroutine is finished.

In S1083, the sub CPU 201 sets the third high-probability state flag, and clears the number of special symbol games that have been counted as a reference for executing the ceiling lottery. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In S1084, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the lottery result is “small hit”. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11, when the variation pattern command is “83H07H” to “83H14H”, it is a “small hit”. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the lottery result is “small hit”, the process is moved to S1085. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the lottery result is a loss, the process proceeds to S1094.

In S1085, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is during the time saving (“time saving game state”). When the sub CPU 201 determines that it is in the “time saving game state”, the process is moved to S1087. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that it is in the “time saving game state”, the process proceeds to S1086.

In S1086, the sub CPU 201 sets a special effect. In this case, since the player has won the "small hit" even though it is not in the "time saving game state", the so-called revival effect described above may be performed. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In S1087, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the navigation suppression flag is off and the stored number of times of navigation is 1 or more. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the navigation suppression flag is off and the stored number of times of navigation is 1 or more, the processing is moved to S1089. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the navigation suppression flag is off and the stored number of times of navigation is 1 or more, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1088.

Here, the navigation suppression flag is a flag that is set when there is a possibility that the player is performing a so-called "strategy hit". Specifically, as described above, the probability of entering the V winning opening 57 when entering the second big winning device 53 is about 2/3. Further, in the first embodiment, the nails are arranged so that the winning rate to the second big winning device 53 is about 1/3 in the case of normal right-handing, and the probability of "per V" is about. It is 1/4.5. Therefore, it can be said that the expectation level of "per V" is 99.9% while the "time saving game" is played 50 times. Among the skilled players, there is also a person who performs a "strategy hit" that operates the firing handle 25 so as not to win the game ball in the second big winning device 53 but to win the game ball in the second starting opening 45. There is. By this "hit", a prize ball for winning the ball passing detector 43 can be obtained, and the number of game balls on hand can be increased. In order to suppress such a strategy hit, the navigation suppression flag is set when the "time saving game" after the 50th time is performed. When the navigation suppression flag is set, the navigation may be suppressed by not executing the navigation even if the navigation is added or by subtracting the number of times of the navigation. Further, instead of performing the navigation, it is also possible to perform an effect that urges the user to stop the “strategy strike”.

In S1088, the sub CPU 201 sets an effect corresponding to the case where there is no navigation. As an effect corresponding to the case where there is no navigation, for example, a common effect different from the navigation may be stored in the program ROM 202. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In S1089, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving game is 50 times. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the time saving game is 50 times, the process proceeds to S1090. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the time saving game is 50 times, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1091. Here, the possibility that the “time-saving game” will not be performed 50 times without performing the above-mentioned “strategy hit” is extremely low, so the above determination is made in S1089.
In addition, even if you are not an expert, you can win 50 times or more because the special map type is consecutively won in the small hit (2)-3 or the small hit (2)-4 with navigation. In some cases, it may not be possible, and in this case, in order to avoid ending the "time saving game state" without "V hit", if the "V hit" is not performed 50 times or more, the navigation is suppressed. There is. At this time, it is determined whether or not the navigation is provided, and the number of wins of the small hit (2)-1 or the small hit (2)-2 during that period is confirmed. For example, the number of wins is 10 or less. In the case of hitting, it is possible to judge that the "V hit" has not been achieved despite firing according to the navigation instead of the hitting, and not to give the penalty for judging the hitting. Here, as the penalty, for example, it is sufficient to delete all the accumulated navigation times. It should be noted that this criterion may be designed arbitrarily. On the contrary, when the number of winnings of the small hit (2)-1 or the small hit (2)-2 is more than 10, it is determined that the walk-through is performed and the penalty is given. Good.

In S1090, the sub CPU 201 sets the navigation suppression flag and sets the effect corresponding to the case where there is no navigation. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In S1091, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the special drawing type is a small hit (2)-1 or a small hit (2)-2. When determining that the special drawing type is the small hit (2)-1 or the small hit (2)-2, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1092. In addition, when the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special drawing type is the small hit (2)-1 or the small hit (2)-2, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1093.

In S1092, the sub CPU 201 sets the launch navigation effect. The launch navigation effect is an effect that prompts the player to shoot a game ball. The contents of this effect will be described later (see FIG. 55). It should be noted that, when performing this launch navigation effect, if it is "per V", the counted number of navigations is subtracted. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In S1093, the sub CPU 201 sets the firing suppression navigation effect. The emission suppression navigation effect is an effect that causes the player to suppress the emission of the game ball. The contents of this effect will be described later (see FIG. 56). When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In S1094, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special drawing type is the special drawing (2)-1. When determining that the special drawing type is the special drawing (2)-1, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1095. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that it is the special figure (2)-1, the process proceeds to S1096.

In S1095, the sub CPU 201 sets an effect depending on whether or not the "time saving game state". For example, a so-called revival effect may be set if it is not the "time saving game state". Further, if it is a "time saving game state", a special effect that is not a revival effect may be set. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In S1096, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is during the time saving (“time saving game state”). Specifically, when the sub CPU 201 determines that it is in the "time saving game state", the process is moved to S1097. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that it is in the “time saving game state”, the process proceeds to S1098.

In S1097, the sub CPU 201 sets effects corresponding to the special figure types (1)-1 to (1)-12. Note that, in this effect, as shown in FIG. 12, the variation pattern commands correspond to “83H29H” to “83H40H”. Since this effect is related to the big hit during the time saving, it may be an effect indicating that it is irregular. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In S1098, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special drawing type is the special drawing (1)-1. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the variation pattern command is “83H15H”. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the special drawing type is the special drawing (1)-1, the processing is moved to S1099. When the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special drawing type is the special drawing (1)-1, the processing is moved to S1100.

In S1099, the sub CPU 201 determines that the decorative symbol is “777”, adds 3 to the number of times of navigation, and sets the premium reach effect. Although the number of times of navigating is increased by 3 in the first embodiment, for example, all navi flag may be set. In the set game, it is possible to turn off the navigation flag until the "time saving game" reaches a predetermined number of times so that the number of times of navigation does not increase more than necessary. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In S1100, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special drawing type is the special drawing (1)-2. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the variation pattern command is “83H16H” to “83H18H”. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of "short time with payout". When the sub CPU 201 determines that the special drawing type is the special drawing (1)-2, the processing is moved to S1101. When the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special drawing type is the special drawing (1)-2, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1102.

In S1101, the sub CPU 201 determines the reach content and the decorative design by lottery according to the variation pattern command, and sets the effect. With reference to the big hit time navigation lottery table shown in FIG. 16, the big hit time navigation lottery is performed according to the character selected by the player. The timing of this navigation lottery will be described later. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In S1102, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special figure type is special figure (1)-3 to special figure (1)-7. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the variation pattern command is “83H19H” to “83H23H”. In other words, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of "no payout time reduction". When the sub CPU 201 determines that the special drawing types are special drawing (1)-3 to special drawing (1)-7, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1103. In addition, when the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special drawing types are the special drawing (1)-3 to the special drawing (1)-7, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1104.

In S1103, the sub CPU 201 determines the reach content and the decorative design by lottery according to the variation pattern command, and sets the effect. For example, an effect is set to notify that the player is in the "time saving game state" at any timing. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In S1104, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special drawing type is special drawing (1)-8 to special drawing (1)-11. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the variation pattern command is “83H24H” to “83H27H”. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a "normal without payout" jackpot. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the special drawing type is special drawing (1)-8 to special drawing (1)-11, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1105. In addition, when the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special drawing type is the special drawing (1)-8 to the special drawing (1)-11, that is, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the special drawing is the special drawing (1)-12, the process proceeds to S1106. Transfer.

In S1105, the sub CPU 201 determines the reach content and the decorative design by lottery in accordance with the variation pattern command, and sets the effect. Further, the first high probability state flag is set. For example, it is set so as to display the effect contents for notifying the shift from the "normal game state" to the "first high probability state". When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In S1106, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a RAM clear flag. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the RAM clear flag is present, the process proceeds to step S1109. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the RAM clear flag is set, the process proceeds to S1107. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the RAM clear flag is present, the sub CPU 201 carries out a lottery with a probability of 1/2 and moves the processing to S1109 only when the winning is won, and moves the processing to S1107 when not winning. It may be that. This makes the transition to the “fourth high probability state” more difficult. Further, the RAM clear flag may be turned off when the process of S1106 is performed.
When the power ON flag is used as the condition for the transition to the “fourth high probability state” instead of the RAM clear flag as described above, the sub CPU 201 determines in S1106 whether or not the power ON flag is present. You can do that.

In S1107, the sub CPU 201 performs a lottery process (fourth high probability state transition lottery) for shifting to the above-mentioned "fourth high probability state". For example, the winning probability may be 1/10. When this process ends, the process moves to S1108.

In S1108, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the lottery for shifting to the “fourth high probability state” has been won. If the sub CPU 201 determines that it has won, it moves the process to S1109. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that it has won, it moves the process to S1110.

In S1109, the sub CPU 201 sets the fourth high-probability state flag and sets an effect indicating that the lottery for shifting to the “fourth high-probability state” has been won. For example, an image giving a "all day navigation ticket" may be displayed. The fourth high-probability state transition lottery may not be performed. That is, only when the special figure (1)-12 is won while the RAM clear flag is set, the "high fourth probability state" may be entered. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In S1110, the sub CPU 201 sets an effect indicating that the lottery for shifting to the “fourth high probability state” has not been won. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[First high-probability state effect determination process]
The subroutine (first high-probability state effect determination process) executed in S1064 of FIG. 42 will be described with reference to FIG.

In S1121, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the lottery result is a loss. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the lottery result is a loss, the process proceeds to S1122. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the lottery result is a loss, the process proceeds to S1126.

In S1122, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining a stop symbol and effect contents based on the variation pattern command. In the "first high probability state", unlike the "normal game state" and the "second high probability state", no points are added. When this process ends, the process moves to S1123.

In S1123, the sub CPU 201 adds 1 to the first high probability medium game count. The first high-probability medium game count, which is the number of games in the “first high-probability state”, is stored in the work RAM 203. When this process ends, the process moves to S1124.

In S1124, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the first high-probability medium game count is 20. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the first high-probability medium game count is 20, the process proceeds to S1125. When the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the first high-probability medium game count is 20, the present subroutine is terminated. In the first embodiment, when the game in the "first high probability state" is 20 times, the game is set to shift to the "second high probability state", but the present invention is not limited to this. When the number of games in the "first high probability state" reaches 20, the "first high probability state" may fall into the "normal game state" to perform a falling lottery.

In S1125, the sub CPU 201 sets the first high-probability state end effect and sets the second high-probability state flag. As a result, after the "first high-probability state" is completed, the "second high-probability state" is established. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In S1126, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the special drawing type is the special drawing (1)-1 or the special drawing (1)-2. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of "short time with payout". When the sub CPU 201 determines that the special drawing type is the special drawing (1)-1 or the special drawing (1)-2, the process is moved to S1127. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special drawing type is the special drawing (1)-1 or the special drawing (1)-2, the process proceeds to S1128. Here, the special figure (2) does not change. In addition, when it is determined that it is the special map (1)-1 or the special map (1)-2, the "big hit game state" is entered, and then the "time saving game state" is entered, but the time saving in the "time saving game state" When the game has been played a predetermined number of times (100 times), the "normal game state" is entered.

In S1127, the sub CPU 201 determines that the decorative symbol is “777” corresponding to the special figure (1)-1 or the special figure (1)-2, adds 3 to the number of times of navigation, and 3 times in the set game. Both sets the production as a complete navigation where the navigation production is performed for all. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In S1128, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special drawing type is special drawing (1)-3 to special drawing (1)-7. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of "time out without payout". When the sub CPU 201 determines that the special drawing types are special drawing (1)-3 to special drawing (1)-7, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1129. When the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special drawing types are special drawing (1)-3 to special drawing (1)-7, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1130.

In S1129, the sub CPU 201 adds 3 to the number of times of navigation, and sets a special effect as all navigation described above. At this time, since there is no big hit, a performance that does not suggest a "big hit" is performed. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In S1130, the sub CPU 201 sets the first high-probability state continuation effect and clears the first high-probability medium game count. In other words, if the special figure types are special figures (1)-8 to (1)-12, that is, if the hit is a normal with no coins, the "first high probability state" is set again. Further, as the effect in this case, the content suggesting that the "first high probability state" is continued is displayed. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[Determination process during second high probability state]
The subroutine (second high probability state effect determination process) executed in S1066 of FIG. 42 will be described with reference to FIG. 47.

In S1141, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the lottery result is lost. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the lottery result is lost, the process is moved to S1142. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the lottery result is a loss, the process proceeds to S1149.

In S1142, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining a stop symbol and effect contents based on the variation pattern command. When this process ends, the process moves to S1143.

In step S1143, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for adding points. This point addition is performed by referring to the point addition table shown in FIG. 14A and adding points according to the selected variation pattern. Further, in the “second high probability state”, if the lottery result in S1141 is lost, points are always added. When this process ends, the process moves to S1144.

In S1144, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the accumulated points are 100 points or more. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the number of points is 100 points or more, the process proceeds to S1145. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the points are 100 points or more, the process is moved to S1146.

In S1145, the sub CPU 201 sets the first high probability state flag and turns off the second high probability state flag. In addition, clear the points. When this process ends, this subroutine ends. Here, in the first embodiment, the points are cleared, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, "-100" may be added without clearing the points to leave points of "0" or more. It is possible.

In S1146, the sub CPU 201 adds 1 to the second high probability medium game count. The second high-probability medium game count, which is the number of games in the “second high-probability state”, is stored in the work RAM 203. When this process ends, the process moves to S1147.

In S1147, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of games in the second high probability medium game is 10. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the number of games in the second high-probability medium game is 10, the process proceeds to S1148. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the number of games in the second high-probability middle game is 10, this subroutine is finished.

In S1148, the sub CPU 201 sets the second high-probability state end effect and turns off the second high-probability state flag. When this process ends, this subroutine ends. As a result, after the "second high probability state" ends, the "first high probability state" is entered.

In S1149, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special drawing types are special drawing (1)-1 to special drawing (1)-7. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit with time saving. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the special drawing types are special drawing (1)-1 to special drawing (1)-7, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1150. This subroutine ends. Further, when the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special figure types are special figure (1)-1 to special figure (1)-7, that is, the special figure (1)-8 to special figure (1)-12. In step S1151, the process proceeds to step S1151. In addition, in the case of special figure (1)-12, the process may be moved to S1107.

In S1150, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining a stop symbol and effect contents based on the variation pattern command. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In S1151, the sub CPU 201 sets the first high-probability state entry effect, and sets the first high-probability state flag. Specifically, the effect may be such that the transition to the first high probability state can be recognized. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[3rd high-probability state effect determination process]
A subroutine (third high probability state effect determination process) executed in S1068 of FIG. 42 will be described with reference to FIG.

In S1161, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the lottery result is lost. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the lottery result is a loss, the process proceeds to S1162. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the lottery result is a loss, the process proceeds to S1163.

In S1162, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining a stop symbol and effect contents based on the variation pattern command. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In S1163, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the special drawing type is special drawing (1)-1 or special drawing (1)-2. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of "short time with payout". When the sub CPU 201 determines that the special drawing type is the special drawing (1)-1 or the special drawing (1)-2, the processing is moved to S1164. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special drawing type is the special drawing (1)-1 or the special drawing (1)-2, the process proceeds to S1166. The special figure (2) does not change.

In S1164, the sub CPU 201 determines that the decorative pattern is “777”, adds 3 to the number of times of navigation, and sets an effect. When this process ends, the process moves to S1165.

In S1165, the sub CPU 201 turns off the third high-probability state flag. This subroutine ends. In this way, in the case of a big hit with "time saving", it becomes a full-navigation state of navigating in the game at all times in the set game. On the other hand, the ceiling state will end.

In S1166, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special drawing type is special drawing (1)-3 to special drawing (1)-7. In other words, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of "no payout time reduction". When the sub CPU 201 determines that the special figure types are special figure (1)-3 to special figure (1)-7, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1167. Further, when the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special figure type is the special figure (1)-3 to the special figure (1)-7, the special figure type is the special figure (1)-8 to the special figure (1). It is determined to be −12, and the process proceeds to S1169.

In S1167, the sub CPU 201 adds 3 to the number of times of navigation and sets a special effect. When this process ends, the process moves to S1168.

In S1168, the sub CPU 201 turns off the third high probability state flag. This subroutine ends. Also in this case, when the jackpot with the "time saving" is achieved, the navigation state in which navigation is performed in all the time saving games in the set game is performed, while the ceiling state is ended. The ceiling state may be ended only when the special drawing type is special drawing (1)-1 or special drawing (1)-2.

In S1169, the sub CPU 201 sets the third high-probability state continuous effect. Here, it is determined that the jackpot has no "time saving", and the ceiling state is not ended. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[Fourth Probability State Medium Performance Determination Process]
The subroutine (fourth high probability state effect determination process) executed in S1069 of FIG. 42 will be described with reference to FIG. 49.

In S1171, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the lottery result is lost. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the lottery result is a loss, the process proceeds to S1172. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the lottery result is a loss, the process proceeds to S1173.

In S1172, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining a stop symbol and effect contents based on the variation pattern command. When this process ends, this subroutine ends. The "fourth high probability state" is cleared by performing initialization processing such as RAM clear or power OFF. Other than that, it will not be cleared.

In S1173, the sub CPU201 determines whether the special drawing type is the special drawing (1)-1 or the special drawing (1)-2. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of "short time with a ball". When the sub CPU 201 determines that the special drawing type is the special drawing (1)-1 or the special drawing (1)-2, the processing is moved to S1174. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special drawing type is the special drawing (1)-1 or the special drawing (1)-2, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1175. Note that the special figure (2) does not change here.

In S1174, the sub CPU 201 determines that the decorative pattern is “777”, adds 3 to the number of times of navigation, and sets the effect. That is, a big hit with "time saving" results in so-called all navigation, and this state does not end. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In S1175, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special drawing type is special drawing (1)-3 to special drawing (1)-7. In other words, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of "no payout time reduction". When the sub CPU 201 determines that the special drawing types are special drawing (1)-3 to special drawing (1)-7, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1176. When the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special drawing types are special drawing (1)-3 to special drawing (1)-7, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1177.

In S1176, the sub CPU 201 adds 3 to the number of times of navigation and sets a special effect. Again, the entire navigation state does not end. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In S1177, the sub CPU 201 sets the fourth high-probability state continuous effect. In this way, in the case of a big hit without "time saving", the "fourth high probability state" does not end. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[Processing when big hit start command is received]
The subroutine (process at the time of receiving the big hit start command) executed in S1047 of FIG. 40 will be described with reference to FIG.

In S1181, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the gaming state is a hit in the “normal gaming state” or the “second high probability state”. Here, it is determined whether it is a big hit for all navigation. Here, the "normal game state" is, as described above, a "first high-probability state", a "second high-probability state", a "third high-probability state", and a "fourth high-probability state". "Normal game state (sub)". When the sub CPU 201 determines that the gaming state is a "normal gaming state" or a "second high probability state", the process is moved to S1182. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the gaming state is a hit in the “normal gaming state” or the “second high probability state”, the sub CPU 201 determines that it is a hit for all navigations and moves the process to S1190.

In S1182, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hit is a hit given after shortening of time. When the sub CPU 201 determines that it is a hit to which time saving is given, the process is moved to S1183. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that it is a hit to which time saving is given, the process proceeds to S1189.

In S1183, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of obtaining a random number value for navigation lottery. When this process ends, the process moves to S1184.

In S1184, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hit is a "winning ball" hit. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure (1)-1 or the special figure (1)-2. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hit is a "winning coin" hit, the process is moved to S1185. Further, when the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the hit is “with a payout”, the process is moved to S1186.

In S1185, the sub CPU 201 sets an effect corresponding to the character selected by the player using the effect button 23. If no character is selected, an effect corresponding to the initially set character is set. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In S1186, the sub CPU 201 performs a process for executing a navigation lottery for obtaining a random number value, using a payout time saving navigator lottery table as shown in FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S1187.

In S1187, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of adding the number of times of navigation based on the result of the navigation lottery. When this process ends, the process moves to S1188.

In S1188, the sub CPU 201 sets an effect based on the number of remaining navigations. For example, it may be an effect that draws an oracle for which the number of remaining navigations is written. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In S1189, the sub CPU 201 sets an effect indicating that there is no time saving. For example, it may be a notification effect that draws an omikuji that describes the content that suggests the transition to the “first high probability state”. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In S1190, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a big hit during the time saving. Here, the big hit during the time saving includes the "V hit" from the 5 round big hit according to the special figure (1) and the special figure (2), or the small hit according to the special figure (2). Since the V hit start command described later is transmitted, the big hit start command is not transmitted. Even in the case of V hit, a big hit start command may be transmitted instead of the V hit start command. In that case, it is desirable to include data indicating how the big hit has occurred in the big hit start command so that the big hit history can be specified on the sub-board. Therefore, when the sub CPU 201 determines that it is a big jackpot of five rounds according to the special figure (1) and the special figure (2), the sub CPU201 shifts the processing to S1191. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that it is the big hit in the “normal game state” and the big hit in time saving, the process is moved to S1192.

In S1191, the sub CPU 201 sets a time saving medium-sized big hit effect. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In S1192, the sub CPU 201 sets a big hit effect indicating that all navigations have been decided. Here, all navigation means executing navigation in all "time saving game states" during the set game, as described above. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[Process per V start command reception]
A subroutine (process upon reception of V start command) executed in S1051 of FIG. 40 will be described with reference to FIG.

In S1201, the sub CPU 201 sets a V hit time effect. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 sets an effect that is performed when the game ball wins the V winning opening 57 and becomes “V hit”. For example, a fanfare image may be displayed.

In S1202, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the navigation is executed. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the navigation has been executed, the processing is moved to S1203. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the navigation has been executed, the process proceeds to S1207.

In step S1203, the sub CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the navigation count. When this process ends, the process moves to S1204.

In S1204, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special drawing type is a small win (2)-1 or a small win (2)-2 as a trigger and a V prize is won. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the special drawing type is the V prize with the small hit (2)-1 or the small hit (2)-2 as a trigger, that is, the "V hit", the process proceeds to S1205. Transfer. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special drawing type has won a V with the small hit (2)-1 or the small hit (2)-2 as a trigger, that is, does not determine that the "V hit", S1206. Transfer processing to.

In S1205, the sub CPU 201 sets a winning success effect. Specifically, the success effect is an effect performed when the 16R "big hit" is won by performing a firing operation according to the navigation. For example, an effect as shown in FIG. 55 described later may be performed. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In S1206, the sub CPU 201 sets the avoidance failure effect. Specifically, the avoidance failure effect is an effect performed when the 2R “big hit” is won by performing a firing operation that does not follow the navigation. For example, an effect as shown in FIG. 56 described later may be performed. When this process ends, the process moves to S1207.

In S1207, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special figure type is a small win (2)-3 or a small win (2)-4 as a trigger and a V prize is won. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the special drawing type has won V with the small hit (2)-3 or small hit (2)-4 as a trigger, that is, "V hit", the process proceeds to S1208. Transfer. In addition, when the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special drawing type has won V with the small hit (2)-3 or the small hit (2)-4 as a trigger, that is, when it is not determined to be “V hit”, Finish the subroutine.

In S1208, the sub CPU 201 adds 1 to the number of times per 2R. In addition, the number of times per 2R is the number of times of winning the "big hit game" in two rounds. When this process ends, the process moves to S1209.

In S1209, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of 2R hits is 3, out of 3 hits excluding the so-called initial hit in the hit during the set game. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the number of times per 2R is 3, the process proceeds to S1210. When the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the number of 2R hits is 3, the present subroutine ends.

In S1210, the sub CPU 201 adds 1 to the number of times of navigation and clears the number of times per 2R. When this process ends, this subroutine ends. In the first embodiment, it is possible to set the winning failure effect in S1205 and the avoidance successful effect in S1206. Of course, it is possible to additionally set these effects.

[Processing when small hit end command is received]
The subroutine (process upon receipt of the small hit end command) executed in S1053 of FIG. 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

In S1221, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the launch navigation effect has been executed. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the launch navigation effect has been executed, the process is transferred to S1222. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the shooting navigation effect has been executed, the process proceeds to S1223.

In S1222, the sub CPU201 sets a winning failure effect. The winning failure effect is an effect executed when “V hit” does not occur even though the launch navigation effect has been executed. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In S1223, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the firing suppression navigation effect has been executed. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the emission suppression navigation effect has been executed, the process is moved to S1224. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the emission suppression navigation effect has been executed, the process proceeds to S1225.

In S1224, the sub CPU 201 sets the avoidance success effect. The avoidance success effect is an effect executed when “V hit” is not performed when the firing suppression navigation effect is executed. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In S1225, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of notifying the result when the V winning opening 57 is temporarily won. For example, if the player has won the V winning opening 57 and has won the "big hit game" in two rounds, a notification indicating that the player is good may be given. Further, for example, if the player has won the V winning opening 57 and has won the 16-round "big hit game", the player will be notified that it is unfortunate. Good. When this process ends, this subroutine ends. It is possible to set the winning success effect in S1222 and the avoidance failure effect in S1224, and it is also possible to additionally set these effects.

Therefore, when the launch navigation effect or the launch suppression effect set as advantageous information for the player is displayed, depending on whether or not "V hit", as a result display, "winning success effect", "winning failure" The corresponding effect among the "effect", "avoidance successful effect", and "avoidance failure effect" is displayed.

[Processing when the special prize opening display command is received]
The subroutine executed in S1055 of FIG. 41 (process upon receipt of the special winning opening open display command) will be described with reference to FIG.

In S1231, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special drawing type is the special drawing (1)-2. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the special drawing type is the special drawing (1)-2, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1232. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special drawing type is the special drawing (1)-2, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1239.

In S1232, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a big hit in the “normal game state” or the “second high probability state”. In addition, the "normal game state" here means a "normal game state (sub-game state)" other than the "first high-probability state", "second high-probability state", "third high-probability state" and "fourth high-probability state". )”. When the sub CPU 201 determines that it is a big hit in the “normal game state” or the “second high probability state”, the process is moved to S1233. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that it is a big hit in the “normal game state” or the “second high probability state”, the process proceeds to S1239.

In S1233, the sub CPU201 determines whether or not the first round of "big hit game" is executed. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the first round of the “big hit game” is being executed, the processing is moved to S1234. When the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the first round of the “big hit game” is being executed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1236.

In S1234, the sub CPU 201 uses the big hit navigation lottery table shown in FIG. 16 to perform the big hit navigation lottery based on the selected character and the navigation lottery random number. When this process ends, the process moves to S1235.

In S1235, the sub CPU 201 sets an effect based on the lottery result. When this process ends, this subroutine ends. Here, for example, when navigation is added in the navigation lottery, an effect such that the selected character wins in the competitive game or the like is set. Such an effect does not necessarily have to be performed in the first round, and can be set to be performed in any round.

In S1236, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a round to notify the lottery result. When the sub CPU 201 determines that it is a round for notifying the lottery result, the process is moved to S1237. In the first embodiment, the number of rounds for notifying the lottery result is 5, but the number is not limited to 5 and may be another round. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that it is the round for notifying the lottery result, the sub CPU 201 moves the process to S1238.

In S1237, the sub CPU 201 sets the lottery result notification effect. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In S1238, the sub CPU 201 executes the effect according to the effect set. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In S1239, similarly to S1238, the sub CPU 201 executes an effect according to the effect set. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[Processing when special symbol per interval end command is received]
The subroutine executed in S1059 of FIG. 41 (processing at the time of receiving the special symbol per interval end command) will be described with reference to FIG.

In S1241, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the “big hit” is won during the time saving. If the sub CPU 201 determines that it is a “big hit” that is won during the time saving, it shifts the processing to S1242. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the “big hit” is won during the time saving, the process proceeds to S1249.

In S1242, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is the last "time saving game state" during the set game. When the sub CPU 201 determines that it is the last "time saving game state" during the set game, the process is moved to S1243. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that it is the last "time saving game state" during the set game, the process proceeds to S1246.

In S1243, the sub CPU 201 uses the set game end navigation lottery table shown in FIG. 17 to perform a navigation lottery according to the number of “big hits” in the special symbol game during the set game. When this process ends, the process moves to S1244.

In S1244, the sub CPU 201 sets an effect based on the lottery result. When this process ends, the process moves to S1245.
In S1245, the sub CPU 201 sets the game state to be transferred after the end of the set game. Specifically, if the game state before shifting to the set game is "first high probability state" to "third high probability state" and "normal game state (sub)", "first high probability"State" is set. Further, if the game state before the shift to the set game is the "fourth high probability state", the "fourth high probability state" is set.
In addition, even after shifting to the "third high probability state" which is the ceiling state, a state where a predetermined number of games have not been won to the "big hit" of special figure (1)-1 to special figure (1)-7 In each case, a ceiling lottery is carried out, and when the player wins this ceiling lottery, if the “third high probability state” is accumulated in the configuration in which the “third high probability state” can be accumulated and stored. , After the set game is over, the state is changed to the "third high probability state" again (the "third high probability state" is set).

In S1246, the sub CPU 201 confirms the number of times of navigation stored in the work RAM 203 and determines whether there is a remaining number. If the sub CPU 201 determines that there is a remaining number, it moves the process to S1247. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that there is a remaining number, the process moves to S1248.

In S1247, the sub CPU 201 sets the next navigation effect. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In S1248, the sub CPU 201 sets the next navigation-free effect. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In S1249, the sub CPU 201 sets an effect depending on the transition destination of the game state and the presence/absence of the navigation in response to the determination that it is not the big hit won during the “time saving game state”. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[Display example]
An example of the navigation effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 13 will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an effect in 16R of the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 (see S1221 in FIG. 52). Further, FIG. 56 is a diagram showing an effect in 2R hits of the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 (see S1223 in FIG. 52).

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment performs navigation when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the set game. As described above, the navigation is a "big hit" when the "small hit" is won in the "time saving game state" and the "V hit" is achieved in the open state of the second big winning device 53 due to the small hit. This is a notification that suggests the number of rounds of "game".

In the "time saving game state", after the game ball is won in the second starting opening 45 and "small hit" is determined, the navigation is executed during the variable time. That is, the navigation is executed from a few seconds before the fluctuation stop. The navigation may be displayed as an image in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13. First, referring to FIG. 55, an example of the navigation in the case where it has been determined when the “small hit” is won that 16 rounds of the “big hit game” are performed when the “V hit” is achieved Will be described. The special drawing type at this time is a small hit (2)-1 or a small hit (2)-2.

When the "small hit" is won, the launch navigation effect is executed before the blade member 53a of the second big winning device 53 operates. For example, an image is displayed in the display area 13a as shown in FIG. Specifically, a sight of the rifle and a bird are seen through the sight, and an image in which the rifle is aimed at the bird is displayed. Then, the character "hit!" is also displayed in the display area 13a. Thereby, the player can recognize that 16 rounds of "big hit game" will be performed when "V hit" is reached.

The player recognizes this image and continues firing without stopping the firing of the game ball. At this time, if a game ball is won in the V winning opening 57, a successful effect is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 55B, an image in which a rifle bullet hits a bird is displayed. Then, the characters "Hit!!" are also displayed. As a result, the player recognizes that the 16-round ““big hit game” will be started.

Further, when the launch navigation effect is executed and the player continues to emit the game ball, if the game ball does not win the V winning opening 57 in the "small hit game", the failure effect is produced. Executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 55(c), an image is displayed in which a bird is running away from the sighting device. Then, the word "miss" is also displayed.

Next, referring to FIG. 56, in the case where it is determined when the "small hit" is won that the "big hit game" of two rounds is performed when the "V hit" is reached, An example will be described. The special drawing type at this time is a small hit (2)-3 or a small hit (2)-4.

When the "small hit" is won, the firing suppression navigation effect is executed before the blade member 53a of the second big winning device 53 operates. For example, an image is displayed in the display area 13a as shown in FIG. Specifically, the sight of the rifle and the bomb are visible through this sight, and an image is displayed in which the rifle is aimed at the bomb. Then, the characters "Do not hit!" are also displayed in the display area 13a. Thereby, the player can recognize that two rounds of "big hit game" will be performed when "V hit" is reached.

The player recognizes this image and stops firing the game ball. However, when the game ball cannot be stopped well, the game ball may win the V winning opening 57. If a game ball wins the V winning opening 57, the avoidance failure effect is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 56(b), an image of a rifle being hit by a bomb and exploding is displayed. Then, the character "Fail!" is also displayed. As a result, the player recognizes that two rounds of "big hit game" will be started.

Further, when the emission suppression navigation effect is executed and the player can avoid the game ball from winning the V winning opening 57 by stopping the emission of the game ball, the avoidance success effect is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 56(c), an image is displayed in which the bomb is removed from the sight and disappears. Then, the word "danger avoidance" is also displayed.

In addition, during the set game, by entering the first starting opening 44 or the second starting opening 45, there is a case where the player wins a "big hit" of five rounds. Even in such a case, the effect by the image may be executed in the display area 13a. In such a case, although not shown, for example, in the display area 13a, a sight of the rifle and a bird can be seen through the sight, and an image in which the bird hits a tree and falls is displayed. It should be displayed. As a result, the player can recognize that the "big hit game" of 5 rounds is played, not the "V hit".

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment has a configuration in which the player is advantageous or disadvantageous according to the number of rounds of the big hit game, and the number of rounds is determined by satisfying a predetermined condition. It is possible to give a notification (navigation) to suggest. Thereby, the player can play the game in an advantageous situation by recognizing the notification.
In addition, when navigation is not given, for example, “?” is displayed through the sighting device, and it is preferable not to know which round of “big hit game” is achieved by “V hit”. Also, when "V hit" is displayed when "?" is displayed through the sight, when 16 rounds of "big hit game" are to be started, a bird is displayed and 2 rounds are displayed. When the "big hit game" is started, the result may be left to the player by displaying an explosion.

[Various notification processing by payout control circuit]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the payout CPU 301 of the payout control circuit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 64.

[Power-on processing]
First, the power-on processing by the payout CPU 301 will be described with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the procedure of power-on processing in the first embodiment. The power-on process is a process started when the power is turned on. When the power-on process is started, the payout CPU 301 first sets a stack pointer, an interrupt mode, and an interrupt vector.

First, the payout CPU 301 performs a process of setting an input/output port (S301). Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not it is in a power failure detection state (S302). In this process, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the power failure detection signal is at the H level (high level).

In S302, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the power failure detection signal is at the H level (YES in S302), the payout CPU 301 determines that the power failure is in the power failure detection state and performs the process of S302.

On the other hand, in S302, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the power failure detection signal is not at the H level (NO in S302), the payout CPU 301 determines that the power failure detection state is not set and executes the write permission process of the RAM 303. Perform (S303).

In this processing, the payout CPU 301 performs various initial setting processing such as initialization processing of the work area of the RAM 303 in addition to the write permission processing of the RAM 303.

Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the backup clear switch 121 is pressed, that is, whether or not the backup clear switch 121 (see FIG. 7) is on (S304).

In S304, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the backup clear switch 121 is on (YES in S304), the payout CPU 301 performs the process of S310 described below.

On the other hand, in S304, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the backup clear switch 121 is not on (NO in S304), the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not there is the power failure detection flag (S305). In this process, the payout CPU 301 confirms the power failure detection flag.

In S305, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the power failure detection flag does not exist (NO in S305), the payout CPU 301 performs the process of S310 described below. On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S305 that the power failure detection flag is present (YES in S305), the payout CPU 301 calculates a work damage check value (S306). In this process, the payout CPU 301 checks the work area for damage in the RAM 303 and calculates a work damage check value.

Specifically, the payout CPU 301 executes error detection processing such as parity check or CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check), and uses the checksum obtained as the execution result as the work damage check value.

Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether the work damage check value is normal (S307). When the payout CPU 301 determines in S307 that the work damage check value is not normal (NO in S305), the payout CPU 301 performs the process of S310 described below.

On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S307 that the work damage check value is normal (YES in S307), the payout CPU 301 performs an initial process at power recovery (S308).

That is, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the backup clear switch 121 is not on, the power failure detection flag is present, and the work damage check value is normal, the payout CPU 301 is in the state before the power is turned off. It is determined that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be returned to, and based on the data stored in the RAM 303, initialization processing at power recovery is performed.

Next, the payout CPU 301 performs a security ball monitoring initial setting process (S309). In this processing, the payout CPU 301 performs initial setting for determining whether or not 15 game balls are secured in each of the first and second ball supply passages 171A and 171B.

Specifically, the payout CPU 301 sets initial values in the first and second collateral ball counters 305A and 305B, respectively. In the first embodiment, as the fall time of one game ball 130 ms, 1950 times corresponding to the fall time 1950 ms (=130 ms×15) of 15 game balls 1st and 2nd collateral ball counters 305A and 305B. The initial value of.

Further, the payout CPU 301 sets initial values in the first and second collateral ball timers 306A and 306B, respectively. In the first embodiment, based on the fall time 1950 ms (1950 times) of the 15 game balls, 2000 ms is set as the time assumed to complete the guarantee of the 15 game balls, and the first and second bond ball timers 306A, The initial value of 306B.

After the processing of S309, the payout CPU 301 restores the value of the program counter to the address before the power failure. Specifically, the payout CPU 301 finishes the power-on process and continues the process of the program that was being executed when the power-on process was executed.

When S304 is YES, S305 is NO, or S307 is NO, the payout CPU 301 determines that the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot be returned to the state before the power is turned off, Executes the process when is input.

Specifically, the payout CPU 301 clears all work areas of the RAM 303 (S310) and performs an initial process at power-on (S311). In this process, the payout CPU 301 resets the cause of stopping the overpayment and the payout motor abnormality. At this time, the number of overpayment stipulated numbers (10) to be described later and the number of retries are also initialized.

Further, in the state where the stop factor due to the ball shortage has occurred, the display by the payout state notification display device 178, which will be described later, is turned off for 2 seconds so as not to be affected by the accumulation state of the secured balls in the ball supply passage 171.

Specifically, when a predetermined initialization operation is performed when the driving of the payout motor 174 is stopped due to the above-mentioned stop factor, the payout state notification display device 178 displays 2 until the determination of out-of-ball is completed. Do not display the result of the judgment for 2 seconds.

Thereby, for example, it is possible to determine that the ball has run out after a predetermined initialization operation, and when it is determined to be normal, the payout state notification display device 178 does not notify. As a result, unnecessary notification can be eliminated. Here, the predetermined initialization operation means that the power is turned on again after the backup clear switch 121 is pressed, for example.

Further, in the above embodiment, the payout CPU 301 clears the entire work area of the RAM 303 when the power is turned on again after the backup clear switch 121 is pressed, but the present invention is not limited to this. At least one of the entire work area of the RAM 303, the number of overpayments, or the work area of the error information portion without turning the power on again by performing a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 121). One work area including three work areas, that is, three work areas may be cleared, or the work areas may be selectively combined to clear the work area according to the purpose.

Next, the payout CPU 301 performs the collateral ball monitoring initial setting process described above (S312) and executes the main process (S313).

When the power is turned off, the registers used, the interrupt status, and the stack pointer are saved, the excitation data of the payout motor 174 is forcibly set to 0, and the current is switched to a low current.

If the power is cut during the payout operation, it can be assumed that it is not the origin (the number of steps is a multiple of 4). Therefore, by forcibly setting the excitation data to 0, the game ball can fall freely during the power cut. Prevent. Alternatively, the game ball is forcibly dropped when the power is cut off.

When the game ball is forcibly dropped at the time of power interruption, the power interruption process may be waited or interrupted and the execution period may be extended for a time required for the game ball to fall.

Further, instead of forcibly dropping the game ball, the game ball may be controlled to fall freely. In this case, in order to take a sufficient time required to detect the free-falling game ball, the power interruption process may be waited or interrupted, and the execution period may be extended.

[Main processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the main process performed in S313 during the power-on process (see FIG. 57) will be described. Note that FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main processing in the first embodiment.

First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether the system timer of the payout CPU 301 is 4 or less (S321). When the payout CPU 301 determines in S321 that the system timer is not equal to or less than 4 (when S321 is NO determination), the payout CPU 301 returns the process to S321.

On the other hand, in S321, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the system timer is 4 or less (YES in S321), the payout CPU 301 subtracts “4” from the system timer (S322). In this process, the payout CPU 301 initializes the system timer.

That is, if the system timer is a timer that counts every 1 ms, the payout CPU 301 will execute S321 and S322 to execute the processing of S323 and subsequent steps described later every 4 ms.

Next, the payout CPU 301 updates the values of all timers used in the main processing (S323). Next, the payout CPU 301 executes a ball lending control process (S324). In this process, the payout CPU 301 manages game balls and creates commands to be transmitted to the card unit 150 when the lending operation unit 151 is operated, and receives a ball lending command transmitted from the card unit 150. When you do, manage the number of game balls to rent.

Next, the payout CPU 301 executes prize ball control processing (S325). In this process, the payout CPU 301 pays out when the game ball wins the first starting opening 44, the second starting opening 45, the general winning openings 51, 52, the first big winning device 54 and the second big winning device 53. It manages the game balls that are put out.

Next, the payout CPU 301 controls the payout state notification display device 178 so as to display the fact that the error has occurred in the payout control circuit 300 on the condition that the error has occurred in the payout control circuit 300 (S326).

[System timer interrupt processing (1 ms)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 59, system timer interrupt processing by the payout CPU 301 will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing a procedure of system timer interrupt processing in the first embodiment.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the payout CPU 301 interrupts the main processing at a predetermined cycle and executes the system timer interrupt processing even while the main processing shown in FIG. 58 is being executed.

Specifically, the payout CPU 301 performs a system timer interrupt process according to a clock pulse generated at a predetermined cycle (for example, 1 millisecond) from a reset clock pulse generation circuit (not shown) in the payout control circuit 300. Execute.

First, the payout CPU 301 receives a detection command (signal) from the main control circuit 70 and various sensors, and executes a command reception process that analyzes the received command at the same time (S331).

Next, the payout CPU 301 updates the values of all the timers used in the system timer interrupt processing (for example, the first and second collateral ball timers 306A and 306B) (S332). Next, the payout CPU 301 executes a security ball presence detection process (see FIG. 60) described later (S333).

Next, the payout CPU 301 executes a security ball absence detection process (see FIG. 61) described later (S334). After that, the payout CPU 301 executes a counting switch detection process (see FIG. 62) described later (S335). Next, the payout CPU 301 executes a motor activation waiting process (see FIG. 63) described later (S336).

Then, finally, the payout CPU 301 executes a command transmission process of transmitting a command indicating the payout error information of the payout control circuit 300 to the main control circuit 70 (S337). For example, when a signal indicating that the lower tray is full is input from the lower tray full tank switch 179, the payout CPU 301 sends a payout error information command indicating that the lower tray is full to the main control circuit. 70.

However, since the main control circuit 70 holds the activation waiting time of the sub control circuit 200 for a specified time (for example, 6 seconds) immediately after the power is turned on, payout error information is available until the main control circuit 70 can receive the waiting time. Avoid sending commands.

Here, when the power is turned on, the history information regarding the payout error information is cleared. Further, even if the lower tray full state is released before the power is cut off and the lower bowl full state is released by discharging the game balls stored in the lower tray 22 during the power cut, the lower tray is returned after the power is cut off. No information indicating that the full tank is released is sent. However, with respect to the payout motor abnormality and the overpayment abnormality that are canceled when the power is turned on again, they are initialized when the power is restored.

[Detection process with collateral balls]
Next, with reference to FIG. 60, a security ball presence detection process performed in S333 in the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 59) will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the security ball presence detection process in the first embodiment.

First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the first collateral ball counter 305A is 0 (S341). In S341, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the first collateral ball counter 305A is 0 (YES in S341), the payout CPU 301 determines that the game ball has been delivered to the first ball supply passage 171A. When it is determined that replenishment is not necessary, the process proceeds to S347.

On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S341 that the value of the first collateral ball counter 305A is not 0 (NO in S341), the payout CPU 301 determines that the game ball to the first ball supply passage 171A. It is determined that the replenishment is necessary, and it is determined whether the first 15-ball guarantee switch 172A is in the ON state (S342).

In S342, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first 15-ball collateral switch 172A is not in the ON state (NO in S342), the payout CPU 301 sets the predetermined number in the first ball supply passage 171A (embodiment). In 1, it is determined that 15 game balls have not been accumulated, that is, there is no security ball, and the process proceeds to S347.

On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S342 that the first 15-ball collateral switch 172A is in the ON state (YES in S342), the payout CPU 301 sets the predetermined number in the first ball supply passage 171A. In the first embodiment, it is determined that 15 game balls have been accumulated, that is, there is a security ball, and the value of the first security ball counter 305A is decremented by "1" (S343).

Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the first secured ball counter 305A is 0 (S344). In S344, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the first collateral ball counter 305A is not 0 (NO in S344), the payout CPU 301 supplies the game ball to the first ball supply passage 171A. Is determined to be necessary, and the process proceeds to S347.

On the other hand, in S344, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the first collateral ball counter 305A is 0 (YES in S344), the payout CPU 301 causes the game to the first ball supply passage 171A. When it is determined that sphere supply is not necessary, 1 is set in the first falling ball confirmation flag (S345).

Here, the first falling ball confirmation flag is set to "1" when the supply of the game ball to the first ball supply passage 171A is not necessary, that is, when there is a backing ball, the first ball supply passage This is a flag that is set to "0" when it is necessary to supply game balls to 171A, that is, when there is no security ball.

Next, the payout CPU 301 sets 0 in the first stop factor flag (S346). Here, the first stop factor flag is a flag that is set to "0" or "1" depending on whether or not there is a factor (stop factor) for stopping payout of game balls by the prize ball case unit 170. Yes, particularly with respect to payout of game balls accumulated (ensured) in the first ball supply passage 171A, a flag that is set to "1" when there is a stop factor and set to "0" when there is no stop factor Is.

In the process of S346, it is determined in S344 that the supply of the game balls to the first ball supply passage 171A is completed and a predetermined number (15 in the first embodiment) of the game balls are accumulated. Therefore, 0 is set to the first stop factor flag in the sense that the out-of-ball condition which is the stop factor is released. It should be noted that, as the stop factor, there will be various stop factors other than the ball shortage, which will be described later. Here, as an example thereof, a ball break is cited.

Next, if S341 is YES, if S342 is NO, or if S344 is NO, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the second collateral ball counter 305B is 0 (S347). ).

In S347, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the second collateral ball counter 305B is 0 (when the determination in S347 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that the game ball has been delivered to the second ball supply passage 171B. When it is determined that replenishment is not necessary, the security ball presence detection process ends.

On the other hand, in S347, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the second collateral ball counter 305B is not 0 (NO in S347), the payout CPU 301 determines that the game ball to the second ball supply passage 171B. It is determined that the replenishment is necessary, and it is determined whether or not the second 15-ball security switch 172B is in the ON state (S348).

In S348, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the second 15-ball collateral switch 172B is not in the ON state (NO in S348), the payout CPU 301 sets the predetermined number in the second ball supply passage 171B (embodiment). In 1, the game balls of 15) are not accumulated, that is, it is determined that there is no security ball, and the security ball detection processing ends.

On the other hand, in S348, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the second 15-ball collateral switch 172B is in the ON state (YES in S348), the payout CPU 301 sets the predetermined number in the second ball supply passage 171B. In the first embodiment, it is determined that 15 game balls have been accumulated, that is, there is a security ball, and the value of the second security ball counter 305B is decremented by "1" (S349).

Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the second collateral ball counter 305B is 0 (S350). In S350, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the second collateral ball counter 305B is not 0 (NO in S350), the payout CPU 301 supplies the game ball to the second ball supply passage 171B. Is determined to be necessary, the collateral sphere presence detection process ends.

On the other hand, in S350, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the second collateral ball counter 305B is 0 (YES in S350), the payout CPU 301 causes the game to the second ball supply passage 171B. When it is determined that sphere supply is not necessary, 1 is set in the second falling ball confirmation flag (S351).

Here, the second falling ball confirmation flag is set to "1" when it is not necessary to supply game balls to the second ball supply passage 171B, that is, when there is a backing ball, the second ball supply passage This is a flag that is set to "0" when it is necessary to supply game balls to 171B, that is, when there is no security ball.

Next, the payout CPU 301 sets 0 to the second stop factor flag (S352), and ends the collateral ball presence detection process. Here, the second stop factor flag is a flag that is set to "0" or "1" depending on whether or not there is a factor (stop factor) for stopping the payout of game balls by the prize ball case unit 170. Yes, particularly with respect to payout of game balls accumulated (ensured) in the second ball supply passage 171B, a flag that is set to "1" when there is a stop factor and set to "0" when there is no stop factor Is.

In the process of S352, it is determined in S350 that the supply of the game balls to the second ball supply passage 171B is completed and a predetermined number (15 in the first embodiment) of the game balls are accumulated. Therefore, 0 is set to the second stop factor flag in the sense that the out-of-ball condition which is the stop factor is released.

In this way, in the security ball presence detection process, the security ball counter and the 15-ball security switch are used to determine the presence or absence of a security ball, the determination of the supply of game balls, and the stop factor (the payout motor, the sprocket, or the payout). Since it is possible to determine whether or not to cancel the collateral, it is possible to more accurately manage the collateral ball in the payout.

[Detection process without collateral ball]
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the collateral unoccupied ball detection process performed in S334 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 59) will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the collateral sphere absence detection process according to the first embodiment.

First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the first secured ball timer 306A is 0 (S361). In S361, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the first collateral ball timer 306A is not 0 (NO in S361), the payout CPU 301 is supplying game balls to the first ball supply passage 171A. Then, the process proceeds to S371.

On the other hand, in S361, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the first collateral ball timer 306A is 0 (YES in S361), the payout CPU 301 causes the game to the first ball supply passage 171A. It is determined that the supply of balls has been completed, and it is determined whether or not the value of the first secured ball counter 305A is 0 (S362).

In S362, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the first collateral ball counter 305A is 0 (YES in S362), the payout CPU 301 sets a predetermined number (implementation) in the first ball supply passage 171A. In the form 1, it is determined that fifteen (15) game balls are accumulated, that is, there is a guarantee ball, and it is determined whether or not the first 15-ball guarantee switch 172A is in the OFF state (S363).

Here, in S361 and S362, the payout CPU 301 subtracts “1” every time the system timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 59 is performed every 1 ms, that is, the updated value of the first collateral ball timer 306A and the collateral. In S343 of the sphere presence detection process (see FIG. 60), "1" is subtracted, that is, the value of the updated first secured ball counter 305A is compared, and based on the comparison result, the game ball of the first sprocket 173A It is determined whether to prohibit payout.

For example, if S361 is YES and S362 is YES, both the value of the first collateral ball timer 306A and the value of the first collateral ball counter 305A are 0 as the predetermined value. Therefore, when 2000 ms, which is the initial value of the first secured ball timer 306A set as a time sufficient to pay out 15 game balls from the ball tank 161, has passed, the first secured ball counter This means that the initial value of 305A, 1950 times (1950 ms), has elapsed.

Since 1950 times (1950 ms), which is the initial value of the first collateral ball counter 305A, is a value that is not subtracted unless the first 15-ball collateral switch 172A detects a game sphere, when 2000 ms has elapsed (0 When 1), the initial value of the first collateral ball counter 305A is 1950 times (1950 ms) is 0, so that 15 game balls are supplied to the first ball supply passage 171A. Is guaranteed.

On the other hand, if the determination in S361 is YES and the determination in S362 is NO, the value of the first collateral ball counter 305A becomes 0 when the value of the first collateral ball timer 306A becomes 0. Will not be.

That is, when the initial value 2000 ms of the first secured ball timer 306A has elapsed, the initial value 1950 times (1950 ms) of the first secured ball counter 305A has not elapsed. As a result, it can be estimated that there was a time during which the first 15-ball security switch 172A did not detect the game ball, that is, there was a time during which the supply of the game ball was interrupted, until 2000 ms had elapsed. Therefore, if S361 is YES and S362 is NO, it is determined that 15 game balls have not been supplied to the first ball supply passage 171A.

The payout CPU 301, which performs a process of comparing the value of the first collateral ball timer 306A and the value of the first collateral ball counter 305A, constitutes a determination means.

Next, in S363, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first 15-ball collateral switch 172A is not in the OFF state (when S363 is NO determination), the payout CPU 301 determines that the first 15-ball collateral switch 172A has 15 balls in the first ball supply passage 171A. When it is determined that the game balls have been supplied, the process proceeds to S371.

On the other hand, in S363, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first 15-ball collateral switch 172A is in the OFF state (YES in S363), the payout CPU 301 once determines the first 15-ball security switch 172A in the OFF state in S361 and S362. Despite guaranteeing that 15 game balls have been supplied to the first ball supply passage 171A, 15 game balls have not been supplied to the first ball supply passage 171A due to some factor, that is, When it is determined that there is no security ball, 0 is set in the first falling ball confirmation flag (S364).

Here, as a factor for making a YES determination in S363, there may be mentioned, for example, a case where the game balls are excessively paid out due to a malfunction of the first sprocket 173A or the payout motor 174. At this time, the payout of the game ball by the first sprocket 173A is prohibited.

Here, when the game balls are excessively paid out, for example, as a result of excessive rotation of the first sprocket 173A, the number of game balls supplied to the first ball supply passage 171A is changed from 15 to 14 The first 15-ball collateral switch 172A detects that the game balls that have been supplied to the first ball supply passage 171A continuously decrease in number and are delivered to the first sprocket 173A. Since the game ball also moves in the direction of the first sprocket 173A, the first 15-ball guarantee switch 172A is in the OFF state.

That is, the payout CPU 301 pays out the game sphere by the first sprocket 173A even if the value of the first collateral ball counter 305A is 0 when the value of the first collateral ball timer 306A is 0. If the game ball is not detected by the first 15-ball guarantee switch 172A before, the payout of the game ball by the first sprocket 173A through the driving of the payout motor 174 is prohibited.

In this way, the payout CPU 301 can grasp whether or not the game balls replenished in the first ball supply passage 171A exist, and thus the payout management can be performed more accurately.

Next, the payout CPU 301 sets 2 seconds (2000 ms) as the idle time monitoring time of the payout motor 174 in the first secured ball timer 306A (S365). When 2000 ms set here has elapsed, it is determined that there is a stop factor, and the payout state notification display device 178 gives a notification.

After that, the payout CPU 301 sets 1950 times (1950 ms) as the number of times the idle state of the payout motor 174 is monitored in the first collateral ball counter 305A (S366), and moves the process to S371.

On the other hand, if the payout CPU 301 determines in S362 that the value of the first collateral ball counter 305A is not 0 (NO in S362), the payout CPU 301 sets a predetermined number ((NO) in the first ball supply passage 171A). In the first embodiment, it is determined that 15) game balls are not accumulated, that is, there is no security ball, and 1 is set to the first stop factor flag (S367).

In this process, as described above, it is determined in S361 and S362 that the fifteen game balls have not been replenished in the first ball supply passage 171A, so that the payout of the game balls by the first sprocket 173A should be prohibited. , 1 is set to the first stop factor flag.

In other words, when the value of the first secured ball timer 306A is 0 and the value of the first secured ball counter 305A is not 0, the payout CPU 301 uses the first sprocket 173A through the driving of the payout motor 174. Prohibition of playing game balls.

Next, the payout CPU 301 sets 1 to the origin adjustment flag (S368), and moves the process to S371. In this process, the payout CPU 301 performs a process of requesting the origin adjustment control of the first sprocket 173A.

Here, the origin of the first sprocket 173A is a rotation position (driving position) at which the game ball can be paid out to the first payout passage 180A when the first sprocket 173A is rotated. In the first embodiment, the number of steps of the payout motor 174 is controlled based on this origin.

When the first sprocket 173A is stopped due to some stop factor (such as “error related to payout” described later), the first sprocket 173A has a position detection sensor (for example, an index for grasping the rotational position of the first sprocket 173A). ) Is not provided, the current rotational position (driving position) is unknown, that is, it is unknown how many steps the payout motor 174 has driven with respect to the origin. Therefore, the first sprocket 173A The origin may be unknown.

Therefore, in the first embodiment, when the first sprocket 173A is stopped based on the stop factor, that is, when the origin adjustment flag is set to 1, the origin adjustment control for grasping the origin of the first sprocket 173A is performed. Is done. That is, the payout CPU 301 performs the origin adjustment control when it is determined that the payout of the game balls is prohibited as described above. The same applies to retry control described later.

By performing the origin adjustment control in this way, the origin position of the sprocket 173 can be adjusted. Therefore, for example, even if the dispensing device using the sprocket 173 that does not have the position detection sensor is dispensed accurately. It becomes possible to do.

In the first embodiment, the payout device in which the sprocket 173 is not provided with the position detection sensor has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a payout device in which the sprocket is provided with the position detection sensor is also applicable. By performing the origin adjustment control, it is possible to more accurately manage the position of the sprocket and the payout, and thus it is possible to perform the payout more accurately.

The origin adjustment flag is a flag that is set depending on whether or not there is a request for origin adjustment control, and is set to "1" when there is a request for origin adjustment control and when there is no request for origin adjustment control. This flag is set to "0".

Specifically, the payout CPU 301 drives the payout motor 174 by a unit drive amount (four steps in the first embodiment) until the game ball is detected by the first counting switch 181A. Here, the unit drive amount (four steps in the first embodiment) described above is smaller than the payout drive amount (16 steps in the first embodiment) described later.

Further, the unit drive amount (4 steps in the first embodiment) is a drive amount obtained by dividing the payout drive amount (16 steps in the first embodiment) described later by four times as a specific number (the number of origin request retries described later). Is.

Further, this origin adjustment control is common to retry control described later. Therefore, also in the retry control, the payout CPU 301 drives the payout motor 174 by a unit drive amount (four steps in the first embodiment) until the game ball is detected by the first counting switch 181A. Details will be described later. The payout CPU 301 that controls the driving of the payout motor 174 constitutes a control unit and a drive control unit.

Here, in S367 described above, the first stop factor flag is set to 1 in order to prohibit the payout of the game balls by the first sprocket 173A, but when the origin adjustment control is requested as described above. If the payout of the game sphere by the first sprocket 173A is not permitted, the origin adjustment cannot be performed.

The same applies to retry control. Therefore, in the first embodiment, even if it is determined that the payout of the game ball is prohibited, the payout CPU 301 permits the payout of the game ball on condition that the origin adjustment control (retry control) is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the origin adjustment control (retry control) from being disabled due to the prohibition of the payout of the game balls.

Next, if S361 is NO, if S363 is NO, or after S366 ends, or after S368 ends, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the second collateral ball timer 306B is 0. It is determined (S371).

In S371, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the second collateral ball timer 306B is not 0 (NO in S371), the payout CPU 301 is supplying game balls to the second ball supply passage 171B. It is determined that, and the collateral sphere absence detection process ends.

On the other hand, in S371, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the second collateral ball timer 306B is 0 (YES in S371), the payout CPU 301 causes the game to the second ball supply passage 171B. It is determined that the supply of balls has been completed, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second secured ball counter 305B is 0 (S372).

In S372, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the second collateral ball counter 305B is 0 (YES in S372), the payout CPU 301 causes the second ball supply passage 171B to have a predetermined number (implementation). In the form 1, it is determined that 15) game balls are accumulated, that is, there is a guarantee ball, and it is determined whether or not the second 15-ball guarantee switch 172B is in the OFF state (S373).

Here, the determination as to whether or not the payout of the game balls by the second sprocket 173B is prohibited is the same as the above-described determination as to whether or not the payout of the game balls by the first sprocket 173A is prohibited. The description is omitted. The payout CPU 301, which performs a process of comparing the value of the second collateral ball timer 306B and the value of the second collateral ball counter 305B, constitutes a determination means.

Next, in S373, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the second 15-ball collateral switch 172B is not in the OFF state (when S373 is NO determination), the payout CPU 301 outputs 15 pieces to the second ball supply passage 171B. When it is determined that the game balls have been replenished, the security ball absence detection process is ended.

On the other hand, in S373, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the second 15-ball collateral switch 172B is in the OFF state (YES in S373), the payout CPU 301 once determines the first 15-ball security switch 172B in S371 and S372. Although it is ensured that 15 game balls are supplied to the second ball supply passage 171B, 15 game balls are not supplied to the second ball supply passage 171B for some reason, that is, When it is determined that there is no security ball, the second falling ball confirmation flag is set to 0 (S374).

Here, as a factor of YES determination in S373, there may be mentioned a case where the game balls are excessively paid out due to a problem of the second sprocket 173B or the payout motor 174, or the like. Further, at this time, the payout of the game ball by the second sprocket 173B is prohibited.

In other words, the payout CPU 301 pays out game balls by the second sprocket 173B even if the value of the second secured ball counter 305B is 0 when the value of the second secured ball timer 306B is 0. If the game ball is not detected by the second 15-ball collateral switch 172B before the execution, the payout of the game ball by the second sprocket 173B through the driving of the payout motor 174 is prohibited.

Next, the payout CPU 301 sets 2 seconds (2000 ms) as the monitoring time of the idle state of the payout motor 174 in the second secured ball timer 306B (S375). When 2000 ms set here has elapsed, it is determined that there is a stop factor, and the payout state notification display device 178 gives a notification.

After that, the payout CPU 301 sets 1950 times (1950 ms) as the number of times the idle state of the payout motor 174 is monitored in the second collateral ball counter 305B (S376), and ends the collateral sphere absence detection process.

On the other hand, in S372, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the second collateral ball counter 305B is not 0 (NO in S372), the payout CPU 301 causes the second ball supply passage 171B to have the predetermined number ( In the first embodiment, it is determined that 15) game balls are not accumulated, that is, there is no security ball, and 1 is set to the second stop factor flag (S377).

In this process, as described above, it is determined in S371 and S372 that the 15 ball balls have not been replenished to the second ball supply passage 171B, so that the payout of the game ball by the second sprocket 173B should be prohibited. , 1 is set to the second stop factor flag.

In other words, when the value of the second collateral ball timer 306B is 0 and the value of the second collateral ball counter 305B is not 0, the payout CPU 301 uses the second sprocket 173B through the driving of the payout motor 174. Prohibition of playing game balls.

Next, the payout CPU 301 sets 1 to the origin adjustment flag (S378), and ends the collateral ball absence detection process. In this process, the payout CPU 301 performs a process of requesting origin adjustment control of the second sprocket 173B. Here, since the origin adjustment control of the second sprocket 173B is the same as the origin adjustment control of the first sprocket 173A, description thereof will be omitted.

[Count switch detection processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the counting switch detection processing performed in S335 during the system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 59) will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the counting switch detection process according to the first embodiment.

First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the first counting switch 181A or the second counting switch 181B detects passage of a game ball (S381). In S381, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first counting switch 181A or the second counting switch 181B does not detect the passage of the game ball (when NO in S381), the payout CPU 301 determines the counting switch. The detection process ends.

Here, when the origin adjustment control is being performed, the game ball is not yet detected by the first counting switch 181A or the second counting switch 181B, so S381 becomes NO determination.

On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S381 that the first counting switch 181A or the second counting switch 181B has detected the passage of the game ball (when YES is determined in S381), the payout CPU 301 determines the first counting switch. It is determined that the game balls have been paid out by the sprocket 173A or the second sprocket 173B, and the requested payout number is decremented by "1" (S382).

Further, at this time, the payout CPU 301 can count the number of game balls detected by the first counting switch 181A and the second counting switch 181B. Therefore, the payout CPU 301 constitutes a counting unit.

Here, the payout request number is the prize ball control command or lending that is transmitted from the main control circuit 70 based on the winning of the gaming machine to various starting openings or various winning openings and the lending of the game balls and received by the payout control circuit 300. It is a value obtained by sequentially adding the number of prize balls or the number of lent balls based on the ball control signal, and is the total number of game balls to be paid out by the prize ball case unit 170 (total payout amount).

The number of requested payouts is stored in the RAM 303 of the payout control circuit 300. The number of prize balls and the number of lent balls described above correspond to the payout amount. Further, the RAM 303 of the payout control circuit 300 constitutes payout storage means. In addition, the payout request number is subtracted as the game balls are paid out.

Next, the payout CPU 301 subtracts "1" from the requested drop quantity (S383). Here, the drop request number is determined as the number of game balls to be paid out by one drive of the payout motor 174 based on the payout requested number (total payout amount) stored in the RAM 303 of the payout control circuit 300. Therefore, the maximum is 15.

For example, if the requested number of payouts (total payout amount) is 15 or more, the requested number of drops is 15, and if the requested number of payouts (total payout amount) is 14 or less, the requested number of drop is The number is the same as the stored required number of payouts.

Further, the drop request number is determined by the payout CPU 301 according to the payout request number (total payout amount). Note that the number of requested drops corresponds to the amount of break-out payment. Further, the payout CPU 301 corresponds to a division payout amount determination means.

Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the origin adjustment flag is 1 (S384). In S384, if the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment flag is not 1 (NO in S384), the payout CPU 301 shifts the processing to S387.

On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S384 that the origin adjustment flag is 1 (YES in S384), the payout CPU 301 sets the origin adjustment flag to 0 (S385).

Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the origin adjustment completion flag to 1 (S386). Here, the origin adjustment completion flag is a flag for determining whether or not the origin adjustment control is being performed or the origin adjustment control is completed. When the origin adjustment control is being performed, it is set to "0" and the origin adjustment control is completed. The flag is set to "1" when the flag is set.

Next, in the case where the determination in S364 is NO, or after the end of S386, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the number of drop requests is less than 0 (S387). When the payout CPU 301 determines in S387 that the number of requested drops is not less than 0 (NO in S387), the payout CPU 301 ends the counting switch detection process.

On the other hand, in S387, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the requested drop quantity is less than 0 (YES in S387), the payout CPU 301 has an excessive number of game balls actually paid out with respect to the requested drop quantity. Then, the number of overpayments is determined to be "1" (S388).

Here, the overpay number is the number of game balls that exceeds the requested drop number when the actually paid out game balls are excessive with respect to the requested drop amount, that is, when the overpayment occurs. For example, if the number of requested drops is 15, but the number of game balls actually paid out is 16, one game ball has been overpaid, so the number of overpays is increased. "1" is added.

The payout CPU 301 adds up the number of overpays described above to obtain the total number of game balls detected by the first counting switch 181A and the second counting switch 181B (the total number of game balls actually paid out). ) And the requested payout number can be stored in the RAM 303.

Therefore, the RAM 303 constitutes a difference storage means. The number of overpays is accumulated in the RAM 303 until a predetermined initialization operation is performed. Examples of the predetermined initialization operation here include turning on the power again.

Further, in the above embodiment, the payout CPU 301 clears the entire work area of the RAM 303 when the power is turned on again after the backup clear switch 121 is pressed, but the present invention is not limited to this. At least one of the entire work area of the RAM 303, the number of overpayments, or the work area of the error information portion without turning the power on again by performing a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 121) May be cleared, that is, the three work areas may be cleared, or the work areas may be cleared by selectively combining them.

Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether the number of overpays has reached 10 or more (S389). In other words, the payout CPU 301 compares the total number of game balls detected by the first counting switch 181A and the second counting switch 181B (the total number of game balls actually paid out) with the number of requested payouts. Then, it is determined whether or not the difference (total number of overpayments) is 10 or more.

When the payout CPU 301 determines in S389 that the number of overpays is not 10 or more (NO in S389), the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of game balls related to overpayment is within an allowable range (allowable value). When it is determined that it is within the range, the counting switch detection process is ended.

On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S389 that the number of overpays is 10 or more (YES in S389), the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of game balls related to overpayment is not within the permissible range (permissible). It is determined that the value is greater than or equal to the value, the overpay flag is set to 1 (S390), and the counting switch detection process is ended.

Here, the overpay flag is a flag for determining whether or not the number of game balls related to overpayment is within an allowable range (allowable value), and the number of game balls related to overpayment is within an allowable range. Is a flag which is set to 0 when it is, and is set to 1 when the number of game balls relating to overpayment is not within the allowable range (more than the allowable value).

When the overpay flag is set to 1, the payout CPU 301 controls the payout motor 174 so as to stop the first sprocket 173A and the second sprocket 173B until the above-described predetermined initialization operation is performed. ..

[Motor start wait processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the motor start waiting process performed in S336 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 59) will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the motor start waiting process according to the first embodiment.

First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether the origin adjustment completion flag is 1 (S401). When the payout CPU 301 determines in S401 that the origin adjustment completion flag is not 1 (NO in S401), the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment control is being performed, and moves the process to S406.

On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S401 that the origin adjustment completion flag is 1 (YES in S401), the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment control is completed, and then Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the second stop factor flag is 1 (S402).

When the payout CPU 301 determines in S402 that the first or second stop factor flag is 1 (YES in S402), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a stop factor and starts the motor. The waiting process ends.

On the other hand, in S402, when the payout CPU 301 determines that neither of the first or second stop factor flags is 1 (when S402 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no stop factor. Then, it is determined whether or not the first or second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (S403).

In S403, when the payout CPU 301 determines that neither of the first or second falling ball confirmation flags is 1 (NO in S403), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no guarantee ball, and The startup waiting process ends.

On the other hand, in S403, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first or second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (YES in S403), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a collateral ball and pays out. It is determined whether the requested number is larger than 0 (S404).

If the payout CPU 301 determines in S404 that the number of payout requests is not greater than 0 (NO in S404), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no payout request, and ends the motor start waiting process.

On the other hand, in S404, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of payout requests is larger than 0 (YES in S404), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a payout request, and performs a motor start-up initial process (FIG. 64) is executed (S405).

Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the origin adjustment flag is 1 (S406). When the payout CPU 301 determines in S406 that the origin adjustment flag is not 1 (NO in S406), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no request for origin adjustment control, and moves the process to S407. Therefore, if S406 is NO, the origin adjustment control is not performed.

On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S406 that the origin adjustment flag is 1 (YES in S406), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a request for origin adjustment control, and the retry count is 12 or more. It is determined whether or not it is larger, that is, whether or not the origin adjustment control has been performed 12 times (S408). Therefore, if S406 is YES, the origin adjustment control is performed.

Here, the number of retries is the number of times the origin adjustment control is performed, and more specifically, a value that is added each time the number of motor operations to be described later is updated. In the origin adjustment control, the drive amount necessary for paying out one game ball to the sprocket 173 and then paying out the next game ball, that is, the drive amount necessary for paying out one game ball (payout drive amount) Since the payout motor 174 is driven only, the payout drive amount necessary to pay out this one game ball (in the first embodiment, 16 steps=unit drive amount (4 steps)×4 times (origin request retry count) ) Is the number of motor operations=1. Here, the unit drive amount as the excitation data is 4 steps×5 ms.

Therefore, each time one motor operation number is set (updated) in S410, which will be described later, the number of retries is added, assuming that the origin adjustment control is completed once. Since the origin adjustment control is common to the retry control as described above, the number of retries can be said to be the number of times the retry control is performed.

In this way, the payout CPU 301 updates the motor operation number as a retry value on condition that the drive amount of the payout motor 174 reaches the payout drive amount (16 steps in the first embodiment).

The payout CPU 301 that updates the number of operating motors constitutes a retry value updating unit. Further, the payout CPU 301 manages the number of times the motor operating number is updated or the number of times excitation data is set, that is, the number of retries, as the number of times of origin adjustment control (retry control).

In the first embodiment, three grooves are formed in each sprocket to receive the game balls so that three game balls are paid out each time the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B rotate once. There is.

For this reason, when the motor operation number is updated 6 times, the driving amount by which each of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B makes one rotation (96 steps=16 steps (unit driving amount (4 The payout motor 174 is driven by (step)×4 times (origin request retry count)×6 times (half of 12 retry counts)).

Therefore, if the number of retries is greater than 12, it means that the driving amount of two rotations of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B (192 steps=96 steps (driving amount for one rotation) in the first embodiment)× It means that the payout motor 174 was driven with a driving amount exceeding 2 times. The number of retries for 12 times is the upper limit number of retries for 16 steps (unit drive amount (4 steps)×4 times) as one set.

When the payout CPU 301 determines in S408 that the number of retries is greater than 12 (YES in S408), the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of times of origin adjustment control has reached the upper limit number (12 times). Then, the process proceeds to S407.

At this time, in the payout CPU 301, the drive amount of the payout motor 174 exceeds 192 steps (upper limit drive amount), or the number of retries is repeated, without the game ball being detected by the first and second counting switches 181A and 181B. On the condition that the number of times exceeds 12 times (upper limit number), the driving of the payout motor 174 is controlled so as to stop the payout of the game balls until a predetermined initialization operation is performed. As a result, the origin adjustment control (retry control) ends. Examples of the predetermined initialization operation here include turning on the power again.

Further, in the above embodiment, the payout CPU 301 clears the entire work area of the RAM 303 when the power is turned on again after the backup clear switch 121 is pressed, but the present invention is not limited to this. At least one of the entire work area of the RAM 303, the number of overpayments, or the work area of the error information portion without turning the power on again by performing a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 121). One work area including three work areas, that is, three work areas may be cleared, or the work areas may be selectively combined to clear the work area according to the purpose.

In S407, the payout CPU 301 sets the starting state of the payout motor 174 (S407), and moves the process to S414. In this process, if S406 is NO, the origin adjustment control is not performed, so the acceleration state of the payout motor 174 or the like is set in accordance with the required drop number so that the normal game balls are paid out. When S408 is YES, the payout motor 174 is set to the idle state in order to stop the payout of the game balls.

On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S408 that the number of retries is not greater than 12 (NO in S408), the payout CPU 301 sets the step counter mask value to 4 steps in preparation for the next origin adjustment control. (S409). In this process, 4 steps are set as the unit drive amount of the payout motor 174 when executing the origin adjustment control.

Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the number of motor operations to one (S410), and sets the origin request retry count to four (S411). In this process, by multiplying the 4 steps set as the step counter mask value in S409 described above by 4 times set as the origin request retry count, the payout drive amount necessary for paying out one game ball is obtained. 16 steps are set.

Next, the payout CPU 301 clears the value of the falling ball monitoring timer to 0 (S412). Here, the falling ball monitoring timer determines whether or not there is a falling ball and whether or not a stop factor has occurred after driving the payout motor 174 with the excitation data for the unit drive amount (4 steps) in the origin adjustment control. It is a timer for measuring the falling ball monitoring time (130 ms in the origin adjustment control) for monitoring.

The falling ball monitoring time (130 ms) is the excitation data holding period (in the first embodiment, a holding period for holding the postures of the first and second sprockets 171A and 171B after driving the payout motor 174 for four steps. 30 ms) and a cooling period for cooling the payout motor 174 (100 ms in origin adjustment control).

Next, the payout CPU 301 sets "0" to the origin adjustment completion flag (S413). Next, after the end of S407 or the end of S413, the payout CPU 301 sets the excitation data of the payout motor 174 (S414), and ends the motor start waiting process.

In this process, for example, when performing the origin adjustment control, the payout drive amount required to pay out one game ball is 16 steps (unit drive amount (4 steps) x 4 times (origin request retry count)). Set the excitation data. Further, when paying out the normal game balls, the excitation data for a predetermined step is set as the drive amount required to pay out the required number of game balls. The excitation data is set to 0 when the payout motor 174 is set to the idle state so that the payout of the game balls is stopped.

[Initial motor startup processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the motor startup initial process performed in S405 during the motor startup waiting process (see FIG. 63) will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the motor start-up initial processing according to the first embodiment.

First, the payout CPU 301 sets the number of drop requests from the number of payout requests (S421). In this process, a maximum of 15 drop request numbers is set according to the payout request number (total payout amount). For example, if the requested number of payouts (total amount of payouts) is 20, the requested number of drops is set to 15. On the other hand, when the payout request number (total payout amount) is 10, the drop request number is set to 10 which is the same as the payout request number.

Next, the payout CPU 301 performs a security ball monitoring setting process (S422). In this processing, the payout CPU 301 sets the number of ON detection monitoring times in the first and second collateral ball counters 305A and 305B according to the requested drop number.

For example, when the number of requested drops is 9 to 10, the number of ON detection monitoring times is set to 650 times (650 ms). Further, the payout CPU 301 sets the monitoring time in the first and second collateral ball timers 306A and 306B according to the number of requested drops. For example, when the number of requested drops is 9 to 10, the monitoring time is set to 850 ms.

Here, the above-mentioned ON detection monitoring frequency and monitoring time are set to the initial values of the first and second collateral ball counters 305A and 305B, which are set in the collateral ball monitoring initial setting process of S312 during the power-on process of FIG. , And different from the initial values of the first and second secured ball timers 306A and 306B.

Next, the payout CPU 301 sets "0" to the first and second falling ball confirmation flags (S423). After that, the payout CPU 301 initializes the number of retries (S424) and sets the origin adjustment completion flag to "1" (S425).

Next, the payout CPU 301 clears the value of the falling ball monitoring timer to 0 (S426). The falling ball monitoring timer cleared here drives the payout motor 174 with the excitation data for the drive amount necessary for paying out the required number of drops in the normal payout control in which the origin adjustment control and the retry control are not executed. After that, it is a timer for measuring the falling ball monitoring time (500 ms in the normal payout control) for monitoring whether or not the requested number of falling balls has fallen and whether or not a stop factor has occurred.

The falling ball monitoring time (500 ms) here includes an excitation data holding period (30 ms in the first embodiment) and a cooling period of the payout motor 174 (470 ms in normal payout control). This falling ball monitoring time corresponds to a fixed period.

Next, the payout CPU 301 clears the step counter to 0 (S427). Here, the step counter is a counter that counts the number of steps of the payout motor 174.

For example, in the case where the required number of drops is 15, when the dropping operation of the 15 game balls, that is, the payout operation is completed, the value of the step counter becomes a value for 240 steps. In this process, the payout CPU 301 clears the value of 240 steps counted as described above, for example.

Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the step counter mask value to 16 steps (S428), and ends the motor activation initial process. Thereby, 16 steps are set as the number of steps of the payout motor 174 necessary to pay out one game ball.

Next, with reference to FIG. 65 to FIG. 76, a characteristic portion relating to the payout control in the first embodiment will be described in detail.

FIG. 65 is a time chart showing the excitation method of the payout motor 174 of the first embodiment. The payout motor 174 is a two-phase excitation system and employs a system capable of switching between high current and low current.

As shown in FIG. 65, the payout CPU 301 rotates the payout motor 174 forward by changing the excitation data in the order of t1, t2, t3, and t4. However, in the first embodiment, the payout motor 174 is structurally incapable of reverse rotation.

Here, the position where both “A−” and “B−” of the payout motor 174 are turned on is the origin. In addition, "A+ and B+ (indicated by "S" in the figure)" of the payout motor 174 represents ON/OFF by software control, and "A- and B- (indicated by "H" in the figure)" are software. It represents ON/OFF due to logical inversion of the output.

However, since the first embodiment does not have a conventional detection unit such as an index sensor, it is necessary to perform phase alignment between the apparent origin (excitation data 0) and the structural origin. The phase adjustment of the origin is the origin adjustment, and controlling the payout motor 174 to perform the phase adjustment is called the origin adjustment control.

The origin adjustment control is performed using the first payout operation when the first payout request is made when the origin adjustment is required (when there is a target factor for the origin adjustment). For example, the origin adjustment control is performed by using the payout operation of the first game ball of the requested drop number at the time of the first payout request after the power is turned on.

Here, the payout request is made from the main control circuit 70 to the payout control circuit 300. Specifically, the payout request is transmitted to the payout control circuit 300 as prize ball control data including information such as the number of payout requests. .. As shown in FIG. 66, the payout control circuit 300 receives the prize ball control data from the main control circuit 70 at a reception interrupt.

On the other hand, the payout control circuit 300 transmits the payout error information data to the main control circuit 70, as shown in FIG. 66, when any error occurs in paying out the game balls.

In the first embodiment, the main control circuit 70 and the payout control circuit 300 communicate with each other unilaterally as shown in FIG. 7, but as shown in FIG. 68, the main control circuit 70 and the payout control circuit are shown. You may make it communicate with 300 mutually.

Here, when the main control circuit 70 and the payout control circuit 300 communicate with each other, the serial communication method is used as the most desirable form, but the serial communication method is not limited to the parallel communication method. Various communication methods such as the above can be used.

Further, as shown in FIG. 69, after the payout control circuit 300 detects an error due to self-diagnosis, the main control circuit 70 uses a serial communication method to transmit error information including payout control error information to be described later.

At this time, the minimum transmission interval of error transmission from the payout control circuit 300 is set to a predetermined time (12 ms in the first embodiment), and when the error information continuously changes, as shown in S337. In addition to transmitting error information to the main control circuit 70 each time the error information changes by using a command transmission process that can be executed every 1 ms, as shown in FIG. Then, the error information is transmitted after the minimum transmission interval or the minimum transmission interval has elapsed.

In addition, as a method of synthesizing error information, as shown in FIG. 70, the bit numerical values of parameter 1 and parameter 2 each configured by 8 bits are updated or changed, and the error information is transmitted.

At this time, when the main control circuit 70 receives the parameter 1 and the parameter 2 as the error information, the main control circuit 70 masks each parameter and acquires the error information (payout control error information).

The management of the error information in the payout control circuit 300, the management of the error information in the main control circuit 70, and the management of the error information in the sub control circuit 200 are as shown in FIG.

FIG. 71 shows an error information notification mode in the payout control circuit 300, an error information notification mode in the main control circuit 70, and an error information notification mode in the sub control circuit 200.

Specifically, the lower pan full state in the payout control circuit 300 is recognized by the main control circuit 70 as lower pan full detection, and the sub control circuit 200 detects that the sub control circuit 200 has received the error information from the main control circuit 70. "Please pull out the ball" is notified via the liquid crystal display device 13.

Regarding the ball-out 1 state, the ball-out 2 state, the motor abnormal state, the VL unconnected state, the CR-side communication error, the over-payment error, the pay-out ball clogging, the reception command error, the reception error and the communication error in the payout control circuit 300 Is recognized as a payout abnormality detection in the main control circuit 70, and based on the payout error information transmitted from the main control circuit 70, the sub control circuit informs, via the liquid crystal display device 13, “call a staff member”.

As described above, the main control circuit 70 manages a plurality of pieces of error information relating to the payout control to be transmitted, by classifying the error information into two types of “lower plate full tank error information” and “other information”.

By transmitting and receiving such error information, error ellipses are continuously transmitted at the minimum transmission interval of the payout control circuit 300 in an environment in which the main control circuit 70 and the payout control circuit 300 mutually perform serial communication. It is possible to combine the error information even when the error is changed to "(can be expressed as error information or multiple errors have occurred)".

Therefore, the payout control circuit 300 does not transmit the error information after the main control circuit 70 requests the transmission of the error information (or after a certain transmission request is issued), but the minimum transmission of the payout control circuit 300. It becomes possible to transmit error information at intervals or at predetermined times.

Moreover, although the error information (payout control error information) has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this, and various commands can be combined as commands.

Next, the prize ball control process in the first embodiment will be described. In this prize ball control processing, at least the above-mentioned origin adjustment control, normal payout control, and retry control are performed. First, the origin adjustment control in the prize ball control processing will be described.

As described above, the origin adjustment control is executed when the target factor of the origin adjustment occurs. Here, as a target factor when performing the origin adjustment control using the prize ball control processing, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shipped, when the power is turned on, when power is restored, when an underpayment occurs after completion of the origin adjustment control, Examples include when the stop factor is released, when the payout abnormality factor is released, and when overpay occurs.

When an underpayment occurs after completion of the origin adjustment control, for example, when the payout motor 174 is out of step, or a predetermined number (15 in the first embodiment) of game balls are not guaranteed in the ball supply passage 171. Despite this, there is a case where the 15-ball security switch 172 detects a game ball due to a short circuit and an intermittent state occurs.

The origin adjustment control at the time of releasing the stop factor is performed, for example, as a response to the backflow of the game ball when the lower plate full tank switch 179 is short-circuited. Further, the origin adjustment control at the time of canceling the payout abnormality factor is performed as a countermeasure when the origin is physically displaced due to, for example, disconnection, short circuit, or radio wave irradiation. Further, the origin adjustment control at the time of occurrence of overpay is performed in consideration of the subsequent step-out of the payout motor 174.

In the origin adjustment control, when the payout motor 174 is driven by 16 steps as described above, one gaming ball can be dropped (paid out), so that 4 steps×5 ms as a unit drive amount are driven, It is assumed that the time when the confirmation of the falling ball is completed within the falling ball monitoring time (130 ms=excitation data holding period 30 ms+cooling period 100 ms) is the physical origin (completion of origin adjustment). When the falling ball cannot be confirmed within the falling ball monitoring time, the above-described driving of the payout motor 174 is performed for 16 steps in units of 4 steps.

However, if the falling ball cannot be detected by driving the payout motor 174 for 16 steps, it is determined that the normal payout cannot be performed (or it may be determined that there is a stop factor). The driving of the payout motor 174 in units of four steps is repeated for two rotations.

Further, "the driving of the payout motor 174 is repeated for two rotations" means that the state of the payout motor 174 or the position of the sprocket 173 at the time point when it is determined that the falling ball cannot be detected even if the payout motor 174 is driven. As the rotation start position (or rotation start position), for example, when 48 steps are required for one rotation of the motor, 96 steps are driven.

It can be expressed that this corresponds to a drive capable of dropping 12 balls, and the drive of the payout motor 174 or the sprocket 173 (or the rotational drive or the rotational angle) that can drop a predetermined number of game balls. It can be said that the driving is performed.

The origin adjustment control is completed when a falling ball is detected, but if the falling ball is not counted as a paid game ball, it is overpaid. Therefore, it is necessary to count the falling balls at the completion of the origin adjustment control as the paid game balls.

In view of this, in the first embodiment, the payout CPU 301 subtracts 1 from the requested drop quantity to 14 on the condition that the falling ball is detected by the counting switch 181 while the origin adjustment control is being executed. As a result, upon completion of the origin adjustment control, the remaining required drop number (14) except one is paid out with respect to the required drop number. After that, the normal payout operation is executed.

FIG. 72 is a timing chart of the origin adjustment control using the prize ball control processing. For example, as shown in FIG. 72, when the stop factor is canceled after the power is turned on again and then the payout request is generated, the origin adjustment control is executed, and the excitation data for 4 steps×5 ms is first obtained. Based on, the payout motor 174 is driven for four steps. At this time, the current of the payout motor 174 is switched from the low current to the high current with the start of the origin adjustment control.

After that, when the driving of the payout motor 174 for four steps is completed, the current of the payout motor 174 is maintained at a high current for 30 ms (excitation data holding period). Then, when the excitation data holding period elapses, the current of the payout motor 174 is switched to a low current, and thereafter is maintained at a low current for 100 ms (cooling period).

Further, the falling ball monitoring time (130 ms) is composed of 30 ms (excitation data holding period) and 100 ms (cooling period). The falling ball monitoring time (130 ms) can be calculated based on the free-fall theoretical formula.

After that, when a falling ball is detected by the second counting switch 181B within the falling ball monitoring time (130 ms), the requested drop number, which was 3 when the origin adjustment was started, is updated to 2. Moreover, the origin adjustment control is completed by detecting the falling ball, and the phase shift from the structural origin is eliminated.

FIG. 73 is a timing chart of the origin adjustment retry operation after the origin adjustment is not completed using the prize ball control processing. For example, as shown in FIG. 73, if the operation of driving the payout motor 174 for 4 steps based on the excitation data of 4 steps×5 ms (this is called the origin adjustment cycle) is performed only once, the falling ball is If not detected, the same origin adjustment cycle is repeated up to 16 steps. That is, after the origin adjustment control is started, the origin adjustment cycle is repeated four times in total.

However, if the falling ball cannot be detected even after the origin adjustment cycle has been performed four times, the origin adjustment cycle is repeated four times. Here, the period during which the first four origin adjustment cycles are performed is referred to as a basic retry operation period. The origin adjustment cycle is unit drive amount (4 steps)×5 ms, and the basic retry operation period is unit drive amount (4 steps)×4 times (origin request retry count). In FIG. 73, the operation started when the counting switch counting switch 181 falling ball is not detected during the basic retry operation period is the origin adjustment retry, but the operation is not limited to this and the basic retry operation period is not limited to this. The mode of repeating the process up to the maximum number of times may be the origin adjustment retry.

FIG. 48 is a timing chart of the basic payout operation of the prize ball control processing, that is, the normal payout operation. In addition, FIG. 74 is a timing chart exemplifying a payout operation when paying out 15 game balls.

As shown in FIG. 74, first, when 15 pieces are determined as the requested drop quantity, the drive amount of the payout motor 174 is determined by the payout CPU 301 based on the determined requested drop quantity (15). Specifically, the excitation data necessary for paying out the 15 game balls is determined. The payout CPU 301 that determines the drive amount of the payout motor 174 constitutes a drive amount determination unit.

Next, when the excitation data necessary for the payout of 15 game balls is set, the current of the payout motor 174 is switched to a high current, and the payout motor 174 is driven based on the set excitation data. The excitation data at this time is set such that the payout motor 174 gradually accelerates to a steady state, and then decelerates and stops.

After that, when the driving of the payout motor 174 based on the set excitation data is finished, the current of the payout motor 174 is maintained at a high current for 30 ms (excitation data holding period as a holding period). Then, when the excitation data holding period elapses, the current of the payout motor 174 is switched to a low current, and then is maintained at a low current for 470 ms (cooling period).

Further, the falling ball monitoring time (500 ms) is composed of 30 ms (excitation data holding period) and 470 ms (cooling period). During the falling ball monitoring time (500 ms), the driving of the payout motor 174 is stopped. The falling ball monitoring time (500 ms) at this time is different from the falling ball monitoring time (130 ms) during the origin adjustment control.

Then, during the above-mentioned fall ball monitoring time (500 ms), the payout CPU 301 monitors whether or not the fall of the required number of fall game balls (15 pieces) has been confirmed. That is, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not game balls corresponding to the requested number of drops (15) are detected through the first and second counting switches 181A and 181B during the falling ball monitoring time (500 ms). The payout CPU 301 that makes such a determination constitutes a payout determination means.

When the payout CPU 301 cannot confirm the fall of the requested number (15) of game balls during the above-mentioned fall ball monitoring time (500 ms), that is, the game ball corresponding to the requested drop number (15) is the first. If it is determined that the detection is not performed through the second counting switches 181A and 181B, it is determined that a stop factor has occurred, and the drive of the payout motor 174 is shifted to the idle state to stop the drive thereafter. This makes it impossible to continuously perform the payout operation.

On the other hand, during the above-mentioned fall ball monitoring time (500 ms), even when the fall of the required number of fall (15) game balls can be confirmed, the game machine shifts to the idle state in preparation for the subsequent payout operation.

Here, the excitation data according to the required drop number in the basic payout operation of the prize ball control processing is as shown in FIG. For example, when the requested number of drops is 5 to 15, as shown in FIG. 75(a), the excitation data is the acceleration data and the deceleration data for each two game balls.

75(b) shows the case where the requested drop number is 4, FIG. 75(c) shows the case where the requested drop number is 3, and FIG. 75(d) shows the case where the requested drop number is 2. (E) represents the excitation data when the number of requested drops is one. It should be noted that the falling ball monitoring time (500 ms) described above is provided for any of the requested drop numbers.

FIG. 76 is a timing chart of the payout operation when the retry operation is required during the basic payout operation of the prize ball control processing. Further, FIG. 76 is a timing chart exemplifying a payout operation when paying out five game balls.

As shown in FIG. 76, when the payout operation of the required number of drops (5) is executed, if the game ball related to the fourth payout is not detected by the second counting switch 181B, a drop occurs. When the sphere monitoring time (500 ms) elapses, the number of drop requests (5) is insufficient by one. Thereby, it is determined that the payout CPU 301 cannot confirm the fall of the required number of (5) game balls within the fall ball monitoring time (500 ms).

In this way, when the number of game balls paid out for the requested drop number (5) is insufficient and an underpayment occurs, an origin adjustment retry operation similar to the origin adjustment retry operation after the origin adjustment shown in FIG. 73 is not completed. The action is taken. The contents of this origin adjustment retry operation are the same as those shown in FIG.

Next, the error processing in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 81.

Examples of the error relating to the payout of the game balls in the first embodiment include (1) overpayment, (2) clogging of the payout ball, (3) lower pan full, (4) out of ball, and (5) payout motor abnormality. .. When at least one of these errors occurs, the error is notified via the payout state notification display device 178 (see FIG. 7). Hereinafter, each of these errors will be described in detail.

FIG. 77 is a view showing the payout state notification display device 178. As shown in FIG. 77, the payout state notification display device 178 includes seven segments a to g and an eighth segment DP. Any of these segments a to g and DP is lit according to the error type or the like.

For example, when (1) an error of overpayment is notified, the segment of b is lit, (2) When an error of a dispensed ball clogging is notified, the segment of d is lit, and (3) a lower plate. When notifying the full tank error, the f segment lights up, (4) when the out-of-bulb error is reported, the e segment lights up, and (5) when the payout motor abnormality is reported. Lights the segment c.

The DP segment is turned on when notifying that the ball is being lent. Therefore, the manager of the hall can easily determine what kind of error has occurred by visually checking the lighting state of the segment of the payout state notification display device 178.

First, (1) overpayment is an error that does not cause a stop even if it occurs and can continue the payout operation. As shown in FIG. 78, the trigger of this overpayment error notification is that the number of game balls overpaid after the completion of the payout of the requested drop number is equal to or more than the overpayment prescribed number (10 in the first embodiment). It is the timing when it became.

In FIG. 78, the payout detection signal A is a signal indicating whether or not the game ball is detected by the first counting switch 181A, and is turned on when the game ball is detected. Similarly, the payout detection signal B is a signal indicating whether or not a game ball is detected by the second counting switch 181B.

The overpayment error is canceled when the power is turned on again. That is, the trigger for releasing the overpayment error is when the power is turned on again. At this time, the notification of the overpayment error is also canceled.

Next, (2) payout ball clogging is an error based on a stop factor that occurs due to, for example, ball clogging due to backward flow of game balls, adhesion of dust or foreign matter, or disconnection/short circuit of the counting switch 181. As shown in FIG. 79, for example, when the payout detection signal A of the first counting switch 181A does not turn off 100 ms after turning on, a payout ball clogging occurs, that is, a stop factor occurs. Is judged. When it is determined that this stop factor has occurred, it is an opportunity to inform the error of the disbursed ball.

Note that when the counting switch 181 is short-circuited, the payout control circuit 300 side cannot directly determine whether or not the short-circuit is present, and therefore it cannot be used as a stop factor until the above-described 12 retry operations of the origin adjustment control are completed. Therefore, in such a case, it is judged that the stop factor has occurred after the lapse of the falling ball monitoring time after the retry operation of the origin adjustment control for 12 times is completed.

Further, when the payout control circuit 300 constantly recognizes a change in the voltage that can occur between the counting switch 181 and the short circuit of the counting switch 181, it is possible to recognize or judge the short circuit of the counting switch 181, and an error is detected without performing the try operation. The notification may be performed, or the retry operation may be started at the same time when the error is notified.

Further, the notification of the error of the dispensed ball clogging is canceled by eliminating the above-mentioned factors such as the ball clogging due to the backflow, the adhesion of dust and the mixture of foreign matters, the disconnection/short circuit of the counting switch 181, and the like.

Next, (3) lower plate full tank is an error based on a stop factor that occurs when the game balls stored in the lower plate 22 are full tank. As shown in FIG. 80, for example, when the lower plate full tank switch 179 does not turn off even after one second has elapsed after it was turned on, it is determined that the stop factor due to the lower plate full tank has occurred. When it is determined that this stop factor has occurred, the notification of an error that the lower tray is full is provided.

Further, the notification of the error of the lower tray full is released by discharging the game balls stored in the lower tray 22 in a full tank state.

Next, (4) out of balls, for example, when it is detected by the 15-ball collateral switch 172 that there is a shortage of collateral balls, when the ball tank 161 is waiting to be replenished with game balls, the ball supply passage 171. This is an error based on a stop factor that occurs when a ball is clogged in, or when the 15-ball guarantee switch 172 is in a disconnected state.

The error of the out-of-ball is based on the result of the comparison between the first and second collateral ball counters 305A and 305B and the first and second collateral ball timers 306A and 306B described above. This occurs when the stop factor flag of 1 is set to 1.

The notification of the ball out error is when the above-mentioned stop factor occurs. In addition, the error of this ball out, a predetermined number (15) game balls in the ball supply passage 171 by replenishing the game balls in the ball tank 161 or removing the game balls causing the ball clogging. Is released by being secured. At this time, the notification of the out-of-ball error is also canceled.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81, for (5) the payout motor abnormality, for example, 12 retry operations are executed based on the origin adjustment cycle, and the falling ball monitoring time (130 ms) in the 12th retry operation elapses. Is an error based on a stop factor that occurs when the falling ball cannot be confirmed.

The cause of such a stop factor is, for example, when a sticky gaming ball does not stick to the sprocket 173, when ball squeezing occurs between the sprocket 173 and the storage ball (motor rotation failure), or foreign matter. This may be the case when out-of-step occurs due to motor non-rotation state (only the excitation data is updated) such as mixing.

As shown in FIG. 81, the notification of the payout motor abnormality is when the above-mentioned stop factor occurs. The abnormality of the payout motor is canceled when the power is turned on again. That is, the trigger for canceling the payout motor abnormality is when the power is turned on again. At this time, the notification of the payout motor abnormality is also canceled.

Next, with reference to FIG. 82, a reception process of the payout control circuit 300 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment is powered off will be described.

As shown in FIG. 82, when the XINT interrupt (power interruption) at the time of power failure occurs as a non-maskable interrupt before the reception interrupt on the payout control circuit 300 side, the reception data is polled in the XINT interrupt to 1 byte. To rescue.

Further, assuming that the power cutoff occurs immediately after writing to the transmission buffer by the main control circuit 70, the payout control circuit 300 side can receive data after a delay of the baud rate time even while the XINT interrupt is being processed. As described above, it is preferable to consider the elapsed time for receiving in the XINT interrupt. However, it is a condition that XINT of the power interruption process of the payout control circuit 300 does not occur earlier than the main control circuit 70 electrically.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the value of the first and second collateral ball timers 306A and 306B (first value), respectively, on condition that the payout of gaming balls has started. Also, the values (second value) of the first and second collateral ball counters 305A and 305B are updated.

Therefore, if the first and second 15-ball guarantee switches 172A and 172B continuously detect the game ball after the game ball is started to be paid out, when the first value becomes 0, The second value smaller than the first value is already 0. In this case, it is guaranteed that the game balls have been supplied according to the payout of the game balls.

On the other hand, if the second value is not 0 when the first value is 0, it means that the game balls have not been supplied according to the payout of the game balls due to some factor.

Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment compares the updated first value and the updated second value to determine whether or not the supply of the game balls has been correctly performed according to the payout of the game balls. Can be judged.

As a result, for example, as compared with the case where it is determined whether or not the game ball is being replenished based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the first and second 15 ball guarantee switches 172A and 172B, the first and second balls are compared. It is possible to accurately manage and guarantee the game balls accumulated in the ball supply passages 171A and 171B.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment prohibits the payout of the game balls when the second value is not 0 when the first value is 0, so the first and second ball supply passages 171A. , 171B, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is an abnormality related to the supply of game balls. As a result, it is possible to further improve the security regarding the supply and the payout of the game balls.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, even when it is once guaranteed that the second value becomes 0 when the first value is 0 and the supply of the game ball is performed, After that, until the game balls are paid out, the game balls are paid out excessively due to, for example, a malfunction of the first and second sprockets 173A, 173B, and the like in the first and second ball supply passages 171A, 171B. When the number of game balls has decreased, the payout of game balls can be prohibited.

As a result, the game balls in the first and second ball supply passages 171A and 171B can be managed more accurately, and the security regarding the supply and the payout of the game balls can be further improved.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment executes a retry control in which the payout motor 174 is driven by a unit drive amount (4 steps) until the game ball is detected by the first and second counting switches 181A and 181B. Therefore, for example, a retry operation for eliminating ball catching can be performed without providing a slit sensor or the like for detecting the driving positions of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B.

Further, when such a retry operation is performed, the driving positions of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B when the first and second counting switches 181A and 181B detect a game ball should be adjusted as the origin. Therefore, the origins of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B can be adjusted without using a slit sensor or the like.

Thus, the retry operation can be used not only when the ball is bitten but also when adjusting the origin, so that the retry control can be made versatile, and as a result, the processing by the payout CPU 301 can be simplified. ..

Further, since the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment is not provided with the slit sensor or the like, the pachinko gaming machine can have a simple and low-cost configuration.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the unit driving amount (4 steps) of the payout motor 174 at the time of executing the retry control causes the first and second counting switches 181A and 181B to pay out one gaming ball. Since it is less than the payout drive amount (16 steps) required to pay out the next game ball, the first and second counting switches 181A and 181B are divided into a plurality of times to pay out one game ball. Can be driven. As a result, for example, when the ball is biting or the like, it can be eliminated, and when the origin is adjusted, the origin can be accurately adjusted.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, when the above-mentioned unit drive amount (4 steps) is a drive amount obtained by dividing the payout drive amount (16 steps) into four times, one gaming ball is paid out. The number of times the payout motor 174 is driven can be divided into a plurality of times.

Further, in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the first embodiment, when the game ball is not detected by the first and second counting switches 181A and 181B and the drive amount of the payout motor 174 exceeds the upper limit drive amount (192 steps). The dispensing means can be stopped until the initialization operation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the prize ball case unit 170 from being defective due to excessive repetition of the retry operation.

Further, since the payout motor 174 is stopped until the initialization operation is performed, by stopping the payout motor 174, for example, there is no game ball accumulated in the first and second ball supply passages 171A and 171B. It is possible to urge that the prize ball case unit 170 and thus the pachinko gaming machine 1 need to be returned from an abnormal state.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment performs the origin adjustment control (retry control) when it is determined that the payout of the game balls is prohibited, that is, when the stop factor flag is set to 1, so that there is some abnormality. As a result, the retry operation can be always performed after the driving of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B is stopped.

In this way, by performing the retry operation in conjunction with the driving stop of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B, it is possible to smoothly perform the processing as compared with the case where the retry operation is performed alone.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment executes the retry operation in the origin adjustment control (retry control) until the game ball is detected by the first or second counting switch 181A, 181B and the motor operation number. Is managed as the number of retries, the number of retries is updated as the number of retries, so it is possible to reliably determine how many retries are performed regardless of whether or not the game ball is detected by the first or second counting switch 181A, 181B. , And can be easily grasped. In addition, the number of retry operations can be reliably and easily grasped without providing a slit sensor or the like. As a result, the retry operation can be managed smoothly.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, when the game ball is not detected by the first or second counting switches 181A and 181B and the number of retries exceeds the upper limit number (12 times), the origin adjustment control (retry) is performed. Since the control is ended, it is possible to prevent the prize ball case unit 170 from being defective due to excessive repetition of the retry operation.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment compares the total number of game balls actually paid out with the requested payout number, and as a result of the comparison, the total number of game balls actually paid out and the requested payout number. If there is a difference between and, it can be understood as an overpayment of the game ball.

Further, when the above-mentioned overpaid difference becomes equal to or larger than the allowable value (10), the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B are stopped until the initialization operation is performed. When there is an unnatural overpayment, further overpayment can be prevented.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, when overpayment occurs, the overpayment which is the difference between the total number of gaming balls actually paid out and the required number of payouts until the initialization operation is performed. The number of such game balls can be accumulated.

As a result, it is possible to reliably detect the fact of unnatural overpayment caused by fraud and the like and the amount of unnecessary game balls paid out (the number of prize balls and the number of lent balls) caused by the overpayment.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, during the falling ball monitoring time after the payout motor 174 is driven, the gaming balls corresponding to the requested number of drops are moved by the first or second counting switches 181A and 181B. Since it is determined whether or not it is detected, the payout motor 174 can be cooled during the fall ball monitoring time, and at the same time, it is confirmed whether or not the game balls corresponding to the drop required number have been paid out. You can Therefore, it is possible to efficiently manage the payout amount (the number of prize balls and the number of balls to lend) while ensuring a sufficient cooling period of the payout motor 174.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the falling ball monitoring time after driving the payout motor 174 is a holding period for holding the postures of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B and the payout motor 174. The cooling period of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B can be maintained after the payout motor 174 is stopped, and the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B are driven by inertial force. It is possible to prevent excessive rotation. Further, the payout motor 174 can be cooled by providing the cooling period.

Further, when the game balls corresponding to the requested number of drops during the holding period and the cooling period are not detected by the first or second counting switches 181A and 181B, the driving of the payout motor 174 is stopped. The driving of the payout motor 174 can be efficiently managed by utilizing the cooling period.

(Embodiment 2)
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 87.

The second embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in that it has a real-time clock 80, but other configurations are substantially the same. Therefore, in the following, description of the same configurations as those of the first embodiment will be omitted, and only the differences from the first embodiment will be described.

FIG. 83 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 83, in the second embodiment, the sub control circuit 200 includes a real time clock 80. The real-time clock 80 is connected to the sub CPU 201.

Here, the real-time clock 80 is a device capable of specifying the current “year (year)”, “month”, “day”, “day of the week”, “hour”, “minute”, and “second”. Is. The real-time clock 80 is realized as a serial interface type real-time clock module having a built-in crystal oscillator. Since the sub CPU 201 is connected to the real time clock 80, the time information specified by the real time clock 80 can be acquired by the sub CPU 201. The real-time clock 80 operates by the power source when the power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, and when the power is turned off, the backup power source or an independent power source such as a button battery that is supplied even at the time of power failure. Works by. Therefore, the real-time clock 80 can specify the current time even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off.

As described above, in the second embodiment, since the real-time clock 80 is provided, various effects corresponding to the current time can be performed.

[Point addition table]
In the first embodiment, it is possible to add points according to the lottery using the point addition table stored in the program ROM 202, and to shift to the “first high probability state” according to the accumulated points. It was

In the second embodiment as well, as in the first embodiment, the point addition table is stored in the program ROM 202, but the point addition table corresponds to different times for each character displayed for each decided effect content. The points to be added are different depending on the time. As a result, the points that are added when the game is lost will differ depending on the characters displayed according to the time of the game and the effect. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game with a change, and the enjoyment of the game is improved.

The point addition table of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing an example of the point addition table of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment.

In the second embodiment, there are a plurality of characters (characters A to C) depending on the effect contents of the loser reach effect. That is, there are a plurality of lost reach effects corresponding to a plurality of characters. In addition, when the time corresponding to each character is fixed and the loser reach effect is performed by the character corresponding to the time during the game, it is added more than when the loser reach effect of another character is being performed. It is easy to increase the number of points. Therefore, it can be said that the probability of shifting to the “first high probability state” is high. Therefore, if the character corresponding to the time when the game is played is displayed in the effect, it can be said that it is advantageous for the player as compared with the case where another character is displayed.

For example, character A corresponds to 8:00 to 12:59, character B corresponds to 13:00 to 17:59, and character C corresponds to 18:00 to 23:59. Here, the effects of which the variation pattern commands are “83H02H” and “83H03H” are lost reach effects. The sub-control circuit 200 receiving this variation pattern command determines by drawing a detailed content of the reach effect, that is, which of the characters A to C is displayed. The probabilities that the characters A to C are displayed may be the same (all 1/3). As shown in FIG. 84, in the random number value “9” in “83H02H” and all the random number values in “83H03H”, the points to be added are different depending on the relationship between the character displayed by the effect and the game time. For example, when the variation pattern command is “83H02H”, the acquired random number value is “9”, and the character A is displayed in the “second high probability state”, the time is from 8:00 to 12:59. If so, the points to be added are 50, but at other times, the points to be added are 20. Similarly, when the character B is displayed in the “second high probability state”, the point to be added is 50 if the time is from 13:00 to 17:59, but is added at any other time. The point is 20. Similarly, when the character C is displayed in the “second high probability state”, the point to be added is 50 if the time is from 18:00 to 23:59, but is added at any other time. The point is 20. The same applies when the variation pattern command is "83H03H". Further, the "normal game state" is similar to the case of the "second high probability state", but as in the first embodiment, the "second high probability state" is set so that points are more likely to be accumulated.

Further, similarly to the first embodiment, the stop symbol/effect content determination process may be performed according to the points determined using the point addition table (see S1072 in FIG. 43).

As described above, the point addition is made different by associating the time with the displayed character, but the time and the displayed character are associated with each other and the number of times of navigation given is different instead of the point. May be In other words, the time corresponding to the character is predetermined, and for example, when the character corresponding to the time when playing a game is selected, a big hit time navigation lottery table different from that used at other times It is assumed that the number of times of navigation that can be given is greater in the big hit navigation lottery table than in the case of using at other times. As a result, the number of times of navigating is increased, and the probability of navigating is inevitably increased. Note that, in addition to determining the number of times of navigating by lottery, it is conceivable that the probability of navigating whether or not navigating is determined by lottery.
Further, in the first embodiment, in the lost super reach B, the lottery in which the navigation is given with a probability of 1/10 is performed, but in the second embodiment, such a lottery may be performed. Further, in the lost super reach A, a lottery in which navigation is given may be performed. Furthermore, as described above, the winning probability may change depending on the time and the displayed character. This case will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an example of a lost super-reach lottery table of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 85, when the displayed character corresponds to the time, the probability of winning the navigation is higher than when the displayed character does not correspond to the time. Also, the number of navigations provided is increasing. As described above, since the player has different advantages and disadvantages depending on the time, the player expects that the player will be in an advantageous state, and the player enjoys the game. Note that FIG. 85 shows the case of Loss Super Reach A, but similarly in the case of Loss Super Reach B, the probability of winning the navigation and the number of navigations to be given are determined by the combination of the displayed character and the time. May be changed.
Although the probabilities of displaying the characters A to C are the same as each other, they may be different. For example, the probability that the character corresponding to that time is displayed may be lower than 1/3.

Next, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87, particularly only processes including steps different from those of the first embodiment.

[Timer interrupt processing]
First, with reference to FIG. 86, a timer interrupt process by the sub CPU 201 according to the second embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 86, the point that the process of S1301 is added between the process of S1023 and the process of S1024 is different from the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 38) of the first embodiment. Since the other points are the same as those of the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

When the process of S1023 ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to S1301. In step S1301, the sub CPU 201 performs time management processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of acquiring and updating data on the standard time serving as a reference from the real-time clock 80. When this process ends, the process moves to S1024.

Thereby, in the second embodiment, various effects using the standard time can be performed. For example, a predetermined process can be executed at a specific time. As a result, it is possible to give a bonus to the player or perform a special effect at a specific time, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[First high-probability state effect determination process]
With reference to FIG. 87, the first high-probability state mid-stage effect determination process by the sub CPU 201 according to the second embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 87, the point that the process of S1302 is added after the process of S1129 is different from the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 46) of the first embodiment. Since the other points are the same as those of the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

When the process of S1129 ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to S1302. In S1302, the sub CPU 201 performs an all-day navigation lottery based on the time. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 has a probability of 1/20 when the character displayed by the effect based on the standard time acquired from the real-time clock 80 is the character corresponding to the current time, and the “fourth high probability state”. The lottery for "." is performed, and if the player wins, the fourth high probability state flag is set. If the displayed character is not the character corresponding to the current time, this transition lottery may not be performed. When the displayed character is not the character corresponding to the current time, the transition lottery may be performed with a probability lower than the winning probability when the displayed character is the character corresponding to the current time. .. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

The set time flag may be set when the time set in advance by the real-time clock 80 is reached regardless of the displayed character. Then, if the first hit after the set time flag is set is the "big hit" of the special figure (1)-12, there is a 1/1 probability to win the "4th high probability state" and the "4th high probability state". It is sufficient to shift to the “high probability state”. In addition, when the set time flag is set, the set time flag will be turned off regardless of the first hit, and the subsequent hits will be the "big hit" in special figure (1)-12. May win the “fourth high probability state” with a probability of 1/10 and shift to the “fourth high probability state”.
As a result, there is a possibility that so-called all-day navigation can be obtained even when the RAM is not cleared or the power is turned on. Therefore, even if the player does not immediately open the store, he or she expects navigation all day long and enjoys the game. In addition, since it is possible to obtain navigation all day without RAM clearing work or power-on work, the amount of work on the hall side can be reduced, and an increase in the number of customers can be expected.

Further, for example, by setting the real-time clock 80 so that the navigation can be acquired all day once a day, a 24-hour navigation in which the entire navigation state continues for 24 hours can be realized. In other words, after closing the store, the navigation continues all day after the next day. As a result, the player is less likely to feel unfair, and an increase in the number of customers can be expected.

Further, for example, a high-probability game state other than the above may be provided in the “normal game state”, and at least a part of the high-probability state may be easily provided with navigation at a specific time using the real-time clock 80. In other words, it is sufficient to have a high-probability game state in which the ease with which navigation is given changes depending on the time.
For example, it is assumed that the characters A to C are also displayed with a probability of 1/3 in the production in the “first high probability state”, which is a big hit of special figures (1)-8 to special figures (1)-11. However, if the displayed character is a character corresponding to the current time, it may be possible to shift to the “fourth high probability state”.
Further, for example, in the “first high probability state”, if the displayed character is not a character corresponding to the current time even if it is a big hit of special maps (1)-1 to (1)-7 , Navigation may not be given, and if the displayed character is a character corresponding to the current time, there is a higher probability than if the displayed character is not a character corresponding to the current time. Navigation may be added in. The character displayed in the effect in the "first high probability state" may be different from the characters (characters A to C) in the loser reach effect.

(Embodiment 3)
Next, a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 93.

Note that the third embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the payout destination (movement destination) of the game ball by the sprocket 173 can be switched, but the other configurations are substantially the same. ing. Therefore, in the following, description of the same configurations as those of the first embodiment will be omitted, and only the differences from the first embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 88, the prize ball case unit 170 according to the third embodiment has a first payout passage 180A and a second payout passage 180B as in the first embodiment, and each of these passages has a two-row structure. Therefore, the configuration is similar. Therefore, the structure of the first dispensing passage 180A will be described as an example.

The first payout passage 180A of the third embodiment is a first ball passage 401A for paying out (or guiding, supplying, circulating) the game balls into the pachinko gaming machine (for example, the upper plate 21 or the like). And a second ball passage 402A for guiding (moving) (or delivering, supplying, circulating) a game ball to the outside of a pachinko gaming machine (for example, a ball circulation path of an island management facility). ..

Here, the island management facility is a device that can be connected to a plurality or a single gaming machine and a gaming device (for example, a sand, a counter for each unit, a data display, etc.) provided for the gaming machine. Is a management device for managing the state of a game ball or a gaming machine, and is usually connected to a facility for managing a game hall called a hall computer (for example, a computer or a data management device). Data is transmitted by aggregating information about gaming machines.

Here, the ball circulation path is a facility that allows the game balls to be shared among a plurality of or single gaming machines provided in the island management device, and the ball circulation path can be independently driven as a ball circulation device. The island management device does not have to be provided, and may be provided in the game machine, or may be a device that circulates game balls in the game machine.

The second payout passage 180B also has a first ball passage 401B and a second ball passage 402B. Hereinafter, the first ball passage 401A and the first ball passage 401B are collectively referred to as "first ball passage 401", and the second ball passage 402A and the second ball passage 402B are collectively referred to as "first ball passage 402A". 2 ball passage 402".

Further, the first ball passage 401A is provided with a first counting switch 481A as first detecting means for detecting a game ball passing through the first ball passage 401A, and the second ball passage 402A is provided. , A first ball-removing switch 482A as a second detecting means that passes through the second ball passage 402A.

A second counting switch 481B and a second ball removing switch 482B are similarly provided for the first ball passage 401B and the second ball passage 402B. The first counting switch 481A and the second counting switch 481B are collectively referred to as "counting switch 481", and the first ball-removing switch 482A and the second ball-removing switch 482B are collectively referred to as "ball-removing switch 482". There is a thing.

Further, the payout passage 180, more specifically, between the first ball passage 401 and the second ball passage 402, the payout destination of the game balls by the sprocket 173 is the first ball passage 401 and the second ball passage. First and second flappers 400A and 400B as passage switching means controlled by the payout CPU 301 are provided so as to switch to either one of 402. The first and second flappers 400A and 400B may be collectively referred to as "flapper 400".

The flapper 400 has a flapper drive device 410 (see FIG. 89), and the drive of the flapper drive device 410 is controlled by the payout CPU 301, so that the flapper 400 can rotate in the arrow direction in the figure.

Specifically, the flapper 400 has a position where the payout destination of the game ball is on the side of the second ball passage 402 (a position shown by a broken line in the figure) and a payout destination of the game ball is on the side of the first ball passage 401. It is adapted to rotate between the position (the position shown by the solid line in the figure).

Next, as shown in FIG. 89, in the payout control circuit 300 of the third embodiment, the above-described first counting switch 481A, second counting switch 481B, first ball removal switch 482A, second ball removal switch. The switch 482B and the flapper drive device 410 are connected. Although the flapper drive device 410 is common to the first flapper 400A and the second flapper 400B, it may be provided separately.

In addition, when the payout CPU 301 of the third embodiment executes the above-described retry operation in a state in which the number of prize balls and the number of lent balls (payout amount) stored in the RAM 303 of the payout control circuit 300 are not present, The flapper 400 is switched via the flapper drive device 410 so that the payout destination becomes the second ball passage 402.

Further, when the payout CPU 301 of the third embodiment executes the retry operation with the flapper 400 switched so that the payout destination of the game ball is the second ball passage 402, the game ball is switched by the ball removal switch 482. The retry operation is ended on the condition that it is detected.

Next, with reference to FIG. 90 to FIG. 93, contents of various processes executed by the payout CPU 301 of the payout control circuit 300, particularly, only processes including steps different from those of the first embodiment will be described.

[System timer interrupt processing (1 ms)]
First, with reference to FIG. 90, a system timer interrupt process by the payout CPU 301 of the third embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 90, in the system timer interrupt process of the third embodiment, each step of S431 to S435 is the same as S331 to S335 of the system timer interrupt process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 59), and therefore these steps are performed. Is omitted.

After the process of S435 is completed, the payout CPU 301 executes a motor drive process described later (S436) and then executes an origin adjustment excitation data setting process (S437). After that, the payout CPU 301 executes the command transmission process (S438) and ends the system timer interrupt process. The command transmission process (S438) of the third embodiment is similar to the command transmission process (S337) of the first embodiment.

[Count switch detection processing]
First, with reference to FIG. 91, the counting switch detection processing performed in S435 in the system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 90) of the third embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 91, in the count switch detection process of the third embodiment, each step of S481 to S490 is the same as S381 to S390 of the count switch detection process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 62 ), and therefore these steps are performed. Is omitted.

When S481 is NO determination, S487 is NO determination, S489 is NO determination, or after the end of S490, the payout CPU 301 determines that the first ball removal switch 482A or the second ball removal switch 482B is a game ball. It is determined whether or not the passage has been detected (S491).

When the payout CPU 301 determines in S491 that the first ball removal switch 482A or the second ball removal switch 482B does not detect the passage of the game ball (when NO is determined in S491), the payout CPU 301, The counting switch detection process ends.

On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S491 that the first ball removal switch 482A or the second ball removal switch 482B detects passage of the game ball (when YES is determined in S491), the payout CPU 301 It is determined whether or not the origin adjustment flag is 1 (S492).

In S492, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment flag is not 1 (NO in S492), the payout CPU 301 ends the counting switch detection process.

On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S492 that the origin adjustment flag is 1 (YES in S492), the payout CPU 301 sets the origin adjustment flag to 0 (S493).

Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the origin adjustment completion flag to 1 (S494). Then, the payout CPU 301 controls the flapper drive device 410 to automatically switch the first and second flappers 400A, 400B to the first ball passages 401A, 401B side (payout side) (S495), and the counting switch. The detection process ends.

[Motor drive processing]
First, with reference to FIG. 92, the motor drive processing performed in S436 in the system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 90) of the third embodiment will be described.

First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether the first or second stop factor flag is 1 (S501).

When the payout CPU 301 determines in S501 that the first or second stop factor flag is 1 (YES in S501), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a stop factor, and drives the motor. The process ends.

On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S501 that neither of the first or second stop factor flags is 1 (NO in S501), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no stop factor. Then, it is determined whether or not the first or second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (S502).

In S502, when the payout CPU 301 determines that neither of the first or second falling ball confirmation flags is 1 (when NO is determined in S502), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no guarantee ball, and The drive processing ends.

On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S502 that the first or second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (YES in S502), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a collateral ball and pays out. It is determined whether the requested number is larger than 0 (S503).

In S503, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of payout requests is not greater than 0 (NO in S503), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no payout request and ends the motor drive process.

On the other hand, in S503, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of payout requests is larger than 0 (YES in S503), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a payout request and executes the motor start-up initial process ( S504). Since the motor start-up initial processing is the same as that of the first embodiment, its explanation is omitted.

Next, the payout CPU 301 performs a startup state setting process for the payout motor 174 (S505). In this process, the payout CPU 301 does not perform the origin adjustment control, and thus sets the acceleration state of the payout motor 174 or the like according to the requested drop number so that the normal game balls are paid out.

After that, the payout CPU 301 sets the excitation data of the payout motor 174 (S506). In this process, the payout CPU 301 pays out the normal game balls, and sets the excitation data for a predetermined number of steps as the drive amount necessary to pay out the required number of game balls.

Next, the payout CPU 301 sets "1" in the payout control flag (S507), and ends the motor drive process. Here, the payout control flag is a flag that is set to "0" or "1" depending on whether to switch the flapper 400, and is set to "1" when switching the flapper 400, This flag is set to "0" when the flapper 400 is not switched.

[Origin adjustment excitation data setting process]
First, the origin adjustment excitation data setting process performed in S437 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 90) of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the origin adjustment flag is 1 (S511). In S511, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment flag is not 1 (NO in S511), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no request for origin adjustment control, and ends the origin adjustment excitation data setting process. To do. Therefore, when S511 is NO, the origin adjustment control is not performed.

On the other hand, if the payout CPU 301 determines in S511 that the origin adjustment flag is 1 (YES in S511), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a request for origin adjustment control, and the retry count is 12 or more. It is determined whether or not it is larger, that is, whether or not the origin adjustment control has been performed 12 times (S512). Therefore, if S511 is YES, the origin adjustment control is performed.

In S512, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of retries is greater than 12 (YES in S512), the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of times of origin adjustment control has reached the upper limit number (12 times). Then, the process proceeds to S513.

In S513, the payout CPU 301 sets the starting state of the payout motor 174 (S513), and moves the process to S523. In this process, the payout CPU 301 sets the payout motor 174 to the idle state in order to stop the payout of the game balls.

On the other hand, if the payout CPU 301 determines in S512 that the number of retries is not greater than 12 (NO in S512), the payout CPU 301 resets the starting state of the payout motor 174 (S514).

Next, the payout CPU 301 resets the excitation data (S515) and determines whether the payout control flag is 1 (S516). In S516, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the payout control flag is not 1 (NO in S516), the payout CPU 301 determines that switching between the first and second flappers 400A and 400B is unnecessary. Then, the process proceeds to S518. In this case, the switching between the first and second flappers 400A and 400B is not performed, and the payout destination of the game ball is maintained on the first ball passage 401A and 401B side (payout side).

On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S516 that the payout control flag is 1 (YES in S516), the payout CPU 301 needs to switch between the first and second flappers 400A and 400B. Then, the flapper driving device 410 is controlled to automatically switch the first and second flappers 400A and 400B to the second ball passages 402A and 402B side (ball-removing side) (S517).

Next, when the determination in S516 is NO, or after the end of S517, the payout CPU 301 sets the step counter mask value to 4 steps in preparation for the origin adjustment control (S518). In this process, 4 steps are set as the unit drive amount of the payout motor 174 when executing the origin adjustment control.

Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the motor operation number to 1 (S519), and sets the origin request retry count to 4 (S520). In this processing, by multiplying the 4 steps set as the step counter mask value in S518 described above by 4 times set as the origin request retry count, the payout drive amount necessary for paying out one game ball is obtained. 16 steps are set.

Next, the payout CPU 301 clears the value of the falling ball monitoring timer to 0 (S521). The falling ball monitoring timer is the same as in the first embodiment. Next, the payout CPU 301 sets "0" to the origin adjustment completion flag (S522).

Next, after the end of S513 or the end of S522, the payout CPU 301 sets the excitation data of the payout motor 174 (S523), and ends the origin adjustment excitation data setting process. In this process, for example, when performing the origin adjustment control, the excitation data for 16 steps is set as the payout drive amount necessary for paying out one game ball.

Further, when paying out the normal game balls, the excitation data for a predetermined step is set as the drive amount required to pay out the required number of game balls. The excitation data is set to 0 when the payout motor 174 is set to the idle state so that the payout of the game balls is stopped.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment has the following effects in addition to the effects of the first embodiment.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, in each of the first and second payout passages 180A and 180B, the payout destination of the game ball is either the first ball passage 401 or the second ball passage 402. Since the flapper 400 for switching to one side is provided, the origin adjustment control (retry control) is executed when the game ball is paid out to the outside of the game machine, for example, when the game ball is rented out or at the time of a prize ball. At times, the payout destination of the game balls by the sprocket 173 can be switched to the first ball passage 401 by the flapper 400.

On the other hand, when executing the origin adjustment control (retry control) without paying out the game ball to the outside of the gaming machine, the game ball payout destination by the sprocket 173 is switched to the second ball passage 402 by the flapper 400. You can As a result, overpayment of the game ball due to the origin adjustment control (retry control) is prevented.

Therefore, by switching to either the first ball passage 401 or the second ball passage 402 by the flapper 400, the origin adjustment control (retry control) is executed regardless of whether or not the game ball is paid out to the outside of the gaming machine. be able to.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, when the origin adjustment control (retry control) is executed in a state where the payout amount (the number of prize balls and the number of loan balls) stored in the RAM 303 of the payout control circuit 300 is not present. When the origin adjustment control (retry control) is executed without paying out the game ball to the outside of the gaming machine, because the flapper 400 is switched so that the payout destination of the game ball by the sprocket 173 becomes the second ball passage 402. Even with this, it is possible to prevent overpayment of the game ball by the sprocket 173.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment ends the origin adjustment control (retry control) on the condition that the ball removal switch 482 detects the game ball, so the payout amount (the number of prize balls and Even if the origin adjustment control (retry control) is executed in the state where there is no lending ball, the game ball is not detected by the counting switch 481.

Therefore, the game balls paid out from the sprocket 173 are paid out to the outside of the gaming machine by the origin adjustment control (retry control) executed in the state where the payout amount (the number of prize balls and the number of lent balls) stored in the RAM 303 does not exist. It is possible to prevent it from being detected as a game ball. As a result, the range of operation of the origin adjustment control (retry control) can be expanded.

(Embodiment 4)
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 96.

Note that, in the fourth embodiment, the first embodiment is particularly referred to after the origin adjustment control is completed, and the remaining drop request number obtained by subtracting one ball from the drop request number (for example, if the number before drop is 15, the remaining drop request number is the remaining drop request number. 14 game balls are paid out, but the other configurations are configured in substantially the same manner.

Therefore, in the following, description of the same configurations as those of the first embodiment will be omitted, and only the differences from the first embodiment will be described. Specifically, only the processing different from that of the first embodiment will be described. Note that the processes other than the processes described below (for example, the system timer interrupt process) are the same as the processes in the first embodiment.

[Count switch detection processing]
First, with reference to FIG. 94, the counting switch detection processing performed in S335 during the system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 59) similar to that of the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the counting switch detection process according to the fourth embodiment.

First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the first counting switch 181A or the second counting switch 181B detects passage of a game ball (S581). In S581, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first counting switch 181A or the second counting switch 181B does not detect the passage of the game ball (when NO is determined in S581), the payout CPU 301 determines the counting switch. The detection process ends. Here, when the origin adjustment control is being performed, since the game ball is not yet detected by the first counting switch 181A or the second counting switch 181B, S581 becomes NO determination.

On the other hand, in S581, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first counting switch 181A or the second counting switch 181B detects the passage of the game ball (when YES is determined in S581), the payout CPU 301 requests the drop. The number is subtracted by "1" (S582).

That is, the payout CPU 301 updates the requested drop number on the condition that the game ball is detected by the first counting switch 181A or the second counting switch 181B. The payout CPU 301 that performs such updating constitutes a partitioned payout amount updating means.

Here, in the fourth embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the payout request number is not subtracted in the counting switch detection processing. When the drop request number is determined (set) in S627 in the motor start-up initial processing (see FIG. 96) described later, the payout request number is equal to the number of game balls corresponding to the determined (set) drop request number. Has been subtracted.

In other words, the payout CPU 301 subtracts the number of game balls for the determined (set) drop request number from the payout request number when the drop request number is determined (set). There is. The payout CPU 301 that performs such subtraction of the game balls constitutes a subtraction unit.

Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the origin adjustment flag is 1 (S583). If the payout CPU 301 determines in S583 that the origin adjustment flag is not 1 (NO in S583), the payout CPU 301 ends the counting switch detection process.

On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S583 that the origin adjustment flag is 1 (YES in S583), the payout CPU 301 sets the origin adjustment flag to 0 (S584).

Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the origin adjustment completion flag to 1 (S585). After that, the payout CPU 301 sets the flag after execution of origin adjustment to 1 (S586), and ends the counting switch detection processing.

Here, the origin adjustment post-execution flag is a flag that is set to "0" or "1" depending on whether the origin adjustment control is executed or not (is not executed). Is a flag that is set to "1" after execution of, and set to "0" before execution of origin adjustment control.

[Motor start wait processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the motor start waiting process performed in S336 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 59) similar to that of the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the motor activation waiting process according to the fourth embodiment.

First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the origin adjustment completion flag is 1 (S601). If the payout CPU 301 determines in S601 that the origin adjustment completion flag is not 1 (NO in S601), the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment control is being performed, and moves the process to S605.

On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S601 that the origin adjustment completion flag is 1 (when YES is determined in S601), the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment control is completed, Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the second stop factor flag is 1 (S602).

When the payout CPU 301 determines in S602 that the first or second stop factor flag is 1 (YES in S602), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a stop factor and starts the motor. The waiting process ends.

On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S602 that neither of the first or second stop factor flags is 1 (NO in S602), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no stop factor. Then, it is determined whether or not the first or second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (S603).

In S603, when the payout CPU 301 determines that neither the first or the second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (when the determination in S603 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no guarantee ball, and the motor The startup waiting process ends.

On the other hand, in S603, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first or second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (when YES is determined in S603), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a collateral ball, and will be described later. The motor starting initial processing (see FIG. 96) is executed (S604). In the fourth embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, it is not determined whether or not the payout request number is greater than 0.

Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, a payout request flag described later is set, and whether or not there is a payout request from the main control circuit 70 to the payout control circuit 300 is determined by the payout request flag. The payout request flag is transmitted at the same time, for example, when the main control circuit 70 sends the payout control circuit 300 information on the number of payout requests. The payout request flag is set to "1" when there is a payout request, and to "0" when there is no payout request.

Here, since the processing of S605 to S613 is the same as the processing of S406 to S414 in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

[Initial motor startup processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the motor start-up initial process executed in S604 during the motor start-up waiting process (see FIG. 95) of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the motor start-up initial processing according to the fourth embodiment.

First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether the post-origin adjustment execution flag is 1 (S621). When the payout CPU 301 determines in S621 that the origin adjustment post-execution flag is not 1 (NO in S621), the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment control has not been performed (or has not been performed). , And moves the processing to S623.

On the other hand, in S621, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the post-origin adjustment execution flag is 1 (YES in S621), the payout CPU 301 determines that the post-origin adjustment control has been performed, and falls. It is determined whether the requested number is 0 or less (S622).

When the payout CPU 301 determines in S622 that the requested drop number is not 0 or less (NO in S622), the payout CPU 301 keeps the requested drop number as it is, that is, the counting switch detection process (see FIG. 94). The process proceeds to S628 with the number of requested drops after the subtraction of "1" in S582.

On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S622 that the requested drop quantity is 0 or less (when YES is determined in S622), the payout CPU 301 resets (or initializes) the requested drop quantity. The value of the drop request number is returned to the payout request number (S623).

For example, the payout CPU 301 subtracts “1” from the payout request quantity that has already been subtracted by the drop request quantity when the value of the drop request quantity becomes “−1” due to the overpayment of the game ball.

That is, the payout CPU 301 reflects the number of drop requests (“-1” for overpayment) after subtracting “1” in S582 of the counting switch detection process (see FIG. 94) described above in the number of payout requests. The payout CPU 301 that performs such reflection constitutes a reflection means. When the process of S623 is performed for the first time (first time), both the payout request number and the drop request number are “0”.

Here, the payout CPU 301 determines that, when all the game balls corresponding to the payout request number have been paid out, the drop request number after “1” is subtracted in S582 of the counting switch detection process (see FIG. 94) is “ When it is not "0", it is determined that a payout error has occurred. The payout CPU 301 that makes such a determination constitutes a payout error determination means.

For example, when the required number of game balls is paid out and the number of requested drop after subtraction is larger than "0", it can be determined that a payout error due to underpayment has occurred.

On the other hand, when the required number of game balls has been paid out and the number of drop requests after subtraction is smaller than "0", it can be determined that a payout error due to overpayment has occurred.

Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the requested payout number is smaller than “−10” (S624). That is, the payout CPU 301 determines whether the number of overpays has reached 10 or more.

When the payout CPU 301 determines in S624 that the value of the payout request number is smaller than “−10” (YES in S624), the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of game balls related to overpayment is not within the allowable range. Then, the overpay flag is set to 1 (S625), and the motor activation initial process is ended.

On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S624 that the value of the payout request number is not smaller than “−10” (when NO is determined in S624), the payout CPU 301 allows the number of game balls related to overpayment. It is judged to be within the range, and it is judged whether or not the payout request flag is 1 (S626).

In S626, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the payout request flag is not 1 (when S626 is NO determination), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no game ball payout request from the main control circuit 70, The motor starting initial processing is ended.

On the other hand, if the payout CPU 301 determines in S626 that the payout request flag is 1 (YES in S626), the payout CPU 301 sets the drop request number from the payout request number (S627).

In this process, a maximum of 15 drop request numbers is set according to the payout request number (total payout amount). At this time, simultaneously with the setting of the requested drop quantity, the payout requested quantity is subtracted by the set requested drop quantity.

Here, since the processing of S628 to S634 is the same as the processing of S422 to S428 in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment has the following effects in addition to the effects of the first embodiment.

That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment updates the requested drop number on the condition that the game ball is detected by the first or second counting switch 181A, 181B. That is, the required drop number is updated each time a game ball is detected by the first or second counting switch 181A, 181B.

As a result, for example, when the payout motor 174 is driven to pay out the game balls according to the requested drop number and there is a payout (overpayment) exceeding the requested drop number, The number of requested drops can be updated by taking the number into consideration.

On the other hand, the payout request number reflects the updated drop request number after the number of game balls corresponding to the drop request number is subtracted when the drop request number is determined. As a result, even when the payout motor 174 is driven once for overpayment as described above, the number of game balls subtracted from the requested number of payouts and the number of game balls actually paid out are calculated. Can be matched.

As a result, it is not necessary to stop the payout motor 174 each time an overpayment occurs by driving the payout motor 174 once, so that the payout of game balls can be continued. Therefore, smooth payout can be performed.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is an enclosed gaming machine, in which a launching means for launching a gaming ball is installed on the upper portion of the gaming machine, and the launched gaming ball passes through a gaming area provided on the gaming board. (The game board itself may be the game area), and the present invention is also applied to an enclosed game machine that is collected by a ball polishing device or a lifting device provided in the game machine.

In the case of applying the gaming machine according to the present invention to such a gaming machine, a sprocket is provided in the lifting device for lifting a game ball (for example, a screw) or a payout motor. Even if the driving means for driving the means for pumping (for example, a lifting motor), the counting switch is a discharge detecting means from the lifting device (for example, a sensor for controlling circulation of game balls) Good.

According to the above-described embodiment of the present invention, the game balls pass through the payout passage 180, are paid out to the upper plate 21 provided on the front surface of the gaming machine, and move from the upper plate 21 to the launching device 15. The gaming machine according to the present invention can be applied to a device such as the one which is fed to the launching device 15.

Further, in the above embodiment of the present invention, the ball tank lower passage 162, the ball supply passage 171, the ball passage near the sprocket 173, and the payout passage 180 may be integrally formed. The expression "integrally" as used herein includes a state of being integrally formed by welding, die cutting, screwing, crimping, or the like.

Further, in the case where the ball tank lower passage 162 and the ball supply passage 171 are integrally formed, and in the case where the ball supply passage 171 and the ball passage near the sub rocket 173 are integrally formed, four configurations exemplified by It may be integrally formed by extracting two configurations and dividing them according to cases.

Similarly, when the ball passage near the sprocket 173 and the payout passage 180 are integrally formed, the ball tank lower passage 162, the ball supply passage 171, and the ball passage near the sprocket 173 are integrally formed. The three structures may be extracted from the four structures described above, and the three structures may be formed into a body.

Further, the ball supply passage 171 may be provided in a game member (for example, a ball polishing device of a decorative unit or an enclosed game machine) that constitutes the game machine. This is nothing but the application of the gaming machine according to the present invention even when the device provided with the member corresponding to the sprocket 173 is connected to the gaming member acting as the ball supply passage 171.

Further, the ball supply passage 171 may be provided with a structure capable of moving the game ball like the sub rocket 173, and generally speaking, the game existing in the ball supply passage 171 in synchronization with and in synchronization with the sprocket 173. If the ball is movable, the gaming machine according to the present invention can be applied.

Further, in the above-described embodiment of the present invention, the current of the payout motor 174 is maintained at a high current for 30 ms (excitation data holding period), and the current of the payout motor 174 becomes a low current after the excitation data holding period elapses. It is switched and then maintained at low current for 470 ms (cooling period). Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, the falling ball monitoring time (500 ms) is configured by 30 ms (excitation data holding period) and 470 ms (cooling period), but the embodiment is not limited to this, and 30 ms (excitation data holding period). The falling ball monitoring time (500 ms+0 to 100 ms) may be configured by the period), 470 ms (cooling period), and 0 to 100 ms (sprocket adjustment period).

With such a configuration, it becomes possible to finely adjust the position of the sprocket 173 during the sprocket adjustment period, and the forward rotation and the reverse rotation assuming ball catching may be repeated. Further, a heat detection unit capable of detecting heat generation of the payout motor 174 is provided, and when the heat generation of the payout motor 174 is above a predetermined value or a predetermined range, the payout control circuit 300 can determine an abnormality of the payout motor 174. May continue to use the sprocket adjustment period as the cooling period.

Furthermore, even if the heat detection means is not provided, the payout of a predetermined value or more (for example, a payout of 10 balls or more when a maximum of 16 balls are paid out) is continued a predetermined number of times or more (for example, 3 times or more) continuously. Alternatively, the sprocket adjustment period may be set to a specific value (for example, 50 ms). At this time, the set sprocket adjustment period may be a predetermined value or a constant value. Normally, it is not necessary to set the sprocket adjustment period for cooling because there is a sufficient cooling period, but because the environment differs depending on the amusement park where the gaming machine is installed, the payout motor should be used during the original cooling period. There may be insufficient cooling of 174. Therefore, by assuming such a case and adopting the above-described configuration, it is possible to pay for the cooling period of the payout motor 174 when the payout is continuous. As a result, it becomes possible to pay out more safely.

As described above, when the fall ball monitoring time (500 ms + 0 to 100 ms) is configured by 30 ms (excitation data holding period), 470 ms (cooling period), and 0 to 100 ms (sprocket adjustment period), the fall occurs. It can be said that the cooling period of the payout motor 174 is extended based on the extension of the ball monitoring time, and that it is also represented that the falling ball monitoring time is extended based on the extension of the cooling period. Is possible.

Further, in the above-described embodiment of the present invention, if the dispensing CPU 301 controls the flapper 400 to switch to either the first ball passage 401 or the second ball passage 402, the shape, material, and driving method are It is not limited. For example, as shown in FIG. 88, it may be plate-shaped, or it may be moved horizontally by healing a game ball falling from the upper part of the ball passage so that the game ball cannot pass through one ball passage. Therefore, a mechanism that can eventually distribute the game balls may be used, or a mechanism similar to that of the sprocket 173 may be provided, and the game balls may be guided in any direction after once receiving the game balls. It may be.

Further, in the above-described embodiment of the present invention, 5 ms×4 steps are defined as the excitation data corresponding to the unit driving amount, but the present invention is not limited to this. As the excitation data in the number of retries, the payout motor 174 of 5 ms×16 steps is driven, and the excitation data holding period 30 ms+cooling period 470 ms=500 ms after the driving of the payout motor 174 of 5 ms×16 steps is set, and the basic retry operation engine is set. Is set to 5000 ms (basic retry operation period), and the time obtained by subtracting the excitation data holding period, the cooling period, and the time required for one retry (5 ms×16=80 ms) from the basic retry operation period It may be set as the falling ball monitoring time, and when the stop factor occurs or the specified number of times (240 times) of retries is completed within the falling ball monitoring time, the idle state may be set. At this time, the maximum number of retries is 240, and the time required for one retry is set as the basic retry operation period. As a result, since a sufficient monitoring time is set as the falling ball monitoring time, it becomes possible to use the falling ball monitoring time as the time to be stored by intermittent prevention when the 15-ball security switch 172 is disconnected. It is possible to pay out more safely.

Further, in the above-described embodiment of the present invention, the number of game balls to be moved by one driving of the payout motor 174 is subtracted based on the number of game balls detected by the counting switch 181 in the retry control, and thus the number of requested drop is reduced. Although the "partition payout amount" is set, the "set the requested drop number (partition payout amount)" here may include contents such as determination, update, and change.

Further, the payout in the above embodiment of the present invention is based on the premise that the game balls are paid out as the game medium, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game media are medals, credits, and electronically managed game media. It is considered to pay out various media such as pseudo media, which are treated in terms of number and amount.

The "movement" described in the claims of the present application includes a case where the position of the game ball is moved by the game ball control means such as payout, lending, retry control, and lifting. Therefore, the present invention can be applied to any case as long as the position of the game sphere is moved by the above-mentioned game sphere control means.

Further, "the game ball moves" means that the game ball is freely pushed by the game ball control means when the game ball is directly pushed or pulled, or when the game ball is unlocked. The game ball moves indirectly, which is assumed when one or a plurality of game balls move indirectly as a result of starting a fall or moving one game ball by the game ball control means. Including the case.

Although the embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described configuration. For example, although the navigation is executed according to the number of the assigned navigations, the continuation rate lottery may be performed and the navigation continuation rate may be added. That is, for example, it is possible to stock a plurality of navigations having a continuation rate of 0%, 50%, 80%, etc., and when the navigation is executed, whether continuous navigation is performed by performing continuous lottery according to the continuation rate. It may be decided to decide. If you win, we will continue to draw at the same continuation rate next time.If you do not win, this navigation will disappear, but if there is a navigation stock, use the next navigation to continue that navigation. A continuous lottery may be conducted at a rate. It should be noted that the continuation rate of 0% means that the navigation does not continue and ends only once. If all navigations are given, the navigations are guaranteed to execute the navigations three times, and then the continuation rate lottery is performed. Further, in the case of all navigations, navigation with a 100% continuation rate that is limited to three times may be given.

Also, for example, as a production during the "big hit game", it was shown that the number of navigations was decided in advance and the results were shown, but the player succeeded in a mini game etc. in order to have the technical intervention of the player. In the case of doing, navigation may be given. For example, it is assumed that a push game having a plurality of difficulty levels is executed during a big hit game, 0% continuous navigation is given when a low difficulty game is successful, and a high difficulty game is successful. All navigation may be added. The mini game may be a game other than the push game, for example, a quiz or the like.

In the "second high probability state", if the winning content is "normal without payout" (special figure (1)-8 to special figure (1)-12), the set game is not performed after the "big hit game state" The state shifts to the "first high probability state" of the "normal game state". Therefore, an effect that can be recognized to shift to the “first high probability state” is performed. However, due to this effect, the player may recognize that the gaming state shifts, and may misunderstand that the "big hit" expectation level has increased. Therefore, an effect that suggests the transition to the "normal game state (sub)" may be performed before the effect that allows the transition to the "first high probability state" to be recognized. As a result, the player recognizes that the "big hit gaming state" has shifted to the "first high probability state", but the "normal hit state (sub)" has transitioned to after the "big hit gaming state". Therefore, it is possible to suppress making the above misunderstanding.

In addition, in the "time saving game" after 50 times, it was decided to perform navigation suppression such as not executing navigation from the viewpoint of "attacking striking", but a player performing "time saving game" 50 times or more. It can be said that they are not necessarily the “strategy”. Therefore, for example, a right-handed sensor that detects a game ball is installed in the area on the right side of the game area 12a so that it can be detected that a right-handed ball has been hit. Based on the detection signal of the right-handed sensor and the like, the normal timing due to the normal constant firing and the abnormal timing caused by operating the firing handle 25 may be determined.
For example, as shown in FIG. 97, a right hit sensor 58 and a rail 59 for guiding the game ball to the right hit sensor 58 may be provided on the game board 12. Note that FIG. 97 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board of the pachinko gaming machine according to another embodiment of the present invention. In FIG. 97, members similar to those of the game board 12 shown in FIG. 3 are designated by similar reference numerals. The game board 12 of FIG. 97 is substantially the same as the game board 12 shown in FIG. 3 except that it has a right-handed hitting sensor 58 and a rail 59.
In FIG. 97, the right hitting sensor 58 is installed on the upper right side of the game board 12. Further, the rail 59 is also installed on the upper right side of the game board 12, and the rail 59 is arranged at a position where the game ball is guided to the rail 59 when the player is making a right hit. Further, the game ball guided by the rail 59 is arranged so as to always pass through the right-handed sensor 58. As a result, when the player is making a right hit, the game ball always passes through the right hit sensor 58, and it is determined whether or not the player is shooting the game ball toward the right side of the game board 12. You can judge.
As described above, the normal timing and the abnormal timing can be discriminated based on the detection signal of the second starting opening winning ball switch 45a and the detection signal of the right hitting sensor 58. As a result, it is presumed that the "trick-and-hit" is being performed at the abnormal timing even though the navigation for performing the "big hit game" of 16 rounds is being performed. When the output timing of the detection signal by "Strike-through" is detected (abnormality detection), it can be inferred that "Strike-through" is being performed regardless of the number of "time saving games", and in that case, navigation suppression The flag should be set.

In addition, when the time from the output of the detection signal from the second starting opening winning ball switch 45a to the output of the detection signal from the right-handed hitting sensor 58 is too long, it may be presumed that it is a "tactical hit". .. Since the output timing of the detection signal by the normal striking method is different from the output timing of the detection signal by the "conquest striking", it can be inferred that the "conquest striking" is performed.

In addition, if the first abnormality is detected, a "warning" is given, a final warning is given the second time, and navigation is stopped the third time. You may decide to take it.

Further, although the normal symbol is already known, the normal symbol and the special symbol may be related to each other. For example, if there are a plurality of ordinary symbols, and if "V hit" is reached, the ordinary symbol and the first big prize that triggered the opening of the second starting opening 45 that triggered the "V hit". The lottery for the next navigation may be performed based on the special symbol when the device 54 is opened.

For example, the normal symbol, there are two types of normal symbol (1) and ordinary symbol (2), if the normal symbol (1) small hit (2) -1 combination, with high probability in the next navigation lottery If it is a combination of ordinary symbols (2) small hits (2)-4, it may be decided that a lot will be drawn in the next navigation lottery with a low probability. As a result, the player can play the game with amusement even when the "V hit" is reached.

Further, in the case of "per V", the navigation lottery probability may be changed according to the number of winning prizes at the time of winning the second starting opening 45 which is the trigger. Further, the number of winning prizes may be notified. For example, it is possible to display a content such as "If three or more balls enter the second starting port 45 and hit V, the next navigation is confirmed." As a result, the player can play the game with amusement even when the "V hit" is reached.

In the above-described embodiment, the navigation is executed according to the number of navigations provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even when the number of navigations is 1 or more, the navigation is used. It may be determined by lottery whether or not to win the short-time or big hit. As a result, since such a release effect is performed during the big hit, it becomes possible for the player to entertain the game with more interest during the big hit.

The present invention can be applied to an enclosed game machine. The enclosed game machine has a fixed number of game balls in the game machine, and manages the number of game balls from the viewpoint of fraud prevention. Therefore, the game balls that have been launched are also detected, and the number of launched balls is managed. Therefore, when the present invention is applied to an enclosed game machine, for example, ceiling lottery may be performed based on the number of game balls shot. For example, it is possible to determine whether or not a "big hit" is won each time when 1500 game balls are shot, and to perform a ceiling lottery if not won. In addition, if 15,000 shots are not won in the “big hit”, 100% may be won in the ceiling lottery. By thus setting the number of game machines to be used as a reference, the ceiling state is uniformly given without being affected by the ease of winning the prize at the starting opening.

In the above-described embodiment, when the ceiling lottery is performed and the winning is won, it is decided to immediately shift to the “third high probability state”. May be performed after 20 times. Then, during the 20 times, an effect (so-called omen effect) for notifying that the subsequent lottery will be won may be performed. As a result, the player can know the game state and the like to be transferred, and can play the game with a sense of expectation. Further, in general, such a precursor effect could be performed only for the number of game balls held, but the predictive effect can be performed over a longer game period, and the player can expect a relatively long time. It is possible to have it.

Although it is assumed that the RAM all day navigation lottery has a high probability, the all day navigation lottery may have a high probability by turning on the power of the gaming machine as described above.

The content of the navigation effect, the trigger for giving the number of times of navigation, and the like are not limited to the above-described embodiment. In the above embodiment, in the “first high probability state”, when the special map types are special maps (1)-1 to (1)-7, all navigations, that is, three times of navigations are given. Is not limited to three, and may be, for example, only two. However, it is preferable that the "first high-probability state" is more likely to be given a navigation than the gaming states other than the "first high-probability state".

In the above-described embodiment, the advantageous first special game is the one with a large number of rounds, but the number of sets in the time saving game state is eliminated, and the case where a big hit to shift to the time saving game is the first special game, and the time saving game The case of a normal big hit that does not shift may be the second special game. When the navigation is provided, the first special game and the second special game are not limited as long as there is an advantage or disadvantage to the player, such as a launch navigation at the time of winning the small hit which is the first special game.

[Application example]
In each of the above-described embodiments and various modifications, the pachinko gaming machine has been described as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. The various techniques of the present invention described above can be applied to other game machines, for example, various game machines such as a ball game machine, a gaming machine, and an enclosed game machine. Further, for example, it can be applied to an enclosed type pachinko machine, an arrangement ball, a ball, etc., which is a kind of ball game machine.

Background art and problems (No. 1 to No. 4) of the configuration described in the present embodiment will be described.

[Background Technology and Issues (1)]
In a pachinko game machine, generally, when a player shoots a game ball, which is a game medium, into a game area by a launching device, and the game ball wins a winning opening or the like provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls Will be paid out. Further, some pachinko game machines execute a big hit game in which the normally-closed special winning opening is repeatedly opened for a predetermined period of time. In the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the game balls that have won the special winning opening. Here, some of the special winning openings have a blade member, and such a special winning opening executes the big hit game by repeatedly operating the blade members to change from the closed state to the open state. Further, some pachinko gaming machines execute a small hitting game in which the special winning opening is opened for a predetermined period from the closed state.

For example, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-233375, during a small hitting game, the blade member changes its posture to an open posture that opens and closes the opening/closing area, allowing the game ball to enter the opening/closing area. There is a pachinko game machine. In this pachinko gaming machine, a V winning opening is provided in the opening/closing area, and a gaming ball is won in the V winning opening during the small hitting game, whereby the big hitting game state is controlled. In this pachinko game machine, when a game ball wins the V winning opening during the small hit game and is controlled to the big hit game state, the small hit pattern showing the result of the special symbol determination that triggered the big hit game state this time. Depending on the type, the game state after the big hit game is finished is determined. It should be noted that, by changing the gaming state, for example, the transition probability to the big hit gaming state will change. Therefore, as a result, the number of game balls that can be acquired by the player changes, which may change whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous for the player.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-233375, it is easy to win the small hitting game during the time saving game, and the opening/closing area is easily opened. Therefore, the game ball is won in the V winning opening. There is a possibility of shifting to the jackpot gaming state. In addition, even if the time saving game is not in progress, it may shift to the big hit game state and the game state may be changed. By changing the game state as described above, as a result, the number of game balls that the player can obtain changes. As described above, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-233375, the gaming state changes, and as a result, the number of gaming balls that the player can acquire changes not at a fixed rate. Therefore, it is suppressed that the game becomes monotonous.

Here, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-233375, the change of the ratio of the number of payouts of the game balls in the game does not depend on the operation technique of the player, but tends to be automatically determined by the gaming machine. Is a strong thing. The player only operates the operation handle to shoot a game ball, and only performs right-handed and left-handed operation according to the game state. As described above, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-233375, the operation performed by the player in order to change the ratio of the number of payouts of the game balls is monotonous, and eventually the player gets tired of the game. There was a problem.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that allows a player to concentrate on playing a game without getting tired of the game and to improve the interest of the game. And

[Background Technology and Issues (2)]
In a pachinko game machine, generally, when a player shoots a game ball, which is a game medium, into a game area by a launching device, and the game ball wins a winning opening or the like provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls Will be paid out. Further, some pachinko game machines execute a big hit game in which the normally-closed special winning opening is repeatedly opened for a predetermined period of time. In the big hit game, a number of game balls corresponding to the game balls won in the special winning opening are paid out. Here, some of the special winning openings have a blade member, and such a special winning opening executes the big hit game by repeatedly operating the blade members to change from the closed state to the open state.

For example, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-233375, during a small hitting game, the blade member changes its posture to an open posture that opens and closes the opening/closing area, allowing the game ball to enter the opening/closing area. There is a pachinko game machine. In this pachinko gaming machine, a V winning opening is provided in the opening/closing area, and a gaming ball is won in the V winning opening during the small hitting game, whereby the big hitting game state is controlled. In this pachinko game machine, when a game ball wins the V winning opening during the small hit game and is controlled to the big hit game state, the small hit pattern showing the result of the special symbol determination that triggered the big hit game state this time. Depending on the type, the game state after the big hit game is finished is determined. It should be noted that, by changing the gaming state, for example, the transition probability to the big hit gaming state will change. Therefore, as a result, the number of game balls that can be acquired by the player changes, which may change whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous for the player.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-233375, it is easy to win the small hitting game during the time saving game, and the opening/closing area is easily opened. Therefore, the game ball is won in the V winning opening. There is a possibility of shifting to the jackpot gaming state. In addition, even if the time saving game is not in progress, it may shift to the big hit game state and the game state may be changed. By changing the game state as described above, as a result, the number of game balls that the player can obtain changes. As described above, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-233375, the gaming state changes, and as a result, the number of gaming balls that the player can acquire changes not at a fixed rate. Therefore, it is suppressed that the game becomes monotonous.

As described above, according to the gaming machine described in JP2013-233375A, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous. However, it is only about the number of game balls that the player can obtain. Even when the player continues to play the game for a long time, in order to concentrate the game without getting tired, it is preferable that the gaming machine has a configuration capable of further suppressing the game from becoming monotonous. If such a structure is not provided, if the game is continued for a long time, the player will eventually get tired of the game.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that allows a player to concentrate on playing a game without getting tired of the game and to improve the interest of the game. And

[Background Technology and Issues (3)]
Among the pachinko game machines, there is a so-called one type/two type mixed type as disclosed in JP 2010-273786 A, for example. In this pachinko gaming machine, a special symbol lottery is executed when a game ball wins a predetermined starting opening. Then, after the symbols are variably displayed on the symbol display device, the symbols showing the result of the special symbol lottery are stopped and displayed. Here, when a predetermined jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the symbol display device, the first special game is executed with a jackpot of one kind. On the other hand, when the predetermined small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the symbol display, the blade member that closes the variable specific winning opening operates, and the game ball enters the variable specific winning opening during this time and passes through the V zone. If it does, it becomes a big hit of two kinds and the second special game is executed.

This pachinko gaming machine is equipped with a variable starting port that is opened only while the electric accessory is operating, in addition to the above-mentioned predetermined starting port, and is executed when a game ball wins the variable starting port. In the special symbol lottery that is performed, it is a small hit with a relatively high probability. In this pachinko gaming machine, the winning probability of the open/close lottery of the variable start opening executed by the game ball passing through the predetermined passage area is relatively high, and the variable start opening when the open/closed lottery is won. The game may be controlled in the short time game state in which the opening time is extended. In the time saving game state, there is a relatively high possibility that the game ball will enter the variable specific winning opening, and there is a high possibility that the game ball will pass through the V zone and become a big hit of two kinds. Further, even if the game balls do not pass through the V zone, the predetermined number of game balls are paid out only when the game balls enter the variable specific winning opening. Thus, it can be said that the time saving game state is an advantageous game state for the player.

As described above, in the gaming machine described in JP2010-273786A, not only the type 1 big hit and the type 2 big hit but also the time saving game state is advantageous to the player. Therefore, the time saving game state is long. It can be said that it is preferable for the player to continue. Therefore, some players perform a game ball launch operation at a timing such that the game ball does not pass through the V zone even if the game ball enters the variable specific winning opening. By such irregular hitting, it is possible to further increase the payout game balls by preventing the game balls from passing through the V zone until the end of the duration of the time-saving game state.

However, such irregular hitting by the player is not preferable for the hole side. Therefore, some holes prohibit this irregular hitting, and take measures such as being careful when a player performing the irregular hitting is seen. However, it is necessary to keep watching the state of the game for a while to find out that this irregular hitting is done, and it is not easy to find.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that suppresses irregular hitting by a player.

[Background Technology and Issues (4)]
In a pachinko game machine, generally, when a player shoots a game ball, which is a game medium, into a game area by a launching device, and the game ball wins a winning opening or the like provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls Will be paid out. Since this game ball can be exchanged for money, the player is playing the game expecting that more game balls will be paid out.

Further, depending on the pachinko gaming machine, points may be added by satisfying a predetermined condition in the game. Then, by accumulating this point, some privilege is given. For example, in the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-42574, points are added when a game specified as a point-up condition is played, and when this point is equal to or more than “reference points”, the game level is reached. Is calculated, and the lottery necessary for collecting the item information used in the game such as music data and character image data is performed according to the number of game levels.

As a result, the player can enjoy the game by increasing the number of points as well as increasing the number of game balls by playing the game.

As described above, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-42574, the ability to collect music data, character image data, etc. is certainly one of the pleasures of the game. However, this point is not related to the payout of the game balls, and it can be said that the player is slightly less interested in the point.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and allows a player to play a diversified game while enjoying an increase in points accumulated in the game, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. An object is to provide a game machine that can be used.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 13 Liquid crystal display device 13a Display area 15 Launching device 43 Ball passing detector 44 First starting opening 45 Second starting opening 53 Second big winning device 57 V winning opening 58 Right hitting sensor 71 Main CPU
80 Real Time Clock 201 Sub CPU
203 Work RAM

Claims (2)

An operation means capable of determining a final game result according to the operation mode of the player,
A lottery means capable of determining a pre-game result related to the final game result based on a lottery,
Regarding the operation of the operation means, an informing means for informing an operation mode that can be a first result advantageous to the player among the final game results,
A right granting means capable of granting a notification right when a predetermined notification condition is satisfied;
Initial setting means for setting initial settings by performing a predetermined initialization process,
After the predetermined initialization process has been performed, a special game state in which the notification can be executed by the notification means , which is a game state advantageous for the player who shifts after the game won in the predetermined lottery ,
After the predetermined initialization process is performed, the game state is a game state to stay when not winning the predetermined lottery, a normal game state in which the notification is not executed by the notification means,
The right granting means compares the case where the predetermined notification condition is satisfied in the state where the initial setting is set, and the case where the predetermined notification condition is satisfied in the state where the initial setting is not set. And increase the probability of granting the notification right,
In the special game state, the notification means has the notification right granted by the rights granting means, and the lottery means has determined the preliminary game result that can be the advantageous first result. In addition, it is possible to notify an operation mode that can bring about a first result advantageous to the player, the game machine. Further comprising notification right number updating means for updating the number of notification rights,
The notification right number updating means notifies the player of an operation mode that may have an advantageous first result for the player with the notification right number, and obtains the advantageous first result as the final game result. In the case of playing, the notification right number is subtracted, and when the advantageous first result is obtained as the final game result regardless of the notification of the notification means with the notification right number, the notification The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the number of rights is not subtracted.

Images